Skip to main content

Full text of "The cinematograph book; a complete practical guide to the taking and projecting of cinematograph pictures"

See other formats


The 

Cinematograph 

*Book 


Edited  by 
Bernard 
E.Jbnes 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


The  Cinematograph  Book 


m 


3 
O 

Z  ~ 

O   = 

II 

31 

—         « 

o-    S 

a  I 

Q 


T] 

CinematognJfyfP  Book 

A  Complete  Practical  Guide  to 
the  Taking  and  Projecting  of 
Cinematograph  Pictures 


EDITED  BY 

BERNARD  E.   JONES 

Editor  of  "Work" 


With  8   Half-tone   Plates  and   Numerous 
Line  Drawings  in  the  Text 


CASSELL   AND   COMPANY,   LTD 

London,    New   York,    Toronto   and    Melbourne 


First  Published  August  1915. 
Reprinted  September  1916. 


TR 
880 


PREFACE 

THIS  book  provides  a  simple  and  easily  understood  guide 
to  the  art  and  practice  of  making  and  projecting  cine- 
matograph pictures.  It  fully  explains  the  principle  upon 
which  the  cinematograph  effect  is  produced,  gives 
detailed  instructions  on  using  a  cinematograph  camera 
and  on  developing,  printing,  and  finishing  the  film,  and 
then  gives  a  course  of  lessons  on  the  projector,  embracing 
its  mechanical  and  optical  parts,  illuminants  and  their 
management,  its  practical  operation,  cleaning,  lubrica- 
tion, etc.,  etc.  In  addition,  chapters  are  included  on 
what  to  do  should  the  film  fire,  screens,  film  winders, 
trick  films,  home  exhibitions,  and  cleaning  and  repair- 
ing films,  the  concluding  feature  being  a  reprint  of  the 
Cinematograph  Act  and  of  certain  official  rules,  orders, 
and  regulations. 

I  have  much  pleasure  in  acknowledging  the  help  of 
Mr.  A.  Lockett,  who  contributes  the  instruction  on 
practical  cinematography,  as  well  as  on  some  other 
matters  ;  of  Mr.  Theodore  Browne,  who  is  the  author  of 
the  chapter  on  cinematograph  pictures  in  natural  colour 


892288 


vi  PREFACE 

and  of  parts  of  other  chapters  ;  and  of  Mr.  Phil  Robinson, 
who  is  responsible  for  much  of  the  information  on  prac- 
tical projection.  Some  of  the  chapters  are  very  largely 
from  my  own  pen. 

I  appreciate  highly  the  kindness  of  the  many  firms 
who  have  freely  and  courteously  placed  their  illus- 
trations and  information  at  jny  disposal. 

Readers  in  need  of  help  on  any  subject  dealt  with  in 
this  book  should  address  themselves  to  "  Work,"  La 
Belle  Sauvage,  London,  E.G.,  in  whose  columns — but 
not  by  post — their  questions  will  be  gladly  answered. 

B.  E.  J. 


CONTENTS 


CHA! 


1.  iNTRODtrcnoN :  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  i 

2.  SOME  HISTORICAL  NOTES 9 

3.  THE  CINEMATOGRAPH  CAMERA  AND  How  TO  USE 

IT 13 

4.  TAKING  CINEMATOGRAPH  PICTURES       ...  23 

5.  DEVELOPING  FILMS 36 

6.  PRINTING  THE  POSITIVE  FILM     .  *.        .46 

7.  THE  PROJECTOR  DESCRIBED         ....  58 

8.  OPTICAL  SYSTEM  OF  THE  PROJECTOR  75 

9.  PROJECTION  ILLUMINANTS 87 

10.  THE  PROJECTION  ARC  LAMP  AND  ITS  MANAGEMENT  117 

11.  SCREENS 154 

12.  OPERATING  THE  PROJECTOR          ....  158 

13.  WHAT  TO  DO  IF  THE  FILM  FIRES         .         .         .  170 

14.  CLEANING  AND  REPAIRING  FILMS         .        .        .  174 

15.  FILM  WINDERS 180 

16.  NATURAL  COLOUR  CINEMATOGRAPH  PICTURES        .  183 

17.  MAKING  TRICK  FILMS 186 

18.  CINEMATOGRAPH  EXHIBITIONS  AT  HOME        .        .  194 

19.  ACTS  AND  REGULATIONS 203 

INDEX 213 


LIST    OF    HALF-TONE    PLATES 

UP-TO-DATE  PROJECTION  OUTFIT      .         .  Frontispiece 

Facing  page 

INTERIOR  OF  TYPICAL  CINEMATOGRAPH  CAMERA  .  16 

FILM  PRINTER  OPERATED  BY  ELECTRIC  MOTOR  .  .  48 
CAMERA  INTERIOR,  SHOWING  SPROCKETS  AND  CHAIN 

DRIVE 80 

PROJECTOR  MECHANISM,  SHOWING  WORM-DRIVE  AND 

SPUR  WHEELS 112 

THE  KINEMACOLOR  PROJECTOR  MECHANISM  .  .  144 

PORTABLE  DIRECT-COUPLED  PETROL-DRIVEN  DYNAMO  176 
LANTERN  OR  LAMP-HOUSE,  SHOWING  ARC-LAMP, 

ADJUSTABLE  STAND,  ETC 192 


THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

CHAPTER    I 
Introduction  :   General  Principles 

THE  optical  illusion  of  "  animated "  or  "  moving " 
pictures  is  in  accordance  with  a  law  relating  to  the  per- 
sistence of  vision  of  the  human  eye,  whereby  an  image 
of  a  moving  object  does  not  instantly  disappear,  but  is 
retained  by  the  eye  for  a  length  of  time  depending  on  thd 
intensity  and  colour  of  the  light  and  the  length  of  the 
period  during  which  the  eye  was  exposed  to  it.  The 
knowledge  of  this  fact  is  an  ancient  discovery,  a  reference 
to  it  being  found  in  a  book  written  by  Lucretius  about 
65  B.C.  One  of  the  most  familiar  demonstrations  of  the 
phenomenon  is  the  ring  of  colour  or  fire  produced  by 
whirling  a  coloured  or  burning  stick ;  and  other  demon- 
strations are  of  everyday  occurrence.  A  once  popular 
toy— the  wheel  of  life  or  zoetrope— exhibited  this  prin- 
ciple in  a  convincing  manner. 
Most  people  know  this  device  (see 
Fig.  i) — an  open  cylinder  with  a 
number  of  viewing  slits  in  its 
upper  part,  while  arranged  round 
the  inside,  below  the  slits,  is  a  drawn 
or  printed  band  of  "  motion  "  pic- 
tures which,  as  the  zoetrope  revolves,  Fig.  1.— The  Zoetrope 

B 


2  THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

combine  to  give  the  cinematographic  effect.  When  the  eye 
regards  a  moving  object,  certain  nerves  "  telegraph  "  the 
impression  to  the  brain,  and  the  sensation  may  be  divided 
into  four  periods  :  First,  a  latent  period  which  is  almost 
instantaneous,  and  during  which  nothing  seems  to  happen  ; 
second,  a  period  of  less  than  TJo*h  of  a  second,  during 
which  the  sensation  reaches  the  maximum  ;  third,  a 
much  longer  period,  g^th  to  ^th  of  a  second,  during 
which  the  sensation  diminishes  ;  and,  fourth,  a  short 
period  of  decline,  during  which  the  effect  dies  away. 
When  looking  at  a  moving  object  the  fourth  period  is  un- 
noticed, because  a  new  image  takes  the  place  of  the  old 
one  at  the  end  of  the  third  period.  Prof.  Tyndall  estimated 
the  time  of  persistence  of  an  impression  on  the  retina  to 
be  -jgih  of  a  second  ;  in  other  words,  the  impression 
remains  for  ^th  of  a  second  after  the  source  of  excitation 
is  removed,  and  modern  cinematography  is  based  on  this 
estimate,  the  pictures  being  both  taken  and  projected  at 
the  approximate  rate  of  sixteen  per  second. 

The  pictures  are  a  series  of  photographic  positives, 
printed  by  the  action  of  light  upon  a  continuous  film  or 
strip  of  celluloid  coated  on  one  side  with  sensitive  emul- 
sion ;  this  film  is  of  precisely  the  same  nature  as  the 
universal  hand  camera  film.  To  obtain  the  pictures  in 
the  first  place,  the  film  is  exposed  intermittently  in  a 
camera  of  special  construction,  next  developed  to  form  a 
negative,  and  a  positive  copy  made  from  it  by  exposing 
it  in  contact  with  a  new  film  to  the  light,  and  then  de- 
veloping as  before.  To  exhibit  the  pictures,  the  positive 
film  is  passed  through  a  special  form  of  lantern  which 
projects  the  pictures  intermittently  upon  a  screen. 
Sixteen  pictures  are  made  in  the  camera  every  second ; 


INTRODUCTION :  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES    3 

sixteen  are  projected  by  the  lantern  in  the  same  period. 
In  the  camera,  each  picture  receives  an  exposure  of  from, 
say,  ^Oth  to  T£otn  of  a  second  (the  shorter  the  better, 
within  reason,  the  light  and  special  circumstances  per- 
mitting), most  of  the  rest  of  the  time  up  to  ^th  of  a 
second  being  occupied  in  moving  and  stopping  the  film, 
since  the  film  must  be  absolutely  still  for  each  new  ex- 
posure. In  the  lantern  or  projector,  each  picture  is 
projected  on  the  screen  for,  say,  ^jth  of  a  second, 
most  of  the  rest  of  the  -&th  second,  as  before,  being 
occupied  by  moving  and  stopping  the  film. 


Fig.  2. — Optical  Scheme  of  Lantern 

Most  readers  are  familiar  more  or  less  with  the  ordinary 
magic  (or  optical)  lantern.  As  is  generally  known,  it 
comprises  a  body,  an  illuminant,  an  optical  system,  and 
means  for  holding  the  transparency  (slide)  in  the  path  of 
the  light.  The  body  may  be  of  wood  or  metal.  The 
illuminant  E  (Fig.  2) — oil  lamp,  incandescent  gas,  acetylene, 
limelight,  or  electric  light — is  supported  by  the  body 
in  line  with  the  optical  axis  of  the  lenses,  the  lamp  or  jet 
being  mounted  on  a  metal  plate  or  in  a  metal  tray,  which 
slides  in  grooves  formed  in  the  lantern  body.  The  con- 
denser F — two  lenses  mounted  in  a  brass  cell — collects  the 
light  rays  and  causes  them  to  illuminate  the  transparency 
G  evenly  ;  thence  the  rays  pass  to  the  objective  lens  H 
(of  the  Petzval  portrait  type),  which  projects  them  upon 


4  THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

the  screen.  Draw-tubes  in  the  front  of  the  lantern,  and 
the  rack  and  pinion  on  the  jacket  of  the  objective  tube, 
afford  a  means  of  removing  the  objective  lens  farther 
from  the  slide,  and  thus  allow  of  proper  focusing.  The 
transparency,  carried  in  a  wooden  slide  carrier  having 
a  to-and-fro  movement,  is  inserted  into  the  stage  of  the 
lantern  immediately  in  front  of  the  condenser,  the  carrier 
being  held  in  place  by  a  spring  plate. 


Fig.  3. — A  Good  Type  of  Optical  Lantern 

An  excellent  type  of  lantern  which  preceded  the  general 
introduction  of  the  cinematograph  is  shown  by  Fig.  3, 
whilst  on  pp.  60  and  61  is  shown  a  cinematograph  projector 
complete.  Comparison  will  show  that  the  second  is  but 
a  development  of  the  first,  the  draw-tubes  having  been 
removed  and  a  machine  for  accomplishing  the  inter- 
mittent movement  of  the  film  in  the  path  of  the  light  rays 
having  been  substituted.  Thus  the  same  optical  prin- 
ciples apply  to  both,  the  distinctive  difference  between 
them  being  chiefly  the  relative  positions  of  the  slide  and 
of  the  film  in  the  path  of  the  beam  of  light. 


INTRODUCTION:  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES   5 

The  optical  lantern  projects  an  image  of  a  photographic 
transparency  made  on  glass,  which  is  held  in  a  carrier 
and  may  remain  several  minutes  in  the  path  of  the  light, 
the  projected  image  having  a  diameter  generally  from 
30  to  80  times  greater  than  that  of  the  trans- 
parency or  slide,  and  an  area  from  1,000  to  6,000  times 
as  great. 

In  the  cinematograph,  on  the  other  hand,  a  band  of 


-n 


Fig.  4.— Lantern  Slide 

celluloid  film,  on  which  is  a  series  of  positive  photographs, 
is  unwound  from  a  spool  secured  to  the  top  of  the  machine, 
past  the  beam  of  light  which  is  emitted  from  an  aperture 
known  as  "  the  gate,"  and  then  wound  on  to  another 
spool  secured  to  the  bottom.  In  this  case  the  projected 
images,  which  rapidly  follow  each  other  on  the  screen, 
have  each  a  diameter  of  from  80  to  200  times  that  of  the 
pictures  passing  the  gate,  and  an  area  of  from  6,000  to 
40,000  times  as  great. 

When  it  is  recognised  how  much  greater  is  the  magni- 
fication of  the  cinematograph  image  on  the  screen,  as 


6  THE   CINEMATOGRAPH   BOOK 

compared  with  that  of  an  ordinary  slide,  the  importance 
of  using  lenses  of  high  magnifying  power  and  of  the  best 
quality  will  be  obvious. 

An  English  lantern  slide  is  3  J  in.  square,  the  aperture 
of  the  mask  being  generally  3  in.,  which  is  also  the  size 
of  the  picture  (see  Fig.  4). 

The  standard  size  of  cinematograph  film  is  if  in.  wide, 
2-Jo  in.  thick,  and  it  may  be  of  any  length  up  to  1,000  ft. 
or  more  ;  each  picture  is  f  in.  high  and  i  in.  wide,  and  has 
four  perforations  at  each  side,  which  are  regularly  spaced 
and  continued  along  both  margins  of  the  film  throughout 
its  entire  length  (see  Fig.  5).  The  aperture  of  the  gate 
or  aperture  through  which  the  light  is  emitted  is  from 
f  in.  by  £  in.  to  ^  in.  by  in.,  so  that  a  slight  margin  of 
the  picture,  chiefly  at  the  sides,  is  always  lost.  The 
perforations  engage  in  the  pins  of  the  sprocket  wheels, 
and  the  film  is  thereby  drawn  downwards  through  the 
gate  at  the  rate  of  6  in.  (equal  to  eight  pictures  to  one 
movement)  for  each  revolution  of  the  handle. 

Theoretically,  the  handle  should  be  turned  at  the  rate 
of  two  revolutions  per  second,  which  would  bring  i  ft.  of 
film,  or  sixteen  pictures,  into  view  during  that  time. 
This  would  be  equivalent  to  60  ft.  in  one  minute,  120  ft. 
in  two  minutes,  1,200  ft.  in  twenty  minutes,  3,600  ft.  in 
one  hour,  and  5,280  ft.  (one  mile)  in  one  hour  and  twenty- 
eight  minutes. 

Practically,  however,  the  ratio  of  speed  at  which  the 
film  passes  the  gate  will  be  found  to  be  50  ft.  in  one  minute, 
100  ft.  in  two  minutes,  1,000  ft.  in  twenty  minutes,  3,000  ft. 
in  one  hour,  and  5,280  ft.  (one  mile)  in  one  hour  and  forty- 
six  minutes.  The  foregoing  readily  shows  the  approximate 
time  which  it  will  take  to  show  a  film  of  a  certain  length. 


INTRODUCTION:  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  7 

From  what  has  already  been  said,  it  may  appear  that 
the  taking,  and  especially  the  projection,  of  cinemato- 
graph pictures  is  a  simple  matter.  But  a  little  study  of 
the  subject  will  show  that  though  the  principles  of  the 
processes  and  operations  required  are  easily  grasped,  the 
complications  in  practice  are  so  many  that  the  competent 
cinematograph  photographer  needs  to  be  an  exceptionally 
skilled  man,  whilst  the  projector  operator  is  certain  to 
meet  trouble  unless  he  is  thoroughly  conversant  with  the 
optical  and  mechanical  principles  of  his  machine  and 


iiili|       ir 

:,:,:;^ii 

_ Jl __ 

f^nfWWH! 


Fig.  5. — Cinematograph  Film 

the  uses  of  the  accessory  appliances,  and  also  unless  he  has 
at  least  some  elementary  knowledge  of  electricity  and  can 
handle  ordinary  tools  with  some  degree  of  proficiency. 

The  duties  of  the  cinematograph  lanternist  are  con- 
siderably more  difficult  and  more  responsible  than  in  the 
old  days  when  a  magic-lantern  exhibition  consisted  of 
"  still  "  pictures,  a  few  comic  slipping  slides  and  re- 
volving chromatropes,  with  a  three-  or  four-wick  paraffin 
lamp  as  the  illuminant.  Even  then  there  were  sometimes 
failures  on  the  part  of  the  exhibitor.  The  work  grew 
more  complicated  when  limelight  became  general ;  and  as 


8  THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

the  magic  lantern,  with  its  paraffin  lamp,  gradually  evolved 
into  the  optical  lantern,  single,  biunial,  and  triple,  with 
its  high-pressure  limelight  jets,  gauges,  regulators,  etc., 
so  the  exhibitor  had  to  become  more  or  less  trained  in  the 
principles  of  scientific  projection,  if  a  successful  show  was 
to  be  assured.  It  is  becoming  increasingly  obvious  that 
the  high-grade  operator  should  be  specially  trained,  not 
only  in  the  art  of  the  scientific  projection  of  "  still "  and 
"  motion  "  pictures — he  must  also  have  a  knowledge  of 
the  mechanism  and  the  uses  of  the  various  apparatus 
that  are  placed  under  his  care.  And,  further,  he  must 
know  how  to  use  them,  how  to  get  the  best  possible  results 
from  them,  and  how  to  act  in  any  unforeseen  accident  and 
emergency.  The  safety  of  his  audience  is  in  his  keeping. 


CHAPTER    II 
Some  Historical  Notes 

THERE  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  real  inventor  of  motion 
photographs  was  Eadweard  Muybridge,  who  was  born 
at  Kingston-on-Thames  in  1830,  and  afterwards  migrated 
to  America.  In  1872,  whilst  in  charge  of  the  General 
Photographic  Survey  of  the  Pacific  Coast  in  California, 
he  first  interested  himself  in  "  moving  "  pictures.  After 
many  experiments,  he  succeeded  in  giving  the  first  ex- 
hibit in  1879,  when  limelight  was  used  for  projection. 
After  touring  throughout  the  States,  he  came  to  Europe, 
and  gave  an  exhibition  at  the  Royal  Institution,  in 
London,  on  March  isth,  1882.  Mr.  Muybridge  lived  to 
see  wonderful  improvements  in  the  projection  of  motion 
pictures.  He  died  in  1904,  and  was  buried  in  his  native 
town,  leaving  all  his  works  and  mechanism  to  the  Royal 
Borough  of  Kingston-on-Thames,  where  they  may  be 
seen  at  the  Public  Library. 

The  first  cinematograph  using  a  continuous  photo- 
graphic film  was  patented  on  June  2ist,  1889,  by  W. 
Friese-Greene  and  M.  Evans,  and  was  exhibited  before 
the  Bath  Photographic  Society  on  February  25th,  1890. 
The  camera  made  three  hundred  exposures  at  the  rate  of 
ten  exposures  per  second.  The  film  passed  from  a  feeding 
spool  over  a  plate  which  held  the  film  flat  during  ex- 
posure, and  was  received  and  rewound  on  a  second  spool, 
both  being  driven  at  an  equal  rate  from  a  main  shaft. 
9 


to          THE   CINEMATOGRAPH   BOOK 

Between  the  light  aperture  and  the  receiving  spool  a 
roller  containing  a  spring  was  interposed,  the  roller  being 
continually  wound  from  the  main  shaft.  This  spring 
would  have  caused  the  roller  to  revolve  as  fast  as  it  was 
wound,  but  on  the  edge  of  the  roller  was  fixed  an  escape- 
ment tooth,  which  rested  against  a  cam.  The  cam,  itself 
constantly  revolving,  arrested  the  motion  of  the  roller, 
but  a  gap  in  its  edge  permitted  the  escapement  tooth  to 
pass  once  in  every  revolution.  Each  time  this  happened 
the  roller  made  one  turn,  and  drew  down  the  exposed 
part  of  the  film,  substituting  a  fresh  portion.  While  the 
film  was  stationary,  the  portion  that  had  just  passed  down 
was  being  rolled  up  on  the  receiving  spool,  and  the  feeding 
spool  was  reeling  off  a  sufficient  length  of  fresh  film  ready 
to  be  carried  down  by  the  roller  for  the  next  exposure. 
During  the  movement  of  the  film,  the  exposure  opening 
was  covered  by  an  intermittent  shutter.  The  arrange- 
ment for  projecting  the  positive  film  was  on  practically 
the  same  principle. 

In  America,  T.  A.  Edison  was  first  with  his  kinetoscope 
(U.S.  patent,  March  I4th,  1893).  This  was  exhibited  at 
the  Brooklyn  Institute  on  May  9th,  1893,  and  was  in- 
tended to  be  viewed  by  one  person  at  a  time,  looking 
through  an  eye  aperture.  A  perforated  celluloid  film  was 
used,  at  first  with  a  single  line  of  perforations  only.  The 
present  standard  Edison  gauge  film,  with  four  holes  on 
both  sides  of  each  picture,  was  introduced  a  little  later, 
the  exact  date  being  uncertain.  The  film  moved  without 
stoppage,  light  being  allowed  to  pass  momentarily  each 
time  a  picture  was  centred,  by  means  of  a  one-slot  circular 
shutter  driven  at  the  rate  of  forty-six  revolutions  per 
second.  Soon,  however,  a  projecting  pattern  was  made, 


SOME   HISTORICAL   NOTES  xx 

in  which  an  intermittent  motion  was  given  to  the  film  by 
the  interaction  of  a  star-wheel  and  pin.  In  France, 
G.  Demeney  was  first  with  the  chrono-photographe, 
patented  in  that  country  October,  1893,  and  in 
England  December  igih  of  the  same  year.  In  this,  the 
film  was  intermittently  struck  by  a  revolving  eccentric 
or  dog. 

The  biograph  was  the  name  given  to  an  early  machine 
(1896)  invented  by  Herman  Casler,  of  Canastota,  New 
York,  U.S.A.,  who  considered  that  better  results  would 
be  obtained  if  the  film  pictures  were  larger  than  the  usual 
i  in.  by  f  in.  scale.  He  devised  the  biograph  to  take 
pictures  measuring  2f  in.  by  2^  in.  and  to  utilise  the 
whole  surface  of  the  film,  dispensing  with  side  perfora- 
tions, by  the  introduction  of  an  arrangement  of  rollers 
instead  of  sprocket  wheels.  The  biograph  projected 
pictures  at  the  rate  of  thirty  to  forty  per  second,  and 
flickering  was  thus  largely  overcome.  Further,  Casler 
claimed  that  inasmuch  as  the  film  was  carried  forward  by 
friction  rollers  instead  of  by  sprocket  teeth,  there  was 
greater  steadiness  of  the  images  upon  the  screen.  The 
biograph  enjoyed  a  season  of  popularity,  but  it  failed  to 
become  universal. 

The  name  "  bioscope  "  was  first  applied  to  the  cine- 
matograph, it  is  commonly  stated,  by  Charles  Urban, 
and  has  now  become  general.  It  is  believed  to  be 
derived  from  two  words  meaning  "  life  "  and  "  to  see." 

A  fact  that  has  been  generally  overlooked  is  that  the 
term  "  bioscope  "  is  the  name  of  an  invention  by  Eugene 
Simmonar,  probably  introduced  late  in  the  'seventies  of 
the  nineteenth  century.  This  invention  was  a  portrait,  in 
which  the  eyes  of  the  person  photographed  appeared 


12          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

sometimes  open  and  sometimes  closed.  In  producing 
this  illusion,  two  photographs  of  the  sitter  were  taken, 
one  with  the  eyes  open  and  one  with  the  eyes  shut,  and 
one  of  these  was  reversed  right  to  left.  Probably  a  piece 
of  paper  was  sensitised  on  both  sides,  and  one  photo- 
graph printed  on  one  side  and  one  on  the  other,  so 
that  when  held  up  to  the  light  they  were  in  perfect 
register.  There  was  an  arrangement  by  which  the 
photograph  could  be  lighted  from  either  the  back  or 
front,  the  eyes  appearing  open  by  the  one  light  and 
closed  by  the  other.  By  rapidly  alternating  the  lighting 
the  illusion  of  winking  was  obtained. 

The  word  "  cinematograph  "  (more  correctly,  "  kine- 
matograph  ")  is  derived  from  the  Greek  kinema,  meaning 
motion,  and  the  Greek  grapho,  to  write  or  describe. 

Not  all  cinematograph  machines,  it  may  here  be  said, 
employ  a  continuous  strip  of  film.  For  example,  in  the 
apparatus  invented  by  Leo  Kamm,  a  circular  glass  plate, 
12  in.  in  diameter,  is  used  as  a  support  for  the  sensitive 
emulsion,  at  its  centre  being  a  hole  about  if  in.  in  dia- 
meter, and  the  mechanism  is  such  that  the  plate  cannot 
race  past  the  point  at  which  it  is  required  to  be  held 
momentarily  stationary  for  purposes  of  exposure.  The 
circular  plate  is  given  an  intermittent  rotary  motion  and 
also  an  horizontal  displacement,  which  enables  a  series  of 
pictures  to  be  impressed  upon  it  in  a  spiral  form.  The 
combined  camera  and  projector  is  made  in  two  patterns, 
both  of  the  same  size,  but  one  taking  350  and  the  other 
550  pictures  on  the  disc.  Each  picture  of  the  550  series 
measures  J  in.  by  ^  in.,  while  those  of  the  350  series  are 
slightly  larger.  There  seems  no  likelihood  of  this 
system  ever  proving  a  serious  rival  to  the  film. 


CHAPTER    III 
The  Cinematograph  Camera  and  How  To  Use  It 

THIS  chapter  deals  with  the  selection  and  use  of  a 
cinematograph  camera,  together  with  the  various  opera- 
tions involved  in  making  negative  films  and  in  printing 
positives  for  projection. 

The  Camera  Described. — In  principle  the  motion- 
picture  camera  is  very  similar  to  the  projector — in  fact, 
many  projectors  could  be  used  as  cameras  if  they  were 
boxed  in  to  exclude  stray  light.  It  differs,  however,  in 
some  respects.  For  example,  undue  heaviness  can  be 
avoided,  since  fireproof  construction  is  unnecessary, 
while  the  accessories  with  which  it  is  fitted  are  of  a  dis- 
tinctively photographic  nature.  It  will  be  useful  to 
recapitulate  the  essentials  that  have  to  be  met.  Firstly, 
a  series  of  photographs  has  to  be  taken  in  rapid  succession 
with  an  exposure  brief  enough  to  show  no  excessive 
movement  blur  in  any  of  them  ;  secondly,  in  order  to 
do  this  in  one  continuous  length,  the  film  has  to  be  kept 
steady  in  front  of  a  lens  during  each  exposure  and  then 
moved  onward  abruptly  to  bring  into  position  another 
space  of  unexposed  film  ;  and,  thirdly,  a  shutter  must 
alternately  uncover  and  obscure  the  lens  to  coincide 
exactly  with  these  periods  of  rest  and  of  movement. 

The  usual  internal  arrangements  of  a  modern  cinema- 
tograph camera  are  illustrated  by  Fig.  6,  though  the 
exact  details  vary  with  the  make.  The  unexposed  film 
13 


14          THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

is  contained  on  a  spool  A,  the  end  being  threaded  under  a 
guide  roller  B  and  under  a  wheel  c  furnished  with  sprockets 
or  projections  which  engage  in  the  perforations  at  each  side 
of  the  film.  A  spring  roller  D  keeps  the  film  against  the 
sprocket-wheel  and  prevents  it  from  slipping.  At  E  is 
the  gate  or  trap,  in  which  is  the  exposure  opening,  or  mask. 


Fig.  6. — Mechanism  of  Cinematograph  Camera 

The  gate  is  in  two  parts,  one  fixed  and  the  other  capable 
of  swinging  or  lifting  slightly,  but  normally  secured  by 
springs  or  a  catch.  The  function  of  the  gate  is  to  keep 
the  film  flat  and  steady  during  exposure.  At  F  is  the 
intermittent  mechanism,  which  pulls  the  film  down  space 
by  space  as  fast  as  it  is  supplied  by  the  upper  sprocket- 
wheel,  by  means  of  pins  or  claws,  alternately  inserted  in 
and  withdrawn  from  the  perforations.  Below  this,  the 
film  passes  under  a  second  sprocket-wheel  G,  also  furnished 


THE  CAMERA  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT    15 

with  a  spring  roller  H,  under  the  guide  roller  I,  and  is 
then  rolled  up  on  the  winding-off  spool  j.  Behind  the 
lens  K  is  a  rotary  shutter  L,  geared  to  stop  the  passage 
of  light  during  the  downward  movement  of  the  film,  but 
to  leave  the  lens  uncovered  for  an  exposure  whenever  the 
film  is  at  rest  in  the  gate.  A  finder  is  provided  for 
focusing  purposes,  consisting  of  a  long  narrow  tube  M 
running  right  across  the  camera  and  having  a  cap  N 


Fig.  7.— Pin  or  Claw 
Movement 


8.— Williamson 
law  Movement 


outside.  On  removing  the  cap  and  looking  through  the 
tube,  the  image  thrown  by  the  lens  is  seen  on  the  film 
itself,  framed  in  the  gate.  The  focusing  tube  may,  or 
may  not,  have  a  magnifying  lens,  which  also  shows  the 
image  the  right  way  up.  The  objective  lens  K  focuses  by 
means  of  a  rack  and  pinion  on  the  mount,  or  by  turning  a 
milled  ring.  For  keeping  the  subject  in  view  during 
exposure,  when,  of  course,  the  cap  has  to  be  placed  on  the 
tube,  an  extra  finder  is  commonly  fitted  outside  the 
camera.  This  may  be  either  a  concave  lens,  an  open 
wire  frame  with  a  sight,  or  of  the  box  type,  resembling 


16          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

a  miniature  camera.  The  spools  of  film  are  carried  in 
interchangeable  light-tight  boxes  taking  the  place  of  the 
ordinary  dark-slide. 

The  Claw  Movement.  —  One  form  of  the  inter- 
mittent pin  or  claw  movement  is  shown  by  Fig.  7.  A 
pair  of  claws  A  and  B  are  connected  by  bars  c  and  D, 
forming  a  frame  which  is  pivoted  near  the  margin  of  a 
disc  E.  The  bar  D  projects  and  works  in  a  vertical  slot  F. 
As  the  disc  E  revolves,  the  claws  are  given  an  eccentric 
up-and-down  motion,  while  since  they  are  also  guided  by 
the  movement  of  the  bar  D  in  the  slot,  a  to-and-fro  action 
is  imparted  in  addition.  Thus,  with  the  rotation  of  the 
disc,  the  claws  approach  the  film,  pull  down  one  picture 
space,  and  then  are  withdrawn,  leaving  the  film  at  rest  for 
exposure,  until  a  further  revolution  of  the  disc  again 
advances  the  claws  and  pulls  down  another  picture  space. 
Fig.  8  illustrates  the  Williamson  claw  movement,  in 
which  a  central  guide  or  bridge-piece  A  is  employed, 
having  a  slot  of  a  special  curve,  so  that  the  claws  proceed 
in  a  D-shaped  path,  as  indicated  by  the  dotted  lines. 

The  Shutter. —  The  shutter,  like  the  pin  escape- 
ment, has  normally  to  make  sixteen  revolutions  per 
second,  which  is  equivalent  to  sixteen  pictures  or  one  foot 
of  film.  Since  the  mechanical  speed  of  the  shutter  can- 
not well  be  altered,  save  by  modifying  the  rate  of  turning, 
the  only  way  of  varying  the  duration  of  exposure  is 
to  increase  or  reduce  the  size  of  the  opening.  The 
whole  mechanism  is  actuated  by  a  train  of  gear-wheels 
operated  by  a  handle  on  the  left-hand  side  of  the  camera, 
which  is  usually  turned  twice  in  a  second. 

Other  Fittings. — Among  what  may  be  called  re- 
finements, seen  only,  as  a  rule,  on  the  medium-priced 


INTERIOR    OF    TYPICAL   CINEMATOGRAPH    CAMERA 

(Pathe  Frires  type) 


THE  CAMERA  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT    17 

and  the  higher-grade  apparatus,  may  be  mentioned  the 
measurer,  which  registers  on  an  outside  dial  how  many 
feet  of  film  have  been  exposed  ;  the  film  punch,  for  making 
a  mark  or  hole  at  the  end 
of  an  exposure,  to  show, 
when  developing,  where 
one  subject  finishes  and 
another  begins ;  and  the 
speed  indicator,  to  show 
the  rate  at  which  the 
handle  is  being  turned. 
In  cameras  intended  to 
be  used  for  trick  photo- 
graphy, two  extra  spindles 
for  attaching  the  handle 
are  commonly  provided, 
one  working  the  film  back- 
wards and  the  other  ex- 
posing only  a  single  picture 
to  each  turn,  for  use  when 
a  specially  slow  movement 
is  wanted.  Fig.  9  illus- 
trates a  typical  high-grade 
camera  on  a  tripod  having 
a  rotating  head  and  tilting 
table.  The  dial  of  the 
measurer  will  be  noted  at 
the  top. 

Variety  of  Cameras  Obtainable. — The  amateur,  or 
those  who  wish  to  take  only  an  occasional  film  of  a 
length  not  exceeding  about  120  ft.,  may  obtain  for  a 
relatively  moderate  price  what  is  known  as  a  one-sprocket 


Fig.  9.— Professional  Camera  on 
Tripod  (Gaumont  Type) 


i8 


THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 


topical  camera.  This  will  usually  have  a  first-class  lens 
and  should  be  capable  of  doing  ordinary  work,  but  will 
probably  have  a  shutter  with  fixed  aperture  and  will  lack 
the  inside  focusing  tube,  film-measurer  and  such-like 
accessories. 

In  the  cheaper  cinematograph  cameras  of  this  type  the 
lens  is  of  fixed  focus,  and  the  subject  can  only  be  seen  in  an 


Fig.  10. — Butcher's  Empire  Camera 

external  view-finder.  At  a  slightly  higher  price  a  lens 
with  a  focusing  ring,  and  having  a  distance  scale  engraved 
on  the  mount,  is  obtainable,  and  it  may  also  be  possible 
to  examine  the  focus  critically,  if  desired,  by  opening 
the  camera  door  before  threading  the  film  and  inserting 
a  piece  of  plain  matt  celluloid  in  the  gate.  Fig.  10  illus- 
trates the  interior  of  a  typical  one-sprocket  camera.  It 


THE  CAMERA  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT    19 

will  be  noted  that  the  single  sprocket  has  two  spring 
rollers  above  and  below  it  respectively,  and  serves  both 
for  supplying  the  film  and  for  passing  it  to  the  take-up 
box  after  exposure. 

At  least  one  daylight-loading  topical  camera  is  on 
the  market.  The  film  is  obtainable  on  metal  spools 
with  about  5  ft.  of  black  paper  wrapping  at  each  end, 
thus  allowing  it  to  be  loaded  into  or  removed  from  the 
camera  in  full  daylight. 


Fig.  11. — Reflex  Cinematograph  Camera 

Apparatus  of  special  construction  may  now  be  con- 
sidered. 

Fig.  ii  above  shows  a  camera  on  the  reflex  principle, 
which  is  in  many  ways  unique.  By  placing  the  film-boxes 
side  by  side,  instead  of  above  each  other,  space  is  econo- 
mised, while  yet  400  ft.  of  film  is  accommodated.  A  small 
mirror  is  mounted  inside  at  an  angle  of  45°  to  the  lens 
axis,  and  when  brought  into  position  the  exact  picture 
may  be  seen  and  focused  through  a  magnifier  at  the 
side.  The  mirror  may  then  be  immediately  raised  and 
the  exposure  started.  A  wire-frame  direct-vision  finder, 
shown  folded  down,  is  fitted  in  addition.  Interchangeable 
lenses  of  from  2  in.  to  10  in.  focus  can  be  used  at  will. 


20 


THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 


Hand-camera  cinematography  has  been  rendered 
possible  by  means  of  the  Aeroscope  apparatus,  invented 
by  Casimir  de  Proszynski.  With  this  there  is  no  handle 
to  turn,  the  driving  being  done  by  a  compressed-air 
motor  charged  up  with  an  ordinary  bicycle  pump. 
Freedom  from  oscillation  while  held 
in  the  hand  is  ingeniously  secured  by 
an  enclosed  gyroscope.  This  camera 
is  well  adapted  for  impromptu  topi- 
cal work,  for  films  illustrating  travel, 
and  for  natural  history  records. 

For  professional  motion-picture  tak- 
ing, a  specially  strong  rigid  stand  is 
needed,  but  with  a  small  one-sprocket 
camera  any  substantial  tripod  used 
for  taking  still  photographs  will  do, 
provided  the  head  has  no  looseness  or 
side-shake. 

Even  for  the  amateur's  use,  how- 
ever, one  of  the  proper  cinematograph- 
camera  stands  is  strongly  advised. 
These  may  be  purchased  at  prices  to 
suit  all  pockets,  either  with  a  plain  top 
or  with  a  revolving  panoramic  head. 
Fig.  12  shows,  closed  for  carrying,  a 
typical  professional  stand  with  revolv- 
ing and  tilting  movements,  worked  respectively  by  the 
two  handles  shown  at  the  sides.  These  adjustments 
are  often  very  useful,  as  not  only  do  they  save  trouble 
when  training  the  camera  on  the  average  subject, 
but,  if  desired,  a  circular  panoramic  view  can  be  taken 
from  a  raised  position  with  the  apparatus  tilted  at  an 


Fig.   12.— Kinelo 
Camera    Stand 


THE  CAMERA  AND  HOW  TO  USE  IT    21 

angle,  or  the  evolutions  of  aviators,  etc.,  may  be  followed 
throughout.  The  latter  class  of  work  naturally  requires 
two  operators,  one  to  make  the  exposure  and  the  other 
to  manipulate  the  handles  of  the  tripod  head  and  to  keep 
the  subject  in  the  finder.  The  cinematograph  tripod  is 
usually  made  to  extend  to  6  ft.  or  more  for  convenience  in 
operating  above  the  heads  of  a  crowd. 

The  Film.— Unexposed  perforated  film,  both  nega- 
tive and  positive,  is  supplied  in  rolls  packed  in  sealed 
metal  boxes.  The  price  varies  with  different  makes,  but 
the  average  may  be  put  at  2|d.  per  foot  for  the  ordinary 
celluloid  or  3d.  per  foot  for  "  non-flam."  Like  plates, 
films  are  made  in  different  speeds,  extra  rapidity  being 
sometimes  valuable  for  work  in  a  poor  light,  in  interiors, 
or  with  quickly  moving  subjects.  Positive  film  is  slower 
than  that  used  for  negatives,  and  the  celluloid  is  a  trifle 
thicker,  since  it  is  called  on  to  do  longer  and  more  vigorous 
service.  Workers  on  a  large  scale  often  prefer  to  purchase 
unperforated  film  and  do  their  own  perforating,  for  which 
purpose  a  special  machine  is  needed. 

The  method  of  manufacturing  film  may  here  receive 
brief  attention.  Film  is  composed  of  celluloid,  which  is 
first  manufactured  from  pure  bleached  cotton  fibre 
(cellulose,  C6H10O6),  by  nitrating  it  with  a  mixture  of 
nitric  and  sulphuric  acids,  thus  forming  pyroxylin,  which 
is  intimately  associated  with  gun-cotton.  This  is  bleached 
by  the  aid  of  permanganate  of  potash,  or  by  chlorinated 
lime.  The  pyroxylin  is  then  rendered  plastic  by  treatment 
with  a  mixture  of  alcohol,  ether,  acetone,  amyl  acetate,  and 
camphor,  until  the  mass  becomes  homogeneous,  and  is 
then  formed  into  large  sheets.  These  are  piled  up  until  a 
sufficient  quantity  is  obtained,  and  then  welded  into  a  solid 


22          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

block  by  hydraulic  pressure.  The  block  of  celluloid  thus 
obtained  is  dried  and  cut  up  into  the  size  and  shape 
required.  For  sheets,  the  block  is  rapidly  cut  to  the 
desired  thickness  by  a  planing  machine.  The  sheets  are 
then  dried  and  cut  into  strips  of  the  width  required  for 
use.  The  plain  film  is  then  coated  with  sensitised  gela- 
tine emulsion  and  perforated  ready  for  exposure  in  the 
camera. 


CHAPTER    IV 


Taking  Cinematograph  Pictures 

Loading  the  Camera. — To  load  the  empty  film-box, 
it  is  taken  into  the  dark-room,  together  with  a  tin 
of  unexposed  film.  Having  made  sure  that  all  white 
light  is  excluded,  only  a  dull  ruby  light  being  present, 
the  film-box  door  is  opened  or  the  lid  removed,  as  the 
case  may  be.  The  tin  of 
film  is  then  unfastened, 
the  wrappings  removed, 
and  the  roll  lifted  out. 
Care  must  be  taken  not 
to  let  it  unwind,  except 
for  about  3  in.  at  the 
outer  end.  At  one  corner 
of  the  film-box  will  be 
noticed  a  narrow  slit  A 
(Fig.  13)  trapped  with 
velvet,  against  which, 
inside  the  box,  is  a  small  roller  B  running  in  a  recess, 
which  serves  to  prevent  any  light  getting  in  through 
the  slit.  When  loading,  the  slit  should  be  at  the  left- 
hand  bottom  corner,  as  shown,  and  the  roll  of  film, 
having  its  free  end  on  the  right-hand  side,  is  placed 
over  the  wooden  hub  c  on  the  spindle  in  the  middle  of 
the  box.  The  film  should  on  no  account  be  secured  to  the 
spring  on  the  hub.  The  loose  end  of  the  film  is  next  passed 
33 


Fig.  13.— Method  of  Loading 
Camera  Film-box 


24          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

under  the  roller  and  through  the  slit,  leaving  about 
2  in.  protruding  outside,  the  door  of  the  film-box  being 
then  shut  and  fastened. 

The  loaded  box  may  now  be  taken  from  the  dark- 
room and  inserted  in  the  upper  part  of  the  camera,  first 
pulling  out  the  protruding  film  for  a  length  of  about 
18  in.  This  portion  is,  of  course,  unavoidably  fogged. 
The  box  should  be  placed  so  that  the  slit  is  at  the  lower 
left-hand  corner.  Threading  through  the  camera  me- 
chanism is  usually  carried  out  as  shown  by  Fig.  6,  or  as 
in  Fig.  10  if  there  is  only  a  single  sprocket ;  details,  how- 
ever, vary  somewhat  in  different  apparatus.  The  spring 
rollers  are  lifted  as  the  film  is  passed  over  or  under  the 
sprocket-wheels,  allowing  them  to  return  again  as  soon 
as  the  film  perforations  have  engaged  properly  with  the 
projections  or  teeth.  Care  must  be  taken  to  leave  a 
short  loop,  at  least  3  in.,  both  above  and  below  the  gate, 
and  to  note  that  the  claws  of  the  pin  escapement  engage 
the  perforations.  If  these  points  are  neglected  the  film 
may  be  damaged  or  broken.  After  threading,  the  film 
is  passed  through  the  slit  at  the  left-hand  bottom  corner 
of  the  lower  or  take-up  film-box,  under  the  recessed 
roller,  and  to  the  empty  hub  on  the  spindle,  this  time 
securing  the  end  of  the  film  under  the  spring  clip  on 
the  hub. 

The  camera  handle  is  now  slowly  turned  till  the 
film  has  wound  once  or  twice  on  the  hub,  in  order  to 
see  that  all  is  working  properly,  after  which  the  door 
or  lid  of  the  take-up  film-box  is  closed  and  fastened  and 
the  camera  door  also  secured.  All  is  then  ready  for 
operating. 

When  much  work  is  expected,  it  is  usual  to  carry 


TAKING  CINEMATOGRAPH  PICTURES    25 

several  extra  loaded  film-boxes,  which,  being  inter- 
changeable, can  be  used  in  succession  for  taking-up 
as  they  are  emptied.  It  will  be  noted  that  the  spindles 
in  the  film-boxes  are  connected  to  an  external  rotating 
brass  plate  having  two  studs,  and  that,  in  the  case  of 
the  take-up  box,  a  driving  gearing  engages  with  these 
studs,  a  friction  clutch  being  provided  to  allow  of  slip, 
in  order  to  accommodate  the  speed  of  rewinding  to  the 
gradually  increasing  diameter  of  the  roll  of  film. 

Using  the  Camera. — The  manner  of  starting  work 
depends  a  good  deal  on  the  subject.  If  a  scenic  one,  it 
is  possible  to  choose  the  time  when  the  view  or  landscape 
will  be  pleasingly  lit.  As  a  general  rule,  this  will  be  when 
the  sun,  whether  obscured  by  clouds  or  otherwise,  is  on 
one  side  of  the  camera  and  a  little  behind  it.  When 
there  is  a  wide  choice  of  position,  the  most  effective 
lighting  can  probably  be  obtained  merely  by  careful 
selection  of  standpoint,  but,  more  frequently,  there  is 
found  to  be  only  one  ideal  spot  at  which  to  set  up  the 
camera  if  the  prospect  is  to  be  taken  at  its  best,  and 
in  such  circumstances  the  operator  will  have  to  estimate 
when  the  sun  will  be  in  the  right  quarter  and  postpone 
the  exposure  till  then.  Some  of  the  most  successful 
scenic  films  have  only  been  made  as  the  result  of  several 
previous  visits  to  note  down  satisfactory  positions  for 
the  camera  and  approximate  times  for  exposing.  A 
scenic  subject  is  suggested  as  a  good  one  for  the  novice, 
because  the  work  will  be  more  like  ordinary  photography, 
and  there  will  be  no  embarrassment  from  the  necessity 
of  following  energetic  action.  Naturally  there  should  be 
movement  of  some  kind,  or  the  film  would  simply  be 
thrown  away.  Country  and  farmyard  scenes,  river 


26          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

pictures  with  rippling  reflections,  seascapes  with  breaking 
waves  and  possibly  shipping,  are  within  this  category. 

The  first  thing  to  do  is  to  erect  the  stand,  planting  it 
firmly  where  it  cannot  slip  or  vibrate.  The  camera  is 
then  screwed  on  top  and  the  lens  is  directed  towards  the 
subject,  opening  it  to  the  largest  stop  by  turning  the  ring 
or  projection  on  the  iris  diaphragm.  The  cap  is  removed 
from  the  finder  tube,  and,  looking  through  this  from  the 
back,  with  one  hand  on  the  lens,  the  picture  is  focused  as 
sharply  as  possible  on  the  film  in  the  gate  by  slowly  moving 
the  milled  head  of  the  pinion,  or  rotating  the  focusing 
ring  if  that  is  fitted  instead.  If  the  shutter  is  not  in  the 
open  position  turn  the  handle  very  slightly  until  it  is. 
If  preferred,  a  piece  of  plain  matt  celluloid,  on  which  the 
image  is  more  readily  seen,  may  be  inserted  in  the  gate 
before  threading  the  film,  and  the  focusing  done  upon 
this  instead. 

Should  it  be  thought  that  a  little  shifting  to  right  or 
left  will  give  a  better  composition,  this  may  be  attained 
by  working  the  panoramic  head,  or,  in  its  absence,  by 
loosening  the  screw  and  moving  the  camera  with  the  hand, 
taking  care  to  tighten  the  screw  again.  When  the 
subject  is  somewhat  too  high  up  or  too  low  down  on  the 
film,  the  camera  may  be  tilted  a  trifle  downward  or 
upward,  as  the  case  may  be,  unless  buildings  or  objects 
having  vertical  lines  are  present,  when  the  alteration 
should  be  made  by  raising  or  lowering  the  stand,  or  by 
choosing  a  different  viewpoint,  since  tilting  the  camera 
causes  convergence  of  upright  lines.  Some  cinemato- 
graph cameras  have  a  rising  and  falling  lens  board,  with 
which  a  slight  adjustment  is  obtainable  without  shifting 
the  apparatus. 


TAKING  CINEMATOGRAPH  PICTURES   27 

Use  of  the  Lens  Stop.  —  Having  got  the  subject 
satisfactorily  arranged  on  the  film  and  sharply  focused, 
the  stop  to  use  must  be  decided  upon.  The  purpose  of 
the  stop  or  diaphragm  is,  firstly,  to  secure  greater  equality 
of  focus  between  distant  and  near  objects  occurring  in 
the  same  picture,  and,  secondly,  to  enable  the  exposure 
to  be  varied  by  regulating  the  amount  of  light  that  passes 
to  the  film.  Now,  as  a  rule,  short-focus  lenses  are  used 
on  cinematograph  cameras,  and  these  possess,  in  an  un- 
usual degree,  what  is  known  as  depth  of  definition,  which 
means  that,  even  with  the  largest  stop,  the  near  objects 
and  the  far-off  ones  will  be  almost  equally  sharp.  Con- 
sequently, there  is  comparatively  little  need,  save  for 
some  special  purposes,  to  use  a  small  stop  in  order  to 
secure  generally  good  definition.  This  is  obviously  an 
advantage  on  occasions  when  the  light  is  dull. 

In  a  bright  light,  however,  the  film  would  be  over- 
exposed unless  either  the  lens  is  stopped-down  or  the 
shutter  aperture  decreased.  For  an  average  outdoor 
subject  in  a  decent  summer  light,  a  stop  of  //8  is  usually 
about  correct,  in  conjunction  with  a  shutter  aperture  of 
120°,  or  one-third  of  a  circle.  On  a  winter  afternoon 
//3'5  will  not  be  too  large  ;  while,  going  to  the  other 
extreme,  with  a  brilliant  seascape  the  lens  may  need 
stopping-down  to  //i6  or  more. 

There  are  disadvantages  as  well  as  advantages  both 
in  using  a  small  diaphragm  and  in  closing  up  the  shutter. 
Suppose  the  subject  is  a  landscape  having  a  river  with 
waving  bulrushes  in  the  foreground  and  hills  in  the 
distance.  The  river  and  bulrushes  should  be  focused  as 
sharply  as  possible,  and  if  this  is  done  with  a  large  stop 
the  hills  will  be  pleasingly  soft  in  outline  and  will  really 


28          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

look  far  off.  If,  now,  the  lens  is  stopped  down  to  any 
extent,  the  hills  will  become  as  sharp  as  the  foreground 
and  much  of  the  beauty  of  perspective,  together  with  any 
effect  of  relief  or  of  atmosphere,  will  be  lost.  In  such 
circumstances,  it  is  better  to  cut  down  light,  if  necessary, 
by  narrowing  the  shutter  opening  than  by  using  a  small 
stop. 

The  majority  of  British  lenses  are  marked  on  what 
is  known  as  the  /  system,  whereby  the  diameter  of  the 
beam  of  light  admitted  by  any  stop  is  divided  into  the 
focal  length  of  the  lens  and  the  quotient  is  called  the  / 
number  of  that  particular  diaphragm.  Thus,  supposing 
a  lens  is  of  3  in.  focus  and  its  largest  stop  permits  the 
entrance  of  a  beam  of  light  J  in.  in  diameter ;  then, 
since  3  -*-  £  =  6,  the  diaphragm  is  marked  //6.  The 
front  glass  of  the  objective  condenses  the  light  a  little 
before  it  reaches  the  stop,  so  that  the  true  /  value  is  not 
necessarily  obtained  by  merely  measuring  the  diameter 
of  the  latter.  In  opticians'  catalogues  lenses  are  always 
listed  at  their  largest  aperture. 

Lens  "  Rapidity  "  and  Exposure. — Theoretically, 
any  two  lenses  having  the  same  aperture  will  be  of 
identical  "  rapidity,"  that  is  to  say,  they  will  admit 
the  same  amount  of  light  and  will  allow  of  similar  ex- 
posures. Practically,  something  depends  on  the  number 
of  glasses,  reflecting  surfaces  and  air  spaces  in  the  lenses 
compared,  or  even  on  the  different  kinds  of  glass  used 
in  their  construction.  Thus  a  triplet  lens,  having  three 
combinations,  commonly  proves  a  trifle  slower  than  a 
doublet,  which  has  only  two  ;  while  glass  of  a  dark  colour 
or  yellowed  by  exposure  may  markedly  decrease  the  light. 

Obviously,  the  larger  the  stop  in  relation  to  the  focal 


TAKING  CINEMATOGRAPH  PICTURES    29 

length  of  the  lens,  the  more  light  is  admitted  and  the 
shorter  may  be  the  exposure.  The  rule  is,  that  the  ex- 
posure increases  or  decreases  as  the  square  of  the  /  num- 
ber. Thus,  take  //4,  the  square  of  which  is  16,  and  //8, 
the  square  of  which  is  64.  Since  16  is  one-quarter  of  64, 
//4  requires  only  one-fourth  the  exposure  of  //8.  This 
is  readily  understood  if  it  is  remembered  that  //4  is  twice 
the  diameter  of  //8,  and  that  its  opening  must  therefore 
be  of  four  times  the  area.  The  stops  are  usually  marked 
so  that  each  succeeding  higher 
/  number  needs  double  the 
exposure  of  that  immediately 
preceding  it,  though  the 
largest  aperture  is  sometimes 
an  exception. 

High-class  cinematograph 
lenses  are  of  the  anastigmat 
type,  giving  good  definition 
and  a  flat  field  at  a  large 
aperture,  usually  //3'5,  //4, 
/"/5.6,  or  thereabouts.  Men- 
tion must  not  be  omitted  of  Dallmeyer's //i '9  objective, 
with  which  the  exposure  is  less  than  one-quarter  of  that 
needed  with//4,  and  it  becomes  possible  to  do  satisfactory 
work  in  a  poor  light  or  late  in  the  day. 

Shutter  Speeds.  —  The  shutter  factor  may  now  be 
considered.  Since,  normally,  the  film  is  run  through  the 
camera  at  the  rate  of  sixteen  pictures  per  second,  while 
the  shutter  revolves  once  to  each  picture,  it  is  clear  that 
every  revolution  occupies  T\th  of  a  second.  If,  then,  the 
shutter  sectors  are  adjusted  so  that  the  opening  is  90°, 
or  one-quarter  of  a  circle,  as  in  Fig.  14,  the  time  during 


Fig.  14. — Adjustment  of 
Camera  Shutter 


30          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

which  light  is  allowed  to  pass  to  the  film  is  only  one- 
quarter  of  -^r  sec.,  or  ^  sec.  If  the  opening  is  one- 
third  of  a  circle,  the  duration  of  exposure  is  ^  sec.  ; 
if  it  is  one-half  of  a  circle,  the  exposure  is  ^  sec.,  and 
so  on. 

The  shutter  speed  required  depends  on  two  things ; 
first,  the  amount  of  light  necessary  to  make  the  exposure, 
and,  secondly,  the  rapidity  with  which  moving  objects 
pass  before  the  lens.  With  regard  to  the  latter,  take 
such  a  subject  as  a  galloping  horse.  With  this,  if  the 
shutter  speed  is  too  slow,  movement-blur  will  be  con- 
spicuous in  the  film  pictures ;  whereas,  with  a  leisurely 
drifting  barge,  the  slowest  speed  would  be  quite  sufficient 
unless  it  should  be  preferred  to  increase  it  in  order  to 
reduce  the  light,  rather  than  lose  breadth  and  perspective 
by  stopping-down  the  lens. 

A  study  of  the  correct  shutter  speeds  for  objects 
moving  at  different  velocities  is  highly  important  to  the 
motion-picture  operator,  but  it  will  not  do  to  accept  the 
figures  given  for  ordinary  photographic  work,  because 
the  conditions  are  by  no  means  similar.  Suppose  a 
single  glass-plate  negative  has  to  be  taken  of  a  cycle 
race,  crossing  directly  in  front  of  the  camera  at  about 
25  ft.  distance.  According  to  the  usual  tables,  to  avoid 
showing  movement-blur  the  exposure  should  be  -gJo  sec. 
Now,  if  it  were  attempted  to  use  such  a  speed  with  a 
cinematograph  camera,  for  the  same  subject,  undoubtedly 
each  separate  film  picture  would  be  sharp,  but  when 
projected  on  the  screen  the  figures  would  move  jerkily, 
and  there  would  probably  be  multiple  overlapping  out- 
lines. The  reason  is  that,  since  the  exposures  are  made 
at  a  regular  rate  of  sixteen  per  second,  shortening  them 


TAKING  CINEMATOGRAPH  PICTURES   31 

unduly  means  a  longer  interval  between  any  two  pictures, 
during  which  a  rapidly  moving  object  has  time  to  assume 
an  appreciably  different  position,  while  the  intermediate 
stages  between  these  two  phases  of  movement  are  not 
adequately  represented.  It  is  better,  therefore,  to  use  a 
medium-speed  shutter,  not  exceeding,  say,  one-quarter 
of  a  circle,  or  ^  sec.,  and  to  tolerate  a  certain  amount  of 
movement-blur  in  the  individual  pictures,  since  these 
will  then  blend  into  each  other  better  during  projection, 
and  the  effect  will  be  more  realistic.  It  must  be  remem- 
bered that  the  eye  does  not  really  see 
quickly  moving  objects  as  sharply  as  they 
would  need  to  be  defined  in  a  single 
stationary  photograph,  such  as  a  news- 
paper illustration. 

Using  an  Exposure  Meter. — The  light 
is  a  very  variable  factor,  and  its  actinic 
or  photographic  value  can  only  be  pro- 
perly estimated  by  employing  an  ex-  Fig.  15.— Wat- 
posure  meter.  A  meter  specially  scaled 
for  cinematography  is  made  by  the  Wat- 
kins  Meter  Company,  Hereford,  and  is  obtainable  from 
most  photographic  dealers.  As  illustrated  by  Fig.  15, 
it  resembles  a  watch,  and  is  furnished  with  a  chain 
having  a  ball  at  the  end.  This  is/' used  as  a  pen- 
dulum for  counting  seconds  and  half-seconds.  Near  the 
margin  will  be  noted  a  small  semicircular  opening,  by 
the  side  of  which  is  the  remaining  half-circle,  painted 
a  greyish  colour.  Inside,  behind  the  opening,  the  sen- 
sitive paper  is  placed,  a  fresh  portion  being  brought  into 
position  by  rotating  the  back  of  the  case.  Round  the 
edge  of  the  meter  are  scales  marked  "  Act."  and  "  Exp.," 


32  THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

signifying  respectively  Actinometer  Time  and  Exposure  ; 
while  round  the  inner  movable  dial  are  scales  relating  to 
Film  Speed  and  Stop.  To  use,  a  fresh  portion  of  sensitive 
paper  is  brought  into  position  and  instantly  covered  with 
the  finger.  The  pendulum  is  then  started  swinging  and 
the  finger  is  removed,  commencing  to  count  at  the  same 
moment.  Directly  the  paper  darkens  to  the  shade  of  the 
standard  tint,  counting  is  stopped.  The  film  speed  is  then 
set  against  the  time  occupied  in  darkening,  or  Actino- 
meter Time,  by  gripping  the  glass  against  the  back  and 
rotating  both  simultaneously,  when  against  the  shutter 
speed  will  be  found  the  stop  advisable.  The  meter 
should  be  held  so  that  the  same  light  falls  upon  it  as 
upon  the  subject  to  be  photographed. 

Actual  Operation. — Assuming  everything  is  ready 
for  exposure,  the  operator  starts  turning  the  handle,  in 
the  same  direction  as  the  hands  move  round  a  clock. 
This  must  be  done  steadily  and  evenly,  at  the  rate  of 
two  turns  per  second.  It  will  be  as  well  to  practise 
turning  beforehand  with  an  empty  camera,  using  a  watch 
having  a  seconds  hand  as  a  guide  to  the  rate  of  turning, 
unless,  of  course,  the  camera  has  a  speed  indicator. 

The  operator  should  form,  if  possible,  a  rough  idea  of 
how  much  film  he  wishes  to  expose  on  a  particular  sub- 
ject. If  the  whole  spool,  there  is  nothing  to  do  but  con- 
tinue turning  until  the  handle  suddenly  runs  easier,  thus 
showing  that  all  the  film  is  through  ;  whereas,  if  only  a 
portion  of  the  spool  is  wanted,  the  outside  measurer  must 
be  watched  and  the  turning  stopped  directly  the  desired 
figure  is  recorded.  It  is  usual  to  indicate  the  end  of  the 
exposure  in  such  a  case,  either  by  operating  a  punching 
device  or  by  opening  the  camera  and  nicking  a  small 


TAKING  CINEMATOGRAPH  PICTURES   33 

piece  out  of  the  edge  of  the  film  with  a  scissors.  During 
operating  an  eye  must  be  kept  on  the  subject,  to  see  that 
everything  continues  right  and  that  no  person  or  ob- 
struction gets  in  the  way. 

"  Topicals." — Something  may  here  be  said  about 
topicals,  or  "  newsy "  films,  including  such  things  as 
processions,  pageants,  reviews,  athletic  displays,  opening 
ceremonies,  cricket  or  football  matches,  and  so  on.  Quite 
the  most  important  consideration  with  such  subjects  is  the 
selection  of  a  good  standpoint.  Sometimes  this  may  be 
arranged  beforehand  by  application  in  the  right  quarter, 
or  by  making  friends  with  officials,  but  more  often  the 
operator  has  to  put  up  with  the  best  he  can  get  and  to 
take  his  chance  with  the  public.  The  only  advice  that 
can  be  given  is  to  come  reasonably  early,  to  keep  on  good 
terms  with  the  crowd  or  with  rival  operators,  and  to 
accommodate  oneself  readily  to  any  requests  made  by 
the  police  or  others  in  authority.  Pliability  and  a  con- 
ciliatory attitude  in  the  last  respect  often  leads  to  special 
facilities  being  offered,  whereas  the  contrary  spirit  may 
raise  up  unexpected  obstacles.  A  standpoint  slightly 
elevated,  so  as  to  be  above  the  heads  of  the  people,  is 
desirable,  though  occasionally  it  is  better  still  if  one  can 
get  right  in  front.  When  need  arises,  additional  height 
may  be  got  by  fully  extending  the  tripod  legs,  stand- 
ing on  a  box  or  other  convenient  support  to  operate. 
Possibly  the  camera  case  will  have  been  made  strong 
enough  to  serve. 

As  far  as  possible,  the  distance  should  be  judged  at 
which  the  pageant,  procession,  or  whatever  it  may  be, 
will  pass  or  take  place.  The  camera  should  then  be 
focused  upon  that  distance,  or  the  lens  set  to  it  by  means 


34          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

of  the  scale  which  is,  or  ought  to  be,  provided.  For  most 
topical  subjects  not  actually  close  to  the  camera  and  in  a 
fairly  good  light,  so  that  an  unusually  large  stop  is  not 
needed,  it  will  be  about  right  to  set  the  lens  scale  to  a 
distance  of  100  ft.  When  the  subject  conies  in  sight,  the 
camera  is  promptly  pointed  in  the  right  direction  by 
means  of  the  tripod  adjustments,  the  handle  being  in- 
stantly started  and  the  object  of  interest  kept  in  the 
picture  by  watching  the  outside^rmder  and'working  the 
turntable  if  necessary.  When  a  long  procession  or 
pageant  is  filmed,  it  is  seldom  that  the  whole  of  it  is 
taken,  unless  of  exceptional  public  attraction  and  war- 
ranting the  expenditure  of  so  much  film.  It  is  more 
usual  to  expose  only  on  the  principal  features  or  most 
striking  portions,  stopping  the  handle  when  one  of  these 
has  passed  and  starting  it  again  when  the  next  appears. 
The  sections  of  the  film  should  not,  however,  be  made 
too  short  and  abrupt. 

If  the  film  is  to  be  disposed  of,  what  follows  must  be 
done  quickly.  Preparations  should  previously  have  been 
made  for  its  prompt  reception,  development  and  printing, 
and  the  speediest  way  back  should  have  been  ascertained. 
Nowadays,  if  a  topical  film  is  to  have  much  value,  it  has 
to  be  showing  publicly  on  the  screen  within  the  briefest 
possible  time  after  the  actual  event. 

Staged  Subjects  and  Story  Pictures.— These  are 
scarcely  within  the  scope  of  the  amateur  or  the  worker 
on  a  small  scale.  Except  for  such  incidents  as  can  be 
acted  suitably  in  outdoor  surroundings,  a  well-lighted 
studio  with  ample  room  is  indispensable.  This  should 
preferably  be  on  the  top  of  a  house  or,  at  least,  in  open 
surroundings.  There  should  be  liberal  glazing  for  the 


TAKING  CINEMATOGRAPH  PICTURES   35 

admission  of  daylight,  while,  unless  the  work  is  to  be 
hindered  by  time  and  weather,  an  adequate  installation 
of  mercury-vapour  or  arc  lamps  is  also  required.  The 
scenery  and  accessories  are  much  the  same  as  for  the 
ordinary  theatre,  save  that  backgrounds,  etc.,  may  be 
in  monochrome  instead  of  colour.  Usually  professional 
artistes  are  engaged  for  the  different  parts.  The  larger 
film-producers  keep  stock  companies,  including  a  certain 
number  of  "  stars,"  but  smaller  firms,  or  those  who  only 
go  in  for  an  occasional  staged  subject,  are  content  to 
secure  the  spare-time  services  of  a  few  averagely  good 
performers  from  a  local  theatre.  The  conditions  for  good 
film-acting  are  somewhat  different  from  those  obtaining 
on  the  ordinary  stage.  Since  words  are  practically  lost, 
gesture  and  expression  become  of  primary  importance,  but 
these  should  not  be  exaggerated,  except  in  farcical  or 
comic  films.  The  part  should  be  spoken  as  well  as  acted, 
however,  though  the  wording  may  be  more  or  less  im- 
promptu, in  order  to  get  a  natural  effect ;  and  special 
distinctness  of  enunciation  is  desirable  at  all  dramatic 
moments,  as  it  much  improves  the  realism  of  the  film 
if  the  public  can  gather  a  few  key  exclamations  or  sen- 
tences by  watching  the  movements  of  the  mouth.  Care 
must  be  taken  that  the  actors  keep  within  the  field  of 
view  of  the  lens  and  make  their  exits  properly  outside  it. 
As  an  aid  to  this,  it  is  advisable  to  draw  two  diverging 
chalk  lines  on  the  floor  from  the  position  of  the  camera 
to  indicate  the  space  within  which  all  action  must  take 
place.  Careful  planning  and  repeated  rehearsal  are 
always  necessary,  to  secure  that  everything  shall  be 
done  in  the  minimum  time,  in  order  to  avoid  waste  of 
film. 


CHAPTER  V 


Developing    Films 

The  Developing  Frame. — To  develop  an  exposed  film 
it  must  first  be  wound  on  a  frame — of  course,  in  a 
"  safe  "  light.  The  kind  of  frame  now  mostly  used  by 
professional  workers  is  known  as  the  flat  frame,  and 
is  illustrated  by  Fig.  16.  It  is  generally  of  teak, 

with  a  row  of  project- 
ing brass  pegs  at  top 
and  bottom  to  prevent 
the  film  overlapping. 
Metal  standards  sere  wed 
to  the  floor,  as  shown, 
are  commonly  employed 
when  winding,  in  con- 
junction with  a  rod 
from  which  the  frame 
is  readily  detachable, 
though  some  workers 
prefer  a  substantial 
wooden  stand. 

Such  a  frame  is 
quite  easy  to  make.  Fig.  17  shows  in  elevation, 
and  Fig.  18  in  section,  the  details  of  construction. 
The  sides  are  thicker  than  the  ends,  in  order  to 
keep  the  film  from  touching  the  dish,  while  the  top 
and  bottom  bars  are  rounded  on  the  outer  edges  and 
36 


Fig.    16.— Flat    Developing 
Frame  on  Metal  Standards 


DEVELOPING 

slope    inward.      Well-smoothed 


FILMS  37 

headless    brass     nails, 

placed  about   i|  in.   apart  and  projecting  about  J  in., 
will  do  for  pegs.    A  frame  33  in.  square 


outside  will 


A  frame 
accommodate  100  ft.  of  film. 

To  wind,  the  end  of  the  film,  gelatine  or  emulsion  side 
outward,  is  secured  to  the  top  bar  by  a  drawing-pin,  and 
the  frame  is  then  revolved  slowly  away  from  the  operator, 


Figs.  17  and  18. — Home-made  Developing  Frame 

at  the  same  time  guiding  the  film  into  position  between 
the  pegs  as  it  unrolls  and  winds  over  the  bars.  It 
should  be  wound  rather  tightly,  though  without  actual 
strain,  as  it  expands  when  wet. 

The  Pin  Frame. — The  pin  frame  (Fig.  19)  is 
generally  of  brass,  with  diagonal  rows  of  pegs  about 
1 1  in.  high.  To  wind,  a  small  loop  is  made  at  the  end 
of  the  film  and  secured  by  an  ordinary  steel  pin.  The 
loop  is  then  slipped  over  the  innermost  pin  on  the  frame, 
and  the  film  is  wound  spirally  round  all  the  remaining 


38  THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

pins  in  turn,  as  shown  by  the  dotted  lines,  emulsion  side 
outwards,  fastening  the  outer  end  by  making  a  second 
loop.  A  pin  frame  has  the  advantage  of  occupying  less 
space  for  a  given  length  of  film  than  the  flat  pattern,  and 
therefore  needing  smaller  troughs  or  dishes,  with  corre- 
spondingly less  solution,  but  the  winding  takes  longer 
and  requires  greater  care. 

Troughs  and  Tanks. — Development  is  done  either 
in  flat  stoneware  troughs,  as  illustrated  by  Fig.  20,  or, 


Fig.  19.— Winding  a  Pin  Frame 

when  a  number  of  frames  have  to  be  dealt  with  at  once, 
in  upright  tanks  having  grooves  or  divisions.  A  close- 
fitting  lid  or  cover  is  advisable,  to  prevent  oxidation  of 
the  developer.  For  the  amateur  a  flat  trough  or  dish 
is  most  convenient.  A  home-made  wooden  tray  about 
4  in.  deep,  lined  with  linoleum  or  varnished  to  render  it 
waterproof,  is  quite  serviceable. 

On  a  small  scale,  at  least  three  dishes  or  troughs  will 
be  needed — for  developing,  fixing,  and  rinsing  or  washing ; 
though  when  only  an  occasional  film  is  wanted  it  is  cer- 
tainly possible  to  manage  with  two,  if  the  fixing  solution 


DEVELOPING    FILMS  39 

is  kept  handy  in  a  large  jar  or  tub.  Where  much  work  is 
done,  however,  a  vertical  trough  with  divisions  to  take 
several  frames  at  once  would  be  used  for  fixing,  while 
washing  would  be  carried  out  in  an  upright  tank,  lined 
with  galvanised  iron  or  lead,  having  a  siphon  and  air- 
cock  in  addition  to  a  draw-off  tap,  as  illustrated  by 
Fig.  21. 

The  Developer. — The  quantity  of  developer  required 


t=F 


Fig.  20.— Stoneware  Developing  Trough 

depends  on  the  size  of  the  dish  or  tank,  and  must 
be  sufficient  to  cover  the  film  completely  and  for  at 
least  |  in.  above  the  top  edge.  It  is  easily  ascertained 
by  noting  how  many  quart  jugs  of  water  are  necessary 
to  fill  the  respective  receptacles  to  the  proper  level. 
As  a  rough  guide,  a  trough  35  in.  square  filled  to  2  in. 
deep  holds  68  pints.  The  formula  is  largely  a  matter  of 
personal  preference,  and  practically  any  non-staining 
developer  which  will  produce  a  good  ordinary  negative 
will  act  satisfactorily  with  films.  It  is  the  best  policy, 
however,  to  use  the  formula  recommended  by  the  maker 


40  THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

of  the  particular  film  selected,  as  this  is  sure  to  have 
been  tested  and  found  to  give  good  results. 

The  majority  of  workers  prefer,  probably,  a  metol 
and  hydroquinone  developer.  A  typical  formula  is  : — 

Sodium  Sulphite,  5  Ib. 

Sodium  Carbonate,  2|  Ib. 

Potassium  Metabisulphite,  i£  oz. 

Metol,  160  gr. 

Hydroquinone,  5  oz. 

Potassium  Bromide,  f  oz. 

Citric  Acid,  f  oz. 

Water  to  60  pints. 

This  solution  should  be  used  at  a  temperature  of  from 
65°  to  70°  F. ;  it  will  keep  about  a  fortnight,  and  may 
be  worked  repeatedly  till  signs  of  exhaustion  begin  to  be 
evident. 

Development. — The  time  of  immersion  should  first 
be  noted  by  developing  a  short  trial  strip  cut  from 
the  film  to  be  dealt  with,  taking  care  that  the  solution  is 
not  allowed  to  act  long  enough  to  clog  up  the  high  lights 
of  the  pictures,  which,  of  course,  are  the  darker  portions 
of  the  negative.  It  is  as  well  to  rinse  and  fix  the  trial 
strip  also,  in  order  to  see  whether  proper  allowance  has 
been  made  for  the  accompanying  reduction  in  density. 
A  suitable  formula  for  the  fixing  bath  is  : — 

Sodium  Hyposulphite  ("  hypo  "),  14  Ib. 

Potassium  Metabisulphite,  if  Ib. 

Water  to  56  pints. 

Having  developed  the  trial  strip  satisfactorily  and 
noted  the  exact  time,  the  wound  length  of  film  is  placed 
in  the  dish  or  tank,  moving  the  frame  gently  once  or 
twice  to  dislodge  air-bubbles  and  ensure  even  action. 


DEVELOPING   FILMS  41 

It  is  then  left  for  about  a  minute  and  again  slightly 
agitated,  after  which  it  is  allowed  to  remain  undisturbed 
till  the  expiration  of  the  ascertained  time,  when  it  is 
rinsed  promptly  in  plain  water  and  immersed  in  the  fixing 
bath.  There  it  should  stay  for  a  few  minutes  longer  than 
is  necessary  to  remove  all  creaminess  and  render  the 


Fig.  21.— Siphon  Washing  Tank 

pictures  transparent.    The  film  is  then  washed  in  running 
water  for  about  one  hour. 

Drying  the  Film. — The  film  negative  has  now  to 
be  dried.  This  may  be  done,  if  desired,  merely  by 
mounting  the  flat  frame  holding  the  film  on  the  standards 
used  when  winding,  and  revolving  it  quickly  by  hand 
or  motor  in  a  well- ventilated  place  free  from  dust.  Many, 
however,  prefer  to  transfer  the  film  to  a  drying  drum, 
and  with  a  pin  frame  this  transference  is  necessary. 


42  THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOR 

The  drying  drum  consists  of  two  thick  wooden  discs, 
between  which  are  nailed  a  number  of  thin  springy  laths, 
placed  a  short  distance  apart,  as  illustrated  by  Fig.  22. 
The  drum  has  an  axle  through  its  centre,  and  is  sup- 
ported on  a  stand  so  that  it  may  be  revolved.  The 
springiness  of  the  laths  is  intended  to  compensate  for  the 
contraction  of  the  film  in  drying. 

A  home-made  drum  is  readily  put  together.  One 
i  ft.  3  in.  in  diameter  will  accommodate,  say,  4  ft.  of 
film  to  each  turn,  and  allowing  i|in.  width  to  every 
convolution  and  a  trifle  over  at  the  ends,  a  length  of 
40  in.  will  be  ample  for  100  ft.  of  film. 

To  wind,  the  end  of  the  film  is  secured  on  the  drum 
with  drawing-pins  or  a  clip  and  the  drum  is  slowly  re- 
volved as  the  film  is  unwound  from  the  developing  frame, 
until  all  is  transferred.  The  other  end  is  then  secured,  and 
the  film  is  either  left  to  dry  spontaneously  in  a  warm 
room,  with  an  occasional  turn  of  the  drum  to  prevent  drops 
collecting,  or  the  drum  is  revolved  rapidly  by  a  motor. 

Cleaning  the  Dried  Film.— When  dry,  the  celluloid 
side  of  the  film  is  cleaned  from  finger-marks  or  smudges 
with  a  soft  rag  slightly  moistened  with  methylated 
spirit.  The  usual  method  of  working  is  to  have  a 
small  hole  cut  in  the  bench  and  covered  with  glass  let 
in  flush,  the  light  from  an  electric  bulb,  or  reflected  day- 
light if  preferred,  being  thrown  upward  through  the 
opening.  The  bench  should  be  covered  with  clean 
paper  or  fluffless  cloth  during  the  operation. 

Remedying  Under-Exposure. — Where  subject,  light- 
ing and  exposure  have  been  under  control  the  negative 
film  should  not  require  after-treatment,  unless  the 
worker's  photographic  technique  is  at  fault.  With 


DEVELOPING    FILMS  43 

subjects,  such  as  topicals,  hastily  taken  in  the  midst  of- 
obstacles  or  difficulties,  however,  defects  are  common. 
Perhaps  the  most  frequent  is  under-exposure,  which 
cannot  always  be  helped.  A  film  known  beforehand  to  be 
under-exposed  may  sometimes  be  saved  by  prolonged 
development  in  a  dilute  solution.  When,  on  the  other 
hand,  an  under-exposed  film  has  been  developed  in  a 
solution  of  normal  strength,  it  will,  probably,  have  been 


Fig.  22. — Drying  Drum 


either  taken  out  too  soon,  in  which  case  it  will  be  thin, 
flat,  and  lacking  in  shadow  detail,  or  else  left  in  too  long, 
when  the  result  is  excessive  hardness  and  contrast.  The 
remedy  for  the  under-exposed  and  under-developed  film 
is  intensification ;  for  under-exposure  and  over-develop- 
ment there  is  rarely  an  effective  cure,  though  reduction  in 
ammonium  persulphate,  which  attacks  the  lights  more 
than  the  shadows,  may  occasionally  be  worth  while. 
This  reducer  may  consist  of  200  gr.  of  ammonium  per- 
sulphate to  each  pint  of  water,  made  fresh  as  required. 
The  film  after  the  usual  final  washing  is  immersed  in 


44  THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

this  till  a  little  less  reduced  than  is  wanted,  and  is  at 
once  placed  in  a  5  per  cent,  solution  of  sodium  sulphite, 
in  which  it  is  left  for  a  few  minutes,  and  then  well  washed. 

A  good  intensifier,  especially  for  topicals,  is  mercuric 
iodide.  A  suitable  formula  consists  of  2  oz.  of  sodium  sul- 
phite and  45  gr.  of  mercuric  iodide  to  each  pint  of  water. 
The  sulphite  is  dissolved  first  in  about  one-third  of  the 
water,  warm  ;  the  mercuric  iodide  being  next  introduced 
gradually,  stirring  well,  till  a  colourless  solution  results. 
The  remaining  water  is  then  added.  This  solution  does 
not  keep  well,  except  in  the  dark,  and  should  be  prepared 
as  required.  The  wet  negative  film,  which  need  be  washed 
for  only  fifteen  minutes  after  fixing,  is  immersed  in  the 
bath  till  it  gains  density,  and  is  then  well  washed  for  ten 
minutes,  redeveloped  in  any  strong  developing  solution 
for  about  as  long,  and  again  washed  thoroughly.  The  re- 
developing may  be  omitted  if  time  presses,  but  the  result 
is  not  then  permanent. 

Remedying  Over-Exposure.  —  When  the  film  is 
over-exposed,  it  will  either  be  of  excessive  density, 
lacking  in  contrast  and  flat,  or,  if  also  under-developed, 
it  will  be  thin  and  flat.  For  an  over-dense  flat  film  the 
remedy  is  treatment  with  Farmer's  ferricyanide  and 
"  hypo  "  reducer  ;  while  for  the  thin  and  flat  type  of  over- 
exposure  the  best  thing  is  first  to  reduce  with  ferricyanide 
and  "  hypo,"  which  acts  a  little  more  on  the  shadows  than 
on  the  lights,  and  then  to  intensify,  so  that  sufficient 
density  and  contrast  are  obtained.  The  formula  for  the 
reducer  is  : — 2  oz.  of  "  hypo  "  to  the  pint  of  water,  to 
which  is  added,  directly  before  use,  from  i  oz.  to  2  oz.  per 
pint  of  a  10  per  cent,  solution  of  potassium  ferricyanide. 
The  "  hypo  "  is  first  dissolved  in  about  a  third  of  the  water 


DEVELOPING    FILMS  45 

wanned,  the  remaining  water  being  then  added  and  the 
ferricyanide  solution  stirred  in.  The  bath  should  be  used 
at  once,  as  it  does  not  keep  well.  It  is  stronger  or  weaker 
according  to  the  proportion  of  ferricyanide. 

An  over-exposed  film  commonly  shows  all  possible 
detail,  whereas  in  under-exposure  the  shadow  detail  is 
more  or  less  lacking.  It  does  not  always  follow  that  a 
thin  film  has  been  wrongly  exposed ;  it  may  have  been 
correctly  exposed  and  insufficiently  developed.  In  that 
case,  a  slight  intensification  will  rectify  matters. 


CHAPTER    VI 
Printing  the  Positive  Film 

Printers. — To  make  a  positive  film  from  the  negative 
a  machine  called  a  printer  is  employed.  Printers  are 
of  two  kinds,  the  older  continuous  type,  in  which  the 
two  films  are  run  together  in  contact  past  an  exposure 
opening  without  stoppage,  and  the  more  modern  "  step- 
by-step  "  pattern,  in  which  the  films  are  stopped  inter- 
mittently by  a  claw  movement  resembling  that  in  the 
camera  during  exposure.  The  step-by-step  printer  gives 
the  more  accurate  registration  and  is  that  generally 
adopted  by  professional  workers,  the  machines  being 
usually  electrically  driven.  They  are,  however,  elaborate 
and  expensive.  The  continuous  pattern  is  cheaper,  and  is 
well  suited  for  work  on  a  small  scale. 

A  typical  hand-driven  continuous  printer  is  shown  by 
Fig.  23.  The  negative  film  is  contained  on  the  spool  A  and 
the  unexposed  positive  film  on  the  spool  B,  the  two  being 
passed,  emulsion  sides  together,  through  a  pressure 
gate  c  in  front  of  the  exposure  opening.  At  D  is  a  sprocket- 
wheel  under  which  the  films  are  threaded,  a  spring  roller 
preventing  slipping,  while  at  E  is  the  driving  handle  and 
a  pulley-wheel  for  connecting  to  a  motor  if  desired.  The 
electric  lamp  F  supplies  the  necessary  light,  and  may  be 
shifted  nearer  to,  or  farther  away  from,  the  opening,  to 
suit  negatives  of  different  density,  by  the  lever  G.  If 
preferred,  incandescent  gas  can  be  fitted.  In  use,  the 
46 


PRINTING  THE  POSITIVE  FILM          47 

panel  H  is  mounted  on  a  partition  or  in  front  of  a  light- 
tight  box,  so  that  no  light  reaches  the  film  except  through 
the  exposure  aperture.  The  films,  as  run  through,  are 
received  in  a  basket  or  other  receptacle.  Higher-priced 
printers  have  two  additional  spools  on  which  the  negative 
and  positive  films  are  wound  off. 

Using  the  Camera  as  a  Printer. 
— It  is  quite  possible  to  use  the 
camera   itself  for  printing.     Some 
cameras  have    slots    for   the   pur- 
pose, but  with  the  majority  it  is 
necessary  to  cut  a  narrow  slot  at 
the  top  and  bottom,  in  line  with 
the  gate,  as  shown  at  A  and  B  in 
Fig.  24.    These,  of  course,  must  be 
provided  with  slid- 
ing covers  to  keep 
out  light  when  the 
camera    is     in 
normal      employ- 
ment.   An  arm  c 
with  a  spindle  to 
take    a   spool    D, 
holding  the  nega- 
tive     film,    is 
attached    at    the 

top.  The  lens  should  be  removed  and  the  shutter  fully 
opened.  The  camera  is  stood  on  a  bench  against  a 
partition  E  in  which  a  small  opening  is  cut,  and  an 
electric  bulb  F  or  an  incandescent  gas  burner  is 
adjusted  a  short  distance  behind.  If  preferred,  the 
light  may  be  enclosed  in  a  box.  A  blackened  card- 


Fig.  23. — Continuous 
Film  Printer 


48  THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

board  tube  G  should  be  supported  between  the  partition 
opening  and  that  in  the  camera.  The  roll  of  unex- 
posed  positive  film  is  loaded  into  the  upper  film-box 
H,  which  is  then  inserted  in  the  camera.  The  negative 
film  is  threaded  through  the  top  slot,  through  the  gate, 


Fig.  24. — Printing  Positive  Film  with  the  Camera 

noting  that  the  picture  is  centrally  masked,  and  out  at 
the  bottom  ;  while  the  positive  film  is  threaded  under 
the  guide  roller,  under  the  upper  sprocket,  through 
the  gate  in  contact  with  the  negative  film,  and  out  at  the 
lower  slot.  It  must  be  seen  that  the  two  gelatine  surfaces 
come  together,  and  that  the  pin  escapement  engages 
properly  in  both  films  at  once.  Having  closed  the  camera, 


FILM    PRINTER    OPERATED    BY    ELECTRIC    MOTOR 

(Motor,  British  Thomson-Houston,  &th  h.p.;  Printer,  Williamson  type) 


PRINTING  THE  POSITIVE  FILM          49 

printing  is  done  by  turning  the  handle  at  a  regular  and 
rather  slow  rate.  The  precise  speed  depends  on  the 
light  and  the  density  of  the  negative,  and  should  be 
found  by  exposing  and  developing  a  short  trial  piece 
of  film.  For  printing  by  this  method  it  is  usually  neces- 
sary that  the  negative  films  should  have  been  taken  by 
the  same  camera,  otherwise  the  mask  may  not  be  central 
with  relation  to  the  pictures. 

Developing  Positive  Film.  —  Having  finished  the 
printing,  the  positive  film  is  collected  on  a  spool,  in  order 
to  handle  it  conveniently,  and  is  then  wound  on  a  frame 
for  developing,  which  is  done  in  just  the  same  way  as 
with  negatives.  The  same  developer  may  be  used  if  care 
is  taken  not  to  clog  up  the  high  lights,  but  most  workers 
prefer  a  solution  kept  specially  for  the  purpose.  A  good 
formula  is  : — 

Sodium  sulphite       3|  lb. 

Sodium  carbonate    . .         . .  3     „ 

Potassium  metabisulphite  . .         . .     i    oz. 

Hydroquinone          . .         . .         . .     8J  „ 

Potassium  bromide . .         . .         . .     i     „ 

Water  to  60  pints. 

Instead  of  developing  for  a  previously  ascertained 
time,  as  with  negatives,  it  is  better  to  examine  progress 
by  removing  the  frame  from  the  dish  or  tank  and  holding 
it  in  front  of  the  dark-room  lamp.  If  correctly  developed, 
when  viewed  from  the  surface  the  picture  should  seem  a 
shade  too  dark,  the  unexposed  margins,  however,  re- 
maining white.  Tilting  the  frame  a  little  and  looking 
through  the  outer  strand  of  film,  full  detail  ought  to  be 
visible  in  all  parts  and  the  shadows  should  be  a  trifle  dense. 

£ 


50          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

When  development  is  considered  complete,  the  film 
is  rinsed  and  fixed  as  in  the  case  of  a  negative,  using  the 
same  bath.  It  is  then  washed,  dried,  and  cleaned,  as 
before  described.  Positive  films  may  be,  and  sometimes 
are,  intensified  or  reduced,  but  all  such  after-treatment 
is  best  confined  to  the  negative.  Assuming  a  black-and- 
white  result  is  desired,  the  positive  film  is  now  ready  for 
projection.  A  trial  on  the  screen  often  shows  the  ex- 
pediency of  "  cutting  out  "  parts  here  and  there.  When 
this  is  done,  the  film  has  to  be  joined  again  at  the  cut 
portions  with  film  cement. 

Toning  Positive  Film. — It  may,  however,  be  wished 
to  have  the  positive  of  a  special  tone  to  suit  a  particular 
effect.  This  may  be  attained  by  treating  it  in  a  chemical 
toning  bath.  Practically  any  of  the  formulae  used  by 
the  photographer  for  toning  bromide  prints  is  suitable, 
but  a  few  approved  ones  are  here  given.  Strict  cleanliness 
is  necessary  in  the  tanks  or  dishes  employed,  and  it  is 
certainly  desirable  to  keep  separate  receptacles  for  each 
different  toning  bath. 

For  warm  sepia  and  brown  tones  the  sulphide  bath 
is  excellent.  Two  solutions  are  required  : — (a)  In  each 
pint  of  water  dissolve  J  oz.  of  ammonium  bromide  and 
f  oz.  of  potassium  ferricyanide  ;  (b)  in  each  pint  of  water 
dissolve  290  gr. — practically  two-thirds  of  an  ounce — of 
pure  sodium  sulphide.  The  film  is  first  immersed  in  the 
ferricyanide  solution  (a)  until  bleached  to  a  yellowish 
white,  and  is  then  washed  for  one  minute  and  transferred 
to  the  sulphide  solution  (b),  in  which  it  assumes  its  final 
colour.  The  film  is  lastly  washed  for  half  an  hour.  The 
sulphide  solution  had  better  be  worked  outdoors,  as  the 
smell  is  disgusting  ;  the  fumes,  also,  might  be  deleterious 


PRINTING  THE  POSITIVE  FILM          51 

to  sensitive  materials,  such  as  unexposed  or  undeveloped 
films.  With  a  fresh  sulphide  bath  density  is  slightly 
increased.  The  ferricyanide  solution  may  be  used  over 
again,  but  the  sulphide  solution  does  not  keep  and 
should  be  thrown  away.  As  stale  or  common  sulphide 
will  not  tone  well,  and  may  even  have  a  reducing 
action,  this  chemical  should  be  purchased  from  a  reliable 
source. 

For  warm  purple-black  and  reddish  tones  the  copper 
ferricyanide  bath  may  be  employed.  This  intensifies  as 
well  as  tones,  and  is,  therefore,  useful  for  improving  thin 
positives.  A  good  formula  is  : — In  each  pint  of  water 
dissolve  30  grs.  of  copper  sulphate,  f  oz.  of  neutral  potas- 
sium citrate,  and  25  grs.  of  potassium  ferricyanide.  Well 
wash  after  toning. 

Blue  tones  are  very  effective  for  moonlight  scenes, 
seascapes,  and  some  other  purposes.  These  may  be 
obtained  with  an  iron  bath,  a  suitable  formula  being : — 
In  each  pint  of  solution  dissolve  £  oz.  of  ferric  ammonium 
citrate,  J  oz.  of  potassium  ferricyanide,  and  4  oz.  of  acetic 
acid.  After  toning  in  this  bath  the  high  lights  of  the 
pictures  will  be  slightly  stained  and  clogged ;  the  film 
should  be  washed  till  this  effect  disappears.  The  image  is 
intensified  to  some  extent,  so  that  the  positive  should  be 
on  the  thin  side. 

In  making  up  the  foregoing  baths  each  chemical 
should  be  dissolved  separately  in  a  portion  of  the  water, 
and  then  mixed  in  the  order  given,  adding  water  to  obtain 
the  necessary  total.  There  are  various  other  toning 
baths,  for  information  on  which  photographic  works  may 
be  consulted.  With  practically  all  solutions  used  for  toning, 
great  care  is  requisite  not  to  render  the  film  too  opaque 


52          THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

for  projection,  as  the  extent  to  which  a  toned  image  will 
block  the  light  is  greater  than  might  be  supposed  by 
merely  looking  through  it. 

Tinting  Positive  Films. — Another  method  of  varying 
the  colour  of  a  positive  film,  less  troublesome  than  toning, 
but  not  quite  so  effective,  is  known  as  tinting,  and  con- 
sists of  immersing  the  film  in  a  weak  aniline  dye  solution. 
The  effect  is  to  stain  the  whole  film,  both  lights  and 
shadows,  though  the  real  underlying  colour  of  the  image 
is  not  actually  altered.  In  toning,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
black  silver  deposit  of  the  image  is  changed  by  the  bath 
to  a  red,  brown,  or  blue,  as  the  case  may  be,  while  the 
lights  of  the  picture  remain  practically  white.  Tinting 
does  not  suit  all  subjects,  but  with  the  majority  very  good 
effects  may  be  secured.  For  titles  and  announcements 
it  is  often  indispensable. 

The  aniline  dyes  should  be  water-soluble,  and  are 
usually  obtained  in  the  form  of  a  dry  powder.  A  suffi- 
cient quantity  of  dye  solution  must  be  made  up  to  fill  the 
dish  or  tank.  The  exact  strength  varies  with  different 
colours  and  to  some  extent  with  the  subject,  and  it  is 
advisable  to  make  a  few  trials  with  short  strips  of  waste 
film  till  the  effect  is  considered  right.  The  bath  should 
be  of  such  a  strength  that,  say,  seven  minutes'  immersion 
of  the  film  will  give  a  tint  a  trifle  deeper  than  is  wanted. 
The  correct  amount  of  dilution  having  been  adjusted, 
the  film  is  immersed  for  the  time  stated,  and  is  then 
washed  for  about  a  minute  to  remove  excess  of  dye  and 
prevent  streakiness.  This  slightly  reduces  the  tint, 
which  must  be  allowed  for.  For  firelight  effects,  eosine 
red  is  excellent,  and  even  ordinary  red  ink  is  often  useful. 
For  moonlight  scenes,  methylene  blue  may  be  used  ;  for 


PRINTING  THE  POSITIVE  FILM          53 

daylight,  a  faint  pink ;  for  sunshine,  a  golden  yellow, 
such  as  naphthol.  Almost  any  colour  may  be  em- 
ployed for  titles  and  announcements,  though  some 
artistic  discretion  is  called  for.  During  the  dye- 
ing operations  waterproof  gloves  are  advisable  for  the 
hands. 

Long  films  have  to  be  wound  on  wooden  frames  and 
immersed  in  large  tanks  of  dye  solution  for  about  five 
minutes,  followed  by  about  half  a  minute  in  clean  water, 
to  remove  excess  dye  and  prevent  streakiness.  With  com- 
paratively short  lengths  of  film,  however,  up  to  about 
30  ft.,  the  tinting  may  be  done  by  simply  drawing  the  film 
to  and  fro  through  a  flat  dish  containing  the  dye  solution. 
A  deep  whole-plate  (8|  in.  by  6£  in.)  porcelain  developing 
dish  is  very  suitable.  The  film  is  supported  by  the  two 
hands,  so  that  a  loop  dips  in  the  dye,  gelatine  side  up- 
wards, and  it  is  shifted  to  and  fro  by  rapid  yet  gentle  move- 
ments of  the  fingers,  each  portion  in  turn  being  thus 
immersed  and  gradually  saturated.  The  parts  not  in  the 
dish  will  curl  up  outside  on  the  bench,  which  should  be 
clean  and  preferably  covered  with  oilcloth.  As  before, 
a  slight  rinsing  should  be  given. 

TITLES 

In  the  early  days  of  cinematography,  titles  and 
explanatory  letterpress  were  shown  by  means  of  stationary 
lantern  slides,  but  the  modern  practice  is  to  have  them 
printed  on  the  film  itself,  in  the  proper  places.  Since  the 
film  must  not  be  stopped,  the  titles  need  to  be  repeated 
through  a  length  of  several  feet. 

For  the  average  title,  consisting  of  transparent  wording 
on  a  black  ground,  white  enamel  letters  are  mostly  used, 


54          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

but  a  good  effect  can  be  obtained  by  cutting  them  care- 
fully in  white  cardboard.  The  letters  are  laid  on  a  dead 
black  horizontal  surface,  such  as  velvet  spread  taut  on  the 
floor  or  over  a  low  bench.  The  camera  has  then  to  be 
pointed  downward,  so  that  the  lens  axis  is  perpendicular, 
to  accomplish  which  a  special 
stand  or  a  tilting-board  is 
needed.  A  suitable  contriv- 
ance is  shown  by  Fig.  25. 
The  camera  A  rests  on  the 
shelf  B  and  is  screwed  to  the 
bracket  c,  its  lens  pointing 
down  through  a  small  open- 
ing. The  shelf  B  is  fixed  by 
struts  to  a  sliding  board  D, 
which  may  be  adjusted  at 
any  convenient  height  on  the 
upright  stand  by  a  winged 
nut,  working  in  a  slot  in  the 
board  E.  A  title  is  seen 
arranged  on  the  low  table  F, 
ready  for  photographing. 
The  work  should  be  done 
in  a  well-lighted  room  or 
outdoors,  unless  arc -lamps 

are  available.     Two  of  the  latter  would  be  required,  one 
at  either  side  of  the  copy. 

The  exposure  varies  with  the  light,  and  had  better  be 
tested  with  a  meter.  It  should  be  ample  but  not  ex- 
cessive, or  there  will  be  a  lack  of  vigour  in  the  negative, 
and  the  positive,  in  consequence,  will  not  be  so  effective. 
Some  workers  prefer  to  use  the  slower  positive  film  for 


Fig.  25.— Stand  and  Table  for 
Photographing  Titles 


PRINTING  THE  POSITIVE  FILM          55 

making  the  negative,  thus  getting  more  contrasty  results. 
From  5  to  12  ft.  is  sufficient  length  for  a  short  title  or 
an  incident  heading,  while  for  more  lengthy  notices  the 
operator  should  note  exactly  how  long  it  takes  him  to  read 
them  through  at  a  normal  rate,  and  allow  double  that  time 
for  the  public  benefit,  estimated  at  one  foot  for  each  second. 
From  the  negative  film  of  the  title  a  positive  is  next 
made  in  the  usual  manner,  taking  care  to  get  transparent 
lettering  and  an  opaque  ground.  This  is  a  matter  of  cor- 
rect exposure  and  the  use  of  a  developer  tending  to  give  a 
dense  black  image  without  staining.  Glycin  is  very 
suitable  for  the  purpose,  a  good  formula  being  : — 

Glycin i  J  Ib. 

Sodium  sulphite         3^  „ 

Potassium  carbonate 6    „ 

Water to  60  pints. 

If  this  proves  too  strong  for  the  particular  brand  of  film, 
add  more  water.  Any  veiling  of  the  letters  through  over- 
exposure  or  over-development  will  obviously  detract  from 
legibility,  besides  having  an  unsatisfactory  effect.  If 
only  slight,  such  veiling  may  be  removed  with  the 
ferricyanide  and  "hypo"  reducer. 

The  foregoing  remarks  refer  to  plain  titles.  Those  with 
ornamental  borders  or  fancy  lettering  are  usually  drawn 
or  painted  by  artists  on  white  cards  and  then  photographed 
as  before  described.  In  that  case,  the  copy  may  if  de- 
sired be  pinned  on  a  wall  or  vertical  easel  and  the  camera 
worked  in  its  ordinary  horizontal  position.  By  cutting  an 
opening  in  the  centre,  any  fancy  border  can  be  used  as 
a  frame,  and  employed  with  different  titles. 

If  only  a  single  copy  of  the  title  or  inscription  is 


56          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

wanted,  it  saves  time  and  expense  to  have  the  original  set 
up,  drawn,  or  printed  in  black  letters  on  a  white  ground 
and  to  thread  the  film  celluloid  side  to  the  gate  when 
photographing.  The  negative  will  then  show  white  letters 
on  a  black  ground,  and  may  itself  be  used  for  projection 
without  having  to  make  a  positive.  The  stouter  positive 
film  should  preferably  be  employed  for  the  exposure, 
however,  and  it  is  necessary  to  develop  for  a  specially 
contrasty  black-and-white  result. 

There  is  yet  another  way  of  dispensing  with  the  making 
of  two  films  when  titling.  This  is  to  copy  the  lettering  on  a 
dry-plate,  say  lantern  size  (3^  in  x  3j  in.),  by  means  of  an 
ordinary  quarter-plate  camera.  The  negative  obtained  is 
then  inserted  in  the  carrier  A  (Fig.  26)  of  an  enlarging 
lantern  having  sufficient  bellows  extension  to  permit  its 
employment  for  reducing.  The  printer,  or  else  a  cine- 
matograph camera  B  furnished  with  two  slots  and  having 
an  arm  c  to  hold  the  spool  of  positive  film,  is  stood  in  line 
with  the  enlarging  lantern,  the  distance  and  focus  of  the 
latter  being  adjusted  until  a  sharp  reduced  image  of 
the  title  is  projected  upon  the  film  in  the  gate.  The 
exposure  is  then  made  by  slowly  turning  the  camera 
handle,  the  result  when  developed  being  a  positive  film 
of  the  lettering.  The  lantern  needs  to  be  boxed-in,  as 
shown,  the  camera  lens  being  removed  and  a  short  tube  D 
of  blackened  cardboard  placed  between  the  lens  opening 
and  that  in  the  box.  If  preferred,  the  positive  film  may 
be  inserted  in  the  upper  film-box  of  the  camera,  threading 
it  under  the  top  sprocket,  through  the  gate,  and  out  at  the 
lower  slot.  For  professional  workers,  special  printers  on 
the  above  principle,  having  an  enclosed  lamp,  condenser, 
and  extension  bellows,  are  obtainable.  Here  there  is  no 


PRINTING  THE  POSITIVE  FILM          57 

particular  saving  of  time,  but  economy  is  effected  by  the 
difference  in  cost  between  a  single  lantern  plate  and  a 
length  of  negative  film,  and,  when  well  done,  lettering 
reduced  from  a  larger  negative  will  probably  be  rather 
better  technically  than  that  made  by  contact  from  a 
film  the  same  size. 

Title  films  are  usually  tinted,  while  incident  headings 


Fig.  26. — Making  Title  Films  by  Reduction 

are  often  left  plain,  but  there  is  no  rigid  rule.  The  reason 
why  lettering  is  almost  always  white  on  a  black  ground, 
instead  of  black  on  white,  is  from  regard  to  the  eyes  of 
the  spectators,  which  would  otherwise  be  unnecessarily 
dazzled  by  the  blaze  of  light  on  the  screen.  The  pictures, 
also,  would  seem  darker  and  less  effective  by  contrast. 
The  titles  and  headings  are  joined  up  to  the  picture  film 
at  the  right  places,  cutting  the  latter  wherever  necessary 
to  allow  of  the  interpolation. 


CHAPTER    VII 
The  Projector  Described 

THE  cinematograph  projector  consists  of  an  optical 
lantern  in  combination  with  a  mechanism  for  giving 
intermittent  movement  to  a  film  bearing  a  series  of 
positive  photographic  images.  The  film  receives  sixteen 


Fig.  27. — Essential  Mechanism  of  the  Projector 

impulses  every  second,  and  for  the  same  number  of  times 
in  that  period  is  brought  to  a  standstill  in  the  path  of 
the  beam  of  light  issuing  from  the  lantern  through  the 
gate  of  the  machine.  During  the  times  that  the  film 
is  moving,  a  rotary  shutter  cuts  off  the  light  from  the 
screen. 


THE    PROJECTOR    DESCRIBED  59 

The  mechanism  essential  to  the  cinematographic 
effect  is  illustrated  by  Fig.  27.  Two  spools  carry  the 
film  F,  the  top  one  A  being  the  feed  spool  and  the  bottom 
one  B  the  take-up  spool.  An  upper  and  lower  sprocket- 
wheel  c  and  D,  working  in  unison,  engage  with  the  film 
perforations.  The  film  passes  from  spool  A,  between 
sprocket  c  and  spring  pressure  rollers  E  G,  forms  a  loop 
at  j,  passes  through  gate 
K,  past  the  exposure  aper- 
ture L,  goes  under  the 
dog-wheel  M,  the  pin  of 
which  in  striking  the 
film  gives  the  intermit- 
tent movement,  between 
sprocket  -  wheel  D  and 
pressure  spring  rollers  H  i, 
and  finally  to  the  take-up 
spool  B.  The  top  spool  A 
rotates  by  reason  of  the 
pull  made  on  the  film  and 
is  free  to  revolve.  The 
lower  spool  B  is  turned 
continuously  by  chain  or  Fi*  28--G«te  Mechanism 
belt,  so  that  the  film  is  tightly  wound  thereon  as  it 
comes  from  the  sprocket  r>  ;  there  is  a  means  of  com- 
pensating for  the  increasing  size  of  the  roll  of  film  on  B. 
The  gate  K  has  springs  and  pressure  pads  which  hold  the 
film  steady  after  its  downward  motion  ;  and  the  channel 
through  which  it  travels  is  recessed,  contact  only  obtaining 
at  the  edges  where  the  perforations  are.  The  gate  turns 
on  hinges  after  the  manner  of  a  door  (see  Fig.  28),  to  assist 
insertion  and  threading  of  the  film,  being  fastened  by  a 


60          THE   CINEMATOGRAPH   BOOK 

catch  and  held  by  a  spring.  The  shutter  o  is  a  revolving 
disc  with  open  sector,  and  is  geared  in  such  a  manner 
that  the  open  portion  arrives  opposite  the  exposure 
aperture  and  optical  system  just  at  that  moment  when 
the  film  is  brought  to  rest.  A  safety  drop  shutter  P  is 
situated  between  the  gate  and  condenser  R,  its  rise  and 


93 


Fig.  29. — Lantern  or  Lamp-house  cut  away  to  show  Arc-lamp 

fall  being  controlled  by  the  governor  Q.  The  governor 
does  not  allow  of  the  shutter  rising  till  the  mechanism 
is  running  at  the  rate  of  showing  sixteen  pictures  per 
second,  at  which  speed  it  is  safe  to  allow  the  powerful 
light  to  pass  through  the  celluloid  film.  The  objective 


62 


Fig.  30. — The   Projector 
Mechanism 


62          THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

lens  for  throwing  the  image  upon  the  screen  is  at  s, 
between  the  gate  and  the  rotary  shutter.  The  lantern 
situated  immediately  behind  the  condensing  lenses  R 
contains  the  necessary  source  of  illumination,  an  electric 
arc-lamp,  the  carbon  pencils  v  w  of  which  create  the 
arc  at  u. 

A  diagram  of  an  up-to-date  projector,  in  which  every 
part  is  given  a  reference  number,  is  presented  by  Figs.  29 
and  30.  This  projector  combines  the  good  points  of 
most  of  the  best  machines  on  the  market,  avoiding  both 
mere  cheapness  and  expensive  elaboration ;  and  it  is 
thought  that  the  diagram  and  key  herewith  have  con- 
siderable practical  value  in  familiarising  the  operator 
with  the  names  of  the  parts  of  the  machine. 

Arc-lamp  :  I,  base  ;  2,  clamp  to  fix  lamp  to  lantern 
base  ;  3,  clamp  handle  ;  4,  main  upright  of  lamp  ;  5, 
block  fitted  with  pinion  ;  6,  pinion  rod  ;  7,  rack  in  which 
the  pinion  works  ;  8,  milled  head  ;  9,  milled  head  to  rod 
fitted  with  worm  screw  at  10  ;  10,  worm  screw  to  engage 
with  horizontal  spur-wheel  turning  under  u,  to  give  a 
circular  movement  to  arc  ;  n,  revolving  head  of  main 
standard  4  ;  12,  support  for  rod  13  ;  13,  rod  fitted  with 
pinion  inside  block  15  ;  14,  milled  head,  which  on  being 
turned  causes  the  pinion  in  15  to  engage  with  teeth  of 
rack  16,  and  with  teeth  on  opposite  side  of  rod  28,  thus 
causing  the  upper  and  lower  carbons  to  be  drawn  to- 
gether or  separated  as  required  ;  15,  pinion  and  rack 
holder  ;  16,  rack  of  upper  carbon  holder  ;  17,  block  in 
which  screw  18  works,  pushing  top  carbon  holder  forwards 
or  backwards  ;  18,  screw  turning  loosely  in  block  20  and 
threading  through  17  ;  19,  milled  head  of  top  carbon 
holder ;  20,  block  to  which  21  and  22  are  fixed  ;  21  and 


THE    PROJECTOR   DESCRIBED  63 

22,  parallel  rods  supporting  jaws  24 ;  23,  wing  nut 
securing  jaws  ;  24,  jaws ;  25  and  26,  springs  to  push 
jaws  apart  on  loosening  nuts  23  and  27  ;  27,  wing  nut 
securing  jaws  ;  28,  vertical  rod  holding  lower  carbon 
holders  ;  29,  carbons  ;  30,  flexible  insulated  wires  leading 
to  terminals  ;  31  and  32,  terminals. 

Optical  system  and  lantern  parts  :  33,  slider  carrying 
back  lens  of  condenser ;  34,  back  condenser  lens  ;  35, 
condenser  staging ;  36,  slider  carrying  front  lens  of  con- 
denser ;  37,  front  condensing  lens  ;  38,  spring  ;  39,  front 
of  stage,  behind  which  ordinary  slide  carrier  is  placed  ; 
40,  shade  cone  or  funnel ;  41,  cowl ;  42,  front  of  lantern 
body. 

Cinematograph  mechanism  :  43,  main  upright  support ; 
44,  base  ;  45,  top  sprocket ;  46,  bottom  sprocket ;  47, 
upper  spur-wheel  of  driving  mechanism  ;  48,  lower  spur- 
wheel  ;  49,  shutter  with  extra  or  "  non-flick "  blade ; 
50,  spindle  551,  dog- wheel ;  52,  pin ;  53,  hinged  film  gate  ; 

54,  skate  spring  holding  film  steady  during  its  passage ; 

55,  catch    of    film    gate ;     56,    opaque  slide   of   safety 
shutter,  drawing  up  by  pin  57,  working  in  58,  raised 
when  opposite  end  is  pressed  by  governor  rod  61 ;    59, 
framework  of  safety  shutter  ;    60,  governor  rod  tube  ; 
61,  governor  rod  ;  62,  ball  weights  ;  63,  slider  working  in 
64,  carrying  with  it  objective  lens  69,  film  gate  shutter 
and  heat  shield  65  ;    64,  guide  for  slider  63  ;    65,  heat 
shield   with   aperture    at   66 ;     67,    milled   thumbscrew 
operating  the  rod  68  which  carries  (on  opposite  side  of 
upright  43)  a  pinion  which  communicates  with  a  rack- 
work  which  gives  the  vertical  motion  to  object  lens, 
film  gate  and  heat  shield,  all  moving  together  ;   69,  ob- 
jective lens  moved  by  rack  and  pinion,  operated  by  the 


64          THE   CINEMATOGRAPH   BOOK 

milled  head  shown  ;  70,  thumbscrew  holding  lens  carrier 
72  in  any  position  along  the  rod  71  ;  71,  rod  support  for 
lens  carrier  ;  72,  carrier  for  lens  ;  73,  film  guide  roller 
of  top  sprocket ;  74,  arm  furnished  with  handle  at  75, 
sprocket  pressure  roller  at  76  ;  77,  film ;  78,  arm  sup- 
port for  top  spool ;  79,  guide  roller  for  film  ;  80,  slit  in 
spool  case  ;  81,  removable  cover  of  casing  to  spool ;  82, 
pivoted  pin  locking  cover  of  spool  to  support ;  83,  sup- 
porting spindle  on  which  spool  rotates  ;  84,  bolt  securing 
arm  78  ;  85,  spring  arm  carrying  sprocket  pressure  reel, 
and  handle  86 ;  87,  guide  reel ; 
88,  supporting  arm  for  lower  spool 
case  89 ;  90,  belt  or  chain  drive ; 
91,  pivoted  pin  to  lock  spool  case 
to  support  92 ;  92,  supporting 
spindle  on  which  lower  spool 
rotates;  93,  base  both  of  lantern 
and  cinematograph ;  94,  bolt 
Fitf  Do7°MotlItyPe  heads;  95,  operating  handle. 

THE  INTERMITTENT  MOVEMENT 

In  the  projecting  mechanisms  so  far  illustrated,  only 
the  dog  movement  has  been  shown,  but  there  are  other 
means  of  obtaining  the  intermittent  movement  required, 
the  most  common  being  that  known  as  the  Maltese  cross. 
These  two  movements  will  now  be  explained  in  detail. 

The  Dog  Movement. — This  movement  requires  a  top 
and  bottom  sprocket-wheel  and  the  dog-wheel  (see  Fig.  27). 
The  original  dog  movement,  invented  by  Demeny,  is 
shown  by  Fig.  31.  A  disc  G  revolves  on  the  centre  B, 
and  has  an  adjustable  pin  A,  which,  on  each  revolution  of 
the  disc,  strikes  the  slack  film  F,  drawing  it  down  through 


THE    PROJECTOR    DESCRIBED  65 

the  gate  for  the  distance  of  one  picture-space.  Some  of 
the  slack  film  is  taken  up  by  the  continuously  rotating 
sprocket-wheel  D.  Fig.  31  is  merely  diagrammatic,  but 
details  of  an  actual  dog  are  given  in  Figs.  32  and  33. 
Two  metal  discs  or  cheeks  A  and  B,  2  J  in.  in  diameter  and 
i^  in.  apart  are  mounted  on  a  |-in.  diameter  spindle  c ; 
linch-pins  fasten  the  bosses  of  the  discs  to  the  spindle. 
D  is  a  vulcanite  roller,  f  in.  in  diameter,  revolving  freely 
on  the  spindle,  and  its  object  is  to  save  wear  and  tear 
of  the  film,  which  during  part  of  the  revolution  of  this 


Figs.  32  and  33.— Details  of  Dog  Movement 

mechanism  would  otherwise  be  in  contact  with  the  metal 
spindle.  The  dog  itself,  or  striker,  is  the  eccentrically 
mounted  vulcanite  roller  E,  f  in.  diameter,  which  runs  on 
a  J-in.  spindle  placed  l^in.  from  the  central  spindle, 
centre  to  centre.  The  dog  hits  the  slack  film  once  during 
every  revolution  of  the  central  spindle,  which  has  a  speed 
of  16  revolutions  per  second.  The  central  clearance  on 
the  dog-roller  is  to  lessen  the  wear  on  the  film.  The 
dimensions  given  are,  in  general,  suitable  for  adoption 
with  32-teeth  sprocket-wheels,  but  it  will  be  understood 
that  the  diameter  of  the  dog-roller  and  its  distance  from 
the  central  spindle  ought  to  be  designed  to  suit  the  gearing 
and  arrangement  of  the  individual  machine. 


66  THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

The  Maltese  Cross  or  Geneva  Movement. — This 
requires  three  sprockets  in  addition  to  a  disc-  or  pin- 
wheel.  Besides  the  top  and  bottom  sprockets,  there  is  one 
(see  Fig.  34)  below  the  gate,  and  so  placed  as  to  engage 
with  the  film  perforations.  Fixed  to  its  side  is  a  Maltese 
cross  D.  A  disc  B,  carrying  on  its  side  a  second  disc  A, 
and  a  pin  at  G,  is  made  to  rotate  continuously  in  the 
direction  of  the  arrow.  During  its  motion  the  pin  G 


Fig.  34.  —  Four  -  armed 
Maltese  Cross  Move- 
ment for  Four-picture 
Sprocket-wheel 


Fig.  35. — Five-armed  Maltese  Cross 
for  Five-picture  Sprocket-wheel 


enters  the  slot  E,  and  at  a  certain  point  begins  to  turn  the 
Maltese  cross  ;  the  points  of  the  cross  pass  into  the  notch 
H  of  disc  A  and  thus  allow  the  sprocket-wheel  to  make  a 
one-quarter  revolution ;  then  it  is  brought  to  a  stand- 
still and  held  locked  by  the  concave  edge  I  coming  oppo- 
site to,  and  in  contact  with,  the  convex  plain  edge  of  disc 
A.  When  disc  A  has  made  a  complete  revolution,  the  same 
action  takes  place,  and  so  on,  on  each  corner  of  the  cross. 
The  advantages  of  this  movement  over  the  dog  action 
are  greater  steadiness  with  less  jerking  and  strain  on  the 
film,  but  against  this  must  be  placed  more  friction  and 


THE   PROJECTOR   DESCRIBED 


67 


wear  in  the  mechanism.  In  a  recent  patent,  this  is  over- 
come by  enclosing  both  the  pin-wheel  and  the  cross 
in  an  oil  bath. 

Four-picture 
sprocket-wheels  are 
generally  used,  each 
having  sixteen  pairs 
of  projections.  The 
gearing  may  be  as 
follows  :  —  Three  4-in. 
diameter  toothed 
wheels  geared 
together,  one  on  the 
top  sprocket  -  wheel 
spindle,  and  another 
on  that  of  the  bot- 
tom or  reeling  -  off 
sprocket-wheel,  the 
intermediate  4  -  in. 
wheel  having  at- 
tached to  it  a  i£-in. 
wheel  which  gears 
with  a  3-in.  wheel 
connected  to  the 
driving  handle.  To 
the  end  of  the  pin- 


Figs.  36  and  37.— Details  of  Kincto 
Cam  and  Claw  Movement 


wheel     spindle     are 

fixed,  firstly,  a  i-in. 

wheel    gearing   with 

the  bottom  4-in.  wheel  ;  and,  secondly,  a  heavy  balance 

wheel.     The  pin-wheel  thus  makes  four  revolutions  to 

each   revolution  of    the   sprocket-wheels,   and    at    the 


68          THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

same  time  one  turn  of  the  handle  is  equivalent  to  eight 
pictures. 

For  a  sprocket-wheel  with  twenty  projections,  equiva- 
lent to  five  pictures,  a  five-armed  cross  is  necessary,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  35. 

Pin  or  Claw  Movement. — This  is  practically  identical 
with  that  described  on  p.  16  for  use  in  the  cinematograph 
camera.  It  is  not  regarded  as  being  so  durable  as  either 
the  dog  or  the  Maltese  cross,  though  exceedingly  steady. 

Cam  and  Claw  Movement. — A  claw  movement  of  a 
particularly  interesting  kind  is  employed  in  the  Kineto 
machine.  It  is  worked  by  means  of  a  double-cam,  and 
the  mechanism  is  shown  in  plan  by  Fig.  37  and  in  vertical 
section  by  Fig.  36.  The  cam  A  has  a  groove  B  in  its 
outer  periphery  and  a  smaller  one  H  in  its  top  face  ;  it  is 
driven  through  "  sun  and  planet "  gearing  by  a  handle 
fitted  to  horizontal  shaft  c,  which  makes  two  revolutions 
per  second.  The  cam  is  carried  by  a  vertical  shaft  D, 
and  inside  it  is  a  pair  of  balancing  discs  E,  which  steady 
the  drive.  Groove  B  in  the  cam  engages  with  roller  F, 
and  in  so  doing  imparts  vertical  movement  to  the  feed 
slide  G,  which  movement  is  equal  to  the  height  of  a 
picture,  f  in.  The  second  groove  H,  in  the  top  face  of 
the  cam,  engages  with  the  part  j,  and  gives  the  feeding 
claw  K  a  to-and-fro  movement.  Thus,  as  the  feed  slide 
travels  downwards,  the  claw  moves  forward  and  engages 
with  the  perforations  in  the  film  L  ;  on  the  return  move- 
ment the  claw  is  withdrawn  free  of  the  film.  The  gearing 
is  such  that  the  film  is  moved  eight  times  during  one  rev- 
olution of  the  handle.  Of  the  one-sixteenth  of  a  second 
between  the  coming  to  rest  of  two  successive  pictures, 
only  one-fifth  of  the  time  is  occupied  in  moving  the  film. 


THE    PROJECTOR    DESCRIBED  69 

The  Diamond  Cam  Movement. — In  Power's  "  camera- 
graph  "  projector,  the  intermittent  movement  is  obtained 
by  means  of  the  cam  A,  locking-ring  B,  and  cross  c  (Figs.  38 
to  40),  all  these  being  of  hardened  tool  steel.  Ring  and 
cam  are  in  one  solid  piece  with  the  disc  D,  which  is  rigidly 
secured  to  the  main  spindle  or  shaft  of  the  machine,  while 
the  cross  c,  with  which  they  engage,  is  secured  to  the  end 
of  the  spindle  of  the  intermittently-moving  sprocket 
which  works  the  film.  The  cross  has  four  arms  with  a 


Fig.  39 


38  to  40.  —  Details  of  Power's  Diamond  Cam  Movement 


stout  pin  on  each,  the  whole  cut  from  a  single  piece  of 
steel.  As  the  disc  D  rotates,  the  cross  c  is  held  locked 
while  the  ring  is  sliding  between  the  pins  (see  Fig.  38), 
but  when  the  cam  A  is  reached,  the  pins  slip  between  it  and 
the  ring,  thus  causing  the  spindle  to  which  the  cross  is 
attached  to  make  a  quarter-turn.  The  mechanism  is 
enclosed  in  an  oil-tight  casing,  and  is  kept  liberally 
supplied  with  oil,  which  ensures  silent  and  easy  running. 
Friction  Grip  Movement.  —  An  arrangement  tried 
some  years  ago  consisted  of  two  cam-shaped  rollers  or 
wheels  revolving  in  opposite  directions  and  mounted  in 
such  a  way  that  during  part  of  their  revolution  they 


70          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

gripped  the  film  which  passed  between  them,  and  drew 
it  down  one  picture-space. 

The  Shutter. — This  is  a  one-blade,  two-blade  or 
three-blade  plate  which  revolves  between  the  film  and  the 
projecting  lens  or  immediately  in  front  of  that  lens,  its 
speed  being  one  revolution  per  picture,  that  is,  16  revo- 
lutions per  second.  It  may  be  of  the  simple  form  shown  at 
A  (Fig.  41),  in  which  the  blade  or  sector  interrupts  the  light 
rays  once  every  revolution  during  the  period  when  the 
film  is  moving ;  or  it  may  have  one  or  even  two  extra 
"non-flick"  sectors  (see  r>,  E,  rand  G),  which  interrupt 
the  light  while  the  film  is  still.  An  extra  blade  or  sector 
robs  the  screen  of  some  of  the  light,  but  it  softens  the 
harshness  of  the  sudden  alternations  of  brilliant  light  and 
pitch  darkness  and  eliminates  much  of  the  flicker.  In 
many  machines  the  extra  or  "  non-flick  "  blade  is  made 
of  celluloid  or  gelatine,  stained  to  a  violet  colour ;  but 
the  tendency  nowadays  is  to  make  the  "  non-flick  "  blade 
opaque.  The  effect  of  the  second  blade  is  sometimes  ob- 
tained by  doubling  the  width  of  the  single  blade  (see  B) 
and  running  the  shutter  at  twice  the  usual  speed  ;  thus, 
on  its  first  passage  across  the  lens  it  darkens  the  screen 
for  the  movement  of  the  film,  and  on  its  second  passage 
it  acts  as  a  "  non-flick  "  blade  ;  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
same  amount  of  time  is  allowed  for  each  film  movement 
as  when  the  ordinary  shutter  rotates  at  one-revolution- 
per-picture  speed. 

There  may  be  a  separate  shutter  to  give  the  "  non- 
flick  "  effect,  but  it  is  not  easy  to  see  the  advantage  of 
introducing  still  another  moving  part,  when  the  addition 
of  a  blade  to  the  single  shutter  does  all  that  is  necessary. 

Some  makers  offer  a  choice  of  shutters — a  three-blade 


Fig.  41. — Various  Types  of  Shutter  shown  diagrammatically 


71 


72  THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

one  for  direct-current  lighting  and  a  two-blade  one  for 
lighting  with  sixty-cycles  alternating  current. 

OTHER  DETAILS   OF  THE   MACHINE 

Film  Mask. — In  every  good  machine  there  is  provision 
for  adjusting  the  film  in  the  gate,  so  that  the  picture  is 
correctly  masked,  but  the  details  vary  in  different  ma- 
chines. In  some,  the  mask  and  objective  are  made  to 


Fig.  42.— Wrench's  Film  Mask 

move  together  by  a  rack  and  pinion,  the  illuminant 
having,  in  that  case,  to  be  raised  or  lowered  to  correspond. 
Those  methods,  however,  are  preferable  that  do  not  in- 
volve movement  of  the  mask  itself,  as  neither  illuminant 
nor  objective  then  needs  readjustment.  A  typical  ex- 
ample of  a  device  by  which  the  film  alone  is  moved  is 
that  used  in  one  of  the  Wrench  projectors,  and  shown  in 
Fig.  42.  It  consists  of  a  vulcanite  roller  A  mounted  in  a 
brass  casting  B,  which  can  be  moved  up  or  down  by 
a  milled-head  screw  c  actuating  a  rack  and  pinion.  The 
roller  is  placed  between  the  "  dog  "  D  and  the  bottom 


THE    PROJECTOR    DESCRIBED 


73 


sprocket  wheel  E,  and  thus  enables  the  film  to  be  moved 
to  any  desired  extent  until  it  is  correctly  masked  in  the 
gate  F. 

Take-up  Mechanism.  —  This  mechanism  prevents 
strain  on  the  film  as  the  diameter  of  the  wound-off  portion 
increases.  Sometimes,  as  in  the  early  machines,  a  spring 
driving  band  is  used,  which  will  yield  whenever  the  film 
gets  taut ;  but  the  modern  tendency  is  to  use  a  more 
positive  form  of  drive  and  to  provide  a  spiral  spring  and 
washers  on  the  spindle  of  the  lower  spool.  Fig.  43  shows 
a  typical  device.  The 
winding  -  off  spool  A 
slips  over  the  spindle 
B,  and  is  kept  in  place 
by  a  drop-catch  c. 
The  driving  pulley  D 
is  soldered  to  a  tube 
E  that  fits  loosely  over 
the  spindle,  and  has  fixed  to  it  at  the  other  end  a 
metal  washer  F.  Another  washer  G,  furnished  with  a 
nut,  screws  on  the  spindle,  as  shown,  and  is  secured 
by  a  set-screw,  while  between  the  washer  G  and  the 
pulley  is  a  spiral  spring  H.  As  the  driving  band  or 
chain  causes  the  pulley  to  revolve,  the  pressure  of  the 
washer  F  against  the  spool  sets  that  also  in  motion ;  but 
when  the  diameter  of  the  wound-off  film  increases,  the 
spool  is  obviously  able  to  slip  and  to  reduce  its  speed. 
The  tension  of  the  spring  has  to  be  adjusted  to  a  nicety 
by  means  of  the  screw-washer  G,  so  that  just  sufficient 
pressure  is  applied  to  the  spool  to  keep  it  steadily  in 
motion,  yet  not  enough  to  move  it  forcibly  against  the 
tautening  of  the  film. 


riia 

r 

.V 

B 

E 

X 

A 

AJ 

D 

Fig.  43.— Take-up  Mechanism 


74          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

Safety  Spool  Gases. — Among  the  refinements  de- 
signed to  make  a  serious  flare-up  impossible,  there  must 
be  mentioned  safety  spool  cases,  of  which  there  is  a 
number  of  patterns  on  the  market.  The  pattern  shown 
by  Figs.  44  and  45  is  typical  of  them.  The  film  passes 
through  a  restricted  opening  and  under  a  roller  so 


Figs.  44  and  45. — Safety  Spool  Case  or  Film  Box 


adjusted  that  while  they  add  but  little  to  the  resistance 
there  is  no  room  for  air  to  pass  into  the  case  with  the 
film.  Should  a  projecting  piece  of  film  be  ignited,  the 
fire  dies  when  it  reaches  the  entrance  to  the  case. 

Safety  Cut-off  Shutter.— The  Cinematograph  Act, 
1909,  states  that  "  lanterns  shall  be  provided  with  a  metal 
shutter  which  can  be  readily  inserted  between  the  source 
of  light  and  the  film-gate."  (See  also  p.  173.) 


CHAPTER  VIII 
Optical  System  of  the  Projector 

How  a  Lens  Acts. — There  are  six  kinds  of  lenses 
used  in  various  combinations  for  projection  purposes, 
and  these  are  shown  in  Figs.  46  to  51.  Fig.  46  shows 
the  bi-convex,  convexo-convex,  double-convex,  or  equi- 
convex  ;  Fig.  47,  the  plano-convex  ;  Fig.  48,  the  concavo- 


Fi«.  46 


fit.  47 


Fig.  48 


Fig.  49 


Fig.  50 


Fig.  51 


Fig.  46. — Bi-convex  Lens.  Fig.  47. — Plano-convex  Lens.  Fig.  48. — 
Concavo-convex  Meniscus.  Fig.  49. — Bi-concave  Lens.  Fig.  50. — 
Plano-concave  Lens.  Fig.  51. — Convexo-concave  Meniscus 

convex  meniscus ;  Fig.  49,  the  bi-concave,  concavo- 
concave,  double-concave,  or  equi-concave ;  Fig.  50, 
the  plano-concave  ;  and  Fig.  51,  the  convexo-concave 
meniscus.  The  first  three  are  thicker  at  the  centre  than 
at  the  edge,  and  are  called  convex  lenses.  The  second 
three  are  thinner  at  the  centre  than  at  the  edge,  and  are 
called  concave  lenses.  In  any  convex  lens  the  inclination 
of  the  two  faces  towards  one  another  increases  from  the 
centre  or  axis  towards  the  edge.  Its  section  may  be  re- 
75 


76  THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

garded  as  being  built  up  of  a  number  of  prisms  of  gradually 
increasing  angle,  arranged  with  their  bases  inwards  or 
towards  the  centre.  The  general  effect  of  a  convex  lens 
is  to  render  transmitted  rays  of  light  more  convergent — 
that  is,  to  bend  them  towards  the  centre  or  axis,  as 
indicated  in  Fig.  52. 

In  any  concave  lens  the  inclination  of  the  two  faces 


Fig.  52. — Convex  Lens :    Principal  Focus 


Fig.  53. — Concave  Lens  :    Principal  Focus 

towards  one  another  increases  from  the  edge  towards 
the  centre  or  axis,  and  is  the  exact  opposite  to  a  convex 
lens.  Its  section  may  be  regarded  as  being  built  up  of 
a  number  of  prisms  of  gradually  increasing  angle,  arranged 
with  their  bases  outwards,  or  away  from  the  centre.  The 
general  effect  of  a  concave  lens  is  to  render  transmitted 
rays  of  light  more  divergent — that  is,  to  bend  them  away 
from  the  centre  or  axis,  as  in  Fig.  53.  In  Figs.  52  and  53 
F  indicates  focus. 


OPTICAL  SYSTEM  OF  THE  PROJECTOR  77 
The  Condenser. — The  condenser  has  nothing  to  do 
with  the  formation  of  the  image  on  the  screen.  Its 
function  is  solely  to  condense,  collect,  or  concentrate  the 
divergent  rays  of  light  emitted  by  the  jet  or  lamp  into  a 
parallel  or  very  slightly  convergent  beam,  and  thus 
illuminate  the  lantern  slide  or  the  cinematograph  film 
as  equally  and  intensely  as  possible.  A  single  condensing 
lens  would  not  do  this  properly,  owing 
to  the  spherical  aberration  found  in  all 
single  lenses.  Hence  a  combination  of 
two  or  more  lenses  is  required,  the 
one  acting  practically  as  a  corrective 
to  the  other. 

The  ordinary  condenser  is  composed 
of  two  plano-convex  lenses  mounted 
in  a  metal  case,  with  the  convex  sur- 
faces nearly  touching  (see  Figs.  54  and 
55).  It  is  suitable  for  use  with  the 
shorter  focus  projection  lenses.  With 
the  longer  focus  projection  lenses, 
special  condensers,  as  in  Figs.  56,  57, 
and  58,  give  better  results,  because 
of  their  transmitting  more  light  and  giving  more  even 
illumination  than  the  ordinary  form.  Fig.  56  shows  a 
concavo-convex  meniscus  and  a  plano-convex ;  Fig.  57, 
a  concavo-convex  meniscus  and  a  bi-convex;  and  Fig. 
58,  a  combination  of  a  concavo-convex  meniscus  with 
two  plano-convex  lenses.  In  each  of  the  three  latter 
the  meniscus  is  placed  nearest  the  light. 

Generally  speaking,  the  best  form  of  condenser  from 
the  optical  standpoint  is  that  which,  from  its  short  focus, 
permits  the  transmission  of  a  wide  angle  of  light,  and  dis- 


Fig.  54.  —  Ordinary 
Form  of  Condenser 


78          THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

tributes  it  evenly  over  the  entire  field  of  the  disc  of  light, 
which  illuminates  the  slide,  the  film,  and  the  screen. 

When  a  bi-unial  lantern  is  used  for  slides,  with  dis- 
solving view  effects,  it  should  be  fitted  with  a  pair  of 
4|-in.  condensers.  These  will  adequately  cover  the 
English  standard  slide,  having  either  a  cushion  or  a 
dome-shaped  mask  from  corner  to  corner.  But  when  the 
cinematograph  lantern  is  also  used  for  slides,  which  are 
often  not  of  a  very  high  quality,  a  4-in.  condenser  will 
usually  suffice.  A  condenser  which  is  larger  than  is 


Fig.  55  Fii.  56  Fis.  57  Fi*.  58 

Figs.  55  to  58. — Diagrams  of  Ordinary  and  Special  Forms  of  Condenser 

absolutely  necessary  wastes  the  light,  while  one  that  is 
too  small  does  not  sufficiently  illuminate  the  picture. 

When  purchasing  a  condenser,  see  that  the  lens  that 
is  to  be  placed  next  to  the  slides  is  entirely  free  from 
defects,  such  as  air  bubbles  and  strise,  as  these  might 
show  rather  unpleasantly  on  the  screen.  Both  lenses 
in  a  condenser  should  be  mounted  loosely  in  the  metal 
case  or  cell,  in  order  to  allow  for  expansion  when  they 
become  heated,  and  so  prevent  their  cracking.  Before 
lighting  up,  especially  in  very  cold  weather,  it  is  ad- 
visible  to  warm  gently  the  condenser  for  about  ten  minutes 
before  beginning  the  exhibition.  Also  avoid  any  sudden 


OPTICAL  SYSTEM  OF  THE  PROJECTOR     79 

rush  of  cold  air  by  opening  the  lantern  door  unneces- 
sarily during  the  exhibition,  otherwise  the  lenses  are 
likely  to  get  broken.  See,  also,  that  a  few  ventilation 
holes  are  in  the  periphery  of  the  cell,  so  as  to  permit  the 
escape  of  any  moisture  which  may  happen  to  condense 
on  the  inner  faces  of  the  lenses.  There  are  many  forms  of 
condenser  in  which  ventilation  and  easy  taking  apart  have 
been  made  special  features.  Fig.  59  shows  an  example. 

In  the  optical  lantern  the  transparent  slide  is 
placed  immediately  in  front 
of  the  condenser,  so  that 
the  cone  of  light  covers  the 
whole  surface  of  the  slide. 
In  the  cinematograph  pro- 
jector the  tiny  picture  on 
the  film  is  farther  away 
from  the  condenser.  The 

lantern     must     be     placed     in     Fig.  59. — Metalwork  of  Heavy 

such     a     position    that    the       %S£S£  ""***"*  *"' 

diameter     of     the     cone    of 

light  shall   slightly   exceed   the  frame   opening  of  the 

gate. 

The  intensity  of  the  illumination  on  the  screen  is 
governed  by  the  amount  of  light  which  the  condenser 
first  collects  and  then  converges  into  the  projection  lens. 
In  order  to  obtain  this  result,  the  projection  lens  must 
be  placed  nearly  at  one  of  the  conjugate  foci  of  the  con- 
denser, whilst  the  source  of  light  must  occupy  the  other. 

The  term  "  conjugate  foci "  needs  to  be  explained. 
The  tendency  of  rays  of  light  from  the  source  of  illu- 
mination is  to  diverge  from  a  point,  and  spread  out  in  all 
directions.  If  a  condenser  be  placed  in  such  a  position 


8o          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

in  the  path  of  these  divergent  rays  as  to  collect  the 
whole  or  the  greater  portion  of  them,  they  will  be  bent 
in  passing  through  the  lenses  of  the  condenser,  and, 
passing  out  as  a  convergent  beam,  will  be  brought  to  a 
point  again.  These  two  points,  namely,  the  point  of 
illumination  and  the  position  when  the  rays  of  light 
after  passing  through  the  condenser  are  again  brought 
to  a  point,  are  the  conjugate  foci  of  the  condenser. 

In  the  same  way  the  lantern  slide  or  the  cinemato- 
graph film,  and  the  screen  on  to  which  the  picture  is  pro- 
jected, are  placed  at  the  respective  conjugate  foci  of  the 
projection  lens. 

It  is  therefore  clear  that  the  correct  position  of  the 
source  of  light,  namely,  its  distance  from  the  condenser, 
is  governed  by  the  focal  length  of  the  condenser,  and  also 
by  that  of  the  projection  lens.  As  the  position  of  the 
projection  lens  in  front  of  the  condenser  must  necessarily 
be  moved  backwards  and  forwards  for  the  purpose  of 
focusing,  it  follows  that,  when  critical  focus  has  been 
obtained,  the  source  of  light  must  be  moved  nearer  to  or 
farther  from  the  condenser,  in  order  to  obtain  perfect  illu- 
mination on  the  screen.  Therefore,  perfect  illumination 
is  only  to  be  obtained  when  the  light,  its  conjugate  point, 
and  the  projection  lens  are  all  in  one  and  the  same  straight 
line. 

The  focal  length  of  an  objective  or  condenser  is  the 
distance  at  which  the  image  of  a  far-off  object,  such  as  a 
church  spire,  is  thrown  sharply  on  a  white  card  held 
behind  the  lens.  The  distance  may  be  measured  approxi- 
mately from  a  point  midway  between  the  two  glasses. 
A  condenser  is  not  fixed  at  its  focal  length  from  the  lamp, 
but  farther  away,  the  distance  varying  with  that  of  the 


INTERIOR.    SHOWING    SPROCKETS    AND 
CHAIN-DRIVE 

(Gaumont  type) 


OPTICAL  SYSTEM  OF  THE  PROJECTOR      81 

objective.  When  the  objective  is  nearer  to  the  con- 
denser the  lamp  must  be  more  distant  from  the  latter, 
and  vice  versa.  A  2f-in.  focus  condenser  is  suitable 
for  use  with  any  objective  that  is  not  of  unusually 
long  focus. 

As  shown  in  Fig.  60,  when  the  source  of  light  A  is  too 
far  from  the  condenser  B,  the  rays  of  light  come  to  a 
focus  at  c  and  diverge  again  before  reaching  the  gate  D, 
so  that  much  light  is  wasted.  When,  however,  the  illu- 
minant  is  brought  nearer,  as  at  E,  the  cone  of  rays  is 
concentrated  on  the  gate,  as  shown  by  the  dotted  lines, 


Fig.  60. — Action  of  Condenser  in  Cinematograph 

and  does  not  come   to   a   focus   until  it   reaches   the 
objective  at  F. 

The  Objective,  or  Projecting  Lens. — The  bril- 
liancy of  a  picture  greatly  depends  on  the  first-class 
quality  of  the  lenses  used.  Therefore,  the  best  is  cheapest 
in  the  long  run.  The  usual  form  of  objective  or  pro- 
jection lens  is  that  which  is  known  as  the  Petzval  type  of 
portrait  lens  (see  Fig.  61).  In  this,  two  sets  of  lenses  are 
mounted  in  a  brass  tube.  The  front  combination  is  a 
bi-convex  crown-glass  lens  A,  accurately  ground,  fitted, 
and  cemented  with  Canada  balsam  into  a  plano-concave 
flint-glass  lens  B,  so  as  to  form  an  indivisible  joint.  The 
back  combination  is  a  bi-convex  crown-glass  lens  c 
separated  by  a  narrow  brass  ring  from  a  negative  concavo- 


82  THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

convex  flint-glass  lens  D.  A  good  quality  lens  of  this 
form,  while  being  achromatic  (giving  an  image  free  from 
colour  fringes)  should  give  sufficient  depth  of  definition  and 
flatness  of  field.  These  two  combinations  are  separated 
in  the  tube  by  a  space  about  equal  to  their  diameter. 

In  reassembling  an  objective  lens,  always  see  that 
the  glass  c  has  its  flattest  side  next  to  the  lantern,  while 
D  is  placed  with  its  concave  side  nearest  to  c,  the  two 
glasses  being  kept  a  slight  distance  apart  by  a  metal 
ring.  The  third  glass,  a  cemented  combination,  is 
properly  placed  as  indicated.  A  useful  rule  to  remember 
is  that  all  external  convex  surfaces  in  a  lantern  objective 
should  face  the  screen.  When  a  glass  has  two  convex 
surfaces,  the  more  convex  of  them  should  face  the  screen. 

While  the  ordinary  cinematograph  lenses  are  of  the 
Petzval  type,  a  specially  designed  anastigmat  gives  better 
results,  owing  to  its  finer  definition,  flatness  of  field,  and 
equality  of  illumination.  It  is  an  expensive  instrument. 

A  cinematograph  objective  is  commonly  of  shorter 
focus  than  one  for  lantern  use,  since  the  film  pictures  are 
so  much  smaller  than  lantern  slides,  and  could  not  be  pro- 
jected to  a  sufficient  size  with  a  lantern  objective  except 
by  getting  an  inconvenient  distance  from  the  screen.  On 
account  of  the  degree  or  enlargement  necessary,  a  cine- 
matograph objective  should  be  of  large  aperture,  and 
capable  of  giving  the  best  possible  definition.  The 
larger  the  diameter,  the  focal  length,  etc.  being  equal, 
the  better  the  illumination. 

Approximately,  the  focus  of  the  lantern  objective  is 
about  three  and  a  half  times  that  of  the  cinematograph 
projector  lens.  Thus  with  a  3-in.  lens  on  the  machine  a 
io-in.  lantern  objective  will  be  required  in  order  that  the 


OPTICAL  SYSTEM  OF  THE  PROJECTOR  83 

sizes  of  the  respective  images  may  coincide  as  nearly  as 
possible  on  the  screen.  There  may  be  difficulty  in  accom- 
plishing this,  and  a  compromise  must  be  made  (see 
Fig.  62).  The  size  of  the  picture  will  depend  on  the  dis- 
tance between  the  machine  and  the  screen,  even  with  the 
same  lens ;  and  when  a  picture  is  too  large,  and  neither 
the  screen  nor  the  machine  can  be  moved,  then  longer- 
focus  lenses  must  be  used. 

If  the  lenses  are  not  marked  with  their  focus,  the  latter 
may  be  ascertained  by  placing  a 
sheet  of  white  paper  on  the  wall 
opposite  the  window,  and  hold- 


Fig.  61. — Diagram  of  Lenses  in 
Objective 


Fig.  62.— Relative  Size  of 
Cinematograph  Picture 
(shown  dotted)  and  Lan- 
tern-slide Picture  on 
Screen 


ing  the  lens  in  front  of  it,  so  as  to  show  on  the  paper 
either  an  image  of  the  window  frame  or  that  of  some 
distant  object.  When  the  image  is  sufficiently  sharp, 
the  equivalent  focus  of  the  lens  is  the  distance  between 
the  sheet  of  paper  and  a  point  on  the  lens,  midway 
between  the  front  and  back  combinations. 

Determining  Lens  Required,  Size  of  Picture, 
and  Distance. — The  equivalent  focus  of  a  lens  is  an 
important  factor,  for  on  it  depends  the  size  of  the  picture 
obtainable  at  different  distances  from  the  screen,  and 
vice  versa.  A  focus  is  a  point  from  which  rays  of  light 
diverge,  or  to  which  they  converge. 


84 


THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 


To  secure  a  certain  size  picture  at  a  certain  distance, 
multiply  the  distance  the  cinematograph  machine  is 
from  the  screen  by  the  width  of  the  mask  opening,  or  the 
light  aperture  at  the  gate,  which  is  usually  f  in.,  and 
divide  the  product  by  the  size  of  the  picture  required  ;  the 
result  will  be  the  focus  of  the  lens  needed.  For  example, 
it  is  required  to  find  the  focus  of  the  lens  which  will  give 
a  i5-ft.  picture  at  50-ft.  throw.  Therefore,  50  x  £  =  43! 
-*-  15  =  3-in.  focus  lens,  approximately. 

CINEMATOGRAPH  LENS  TABLE  (Gate  Aperture  assumed 
to  be  i  in.  wide). 


Distance 
between 
Projector 
Lens  and 
Screen. 

2  in. 

Focal 
2$  in. 

Length  t 
3    in. 

)f  Object 
3iin. 

Lens 
4    in. 

5    in. 

Approximate  Width  of  Picture  on  Screen 

ft. 

ft.  in. 

ft.  in. 

ft.  in. 

ft.  in. 

ft.  in. 

ft.  in. 

10 

5     o 

4     o 

3     4 

2    10 

2      6 

2      0 

15 

7    6 

7    o 

5     o 

4     3 

3     9 

3     o 

20 

10      0 

8     o 

6     8 

5     9 

5     o 

4     o 

25 

12      6 

IO       O 

8     4 

7     2 

6     3 

5     o 

30 

15     o 

12       O 

IO      O 

8     7 

7     6 

6     o 

35 

17     6 

14     o 

ii     8 

10      0 

8     9 

7     ° 

40 

20      0 

16     o 

13     4 

ii     5 

10      0 

8     o 

45 

22       6 

18     o 

15     o 

12    10 

ii     3 

9     o 

50 

25     o 

20     o 

16     8 

14     4 

12      6 

IO      O 

60 

30     o 

24     o 

20     o 

I7      2 

15     o 

12       0 

70 

35     o 

28     o 

23     4 

20     o 

17     6 

14     o 

80 

40    o 

32     o 

26     8 

22    IO 

20     o 

16     o 

90 

45     o 

36     o 

30     o 

25     8 

22       6 

18     o 

100 

5°     ° 

40     o 

33     4 

28     7 

25     o 

20     o 

no 

55     o 

44     o 

36     8 

3i     5 

27     6 

22       0 

120 

60     o 

48     o 

40     o 

34     4 

30    o 

24       0 

130 

65     o 

52     o 

43     4 

37     2 

32     6 

26     o 

140 

70     o 

56     o 

46     8 

40     o 

35     o 

28     o 

150 

75     o 

60     o 

5°     ° 

48     7 

37     G 

3°     ° 

200 

100      0 

80     o 

66     8 

57     2 

5°     ° 

40     o 

g 

M 

CM                                                                                                            MMMMMMt^rO 

d 

_j   N  Tf-txi^o  POrO'^-«OvOvOoo   O>O   O  N  fOiOO^ 

N 

2" 

4JNNWNfOfOrf^vOtxOOO>ON,Otx^MVO 

N 

d 

-H   ^vO   O^  O   roO  tx  O^WWC^^VOOC^^O^MO 

•  S                                                                          M                                       M                                       M 

^ 

CO 

M 

^JNNNPOfOfO1*  t^iVO  00   ON  O    w   rovO  00   O    fOOO 

Tf 

.s 

1 

_jvO   O>O   fOtxO^O   covo   ONO   covO   OvO   OO  O   covO 

N 

fc 

^J    M    N    CO  rO  fO  PO  <OVO    txOO    OiHNiOtxONiOM 

^ 

M 

UJ 

HH                                                                                   MMWMMNNNCO 

cn 

d 

8 

o 

-jONOrOOOMVOONvOOfOOO^MOvOfOM 

« 

M 
M 

^i 

is«,cr>«n«n«*«*oo»o««*»M3.tsS 

9 

.a 

a; 

•2            M 

0 

M 

^ 

^J   ro  co  CO  CO  ••*•  -<t-vO  tx  O>  O   N   ro  <OOO   w    •<*•  tx  o   tN 

3 

_:  rhoo  o  -^-oo  ooo  -^-ooo  rt-ooo  o  -^-oo  o  rj-oo 

a 

•2 

H 

^ 

^J   CO  fO  "<t  ^  ^  «OO  00  O   M   ro  u">vO   O   rovO   O   fO  M 

1 

| 

JH   O>  W  vO  w  rooo  vO^j-fOMOOO>vOcOOONVO 

a 

s 

•  S                    M                                          M                                      1 

1 

00 

* 

4J   fO'it'^-Tf-iOtOtNOsw   ro  u->vO  CO   (N  VO   O    ro  tx   1 

1 

,0 

SH                                                                                 WHiWMW(S(SfOrOCO 

. 

•^X, 

•<x 

^rOONvNt^OiOt^ONOONPO  lOOO    O   CO  tx  O 

.Q 

X 

1 

tx 

^j            ^            „         -.,-,^,^,^,         w         s,         _,-.,^.^         _,v            ^      V 

•OVOOVOOVOOOOOOVOOOOO 

.s 

VOO   txtx                    t»                                       III 

| 

vO 

+J    "^                           0.0    W    JOtv.0    N    JOO^JOO, 

-jO^NOmOOOOOOOOOO 

G 

•a                                    1  1  1  I 

1 

« 

^j  vo  vo  o.  txoo  a\  N  1000  M  rt-  tx  o  vo  N   '    '    «    ' 

d 

-jvo   roo   ONVO   roO   O>vO  COO  O^vO 
"S                                                                             1     1     1     1     1     1 

I 

* 

4^  txoo   Oi  ON  O   w   looo   N  vo  O   ro  fx   1     1     '     '     I 

fK37  U4»fUVJ 

"S 

- 

3JUVfS1(J 

h                                                                                                                                          MM 

M 

86          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

To  find  what  size  picture  will  be  given  with  a  3-in. 
lens  at  5o-ft.  throw  :  50  x  £  =  43!  H-  3  =  i5-ft.  picture, 
approximately.  To  find  what  distance  from  the  screen 
the  machine  must  be  placed,  that  is,  the  throw,  in  order 
to  give  a  15-ft.  picture  with  a  3-in.  lens  :  15  x  3  =  45  -+-  £ 
=  5o-ft.  throw,  approximately.  Similarly  for  lantern 
slides  :  (i)  50  X  3  =  150  -*-  15  =  lo-in.  focus  lens.  (2) 
50  x  3  =  150  -*-  10  =  15-ft.  picture.  (3)  15  x  10  = 
I5°  -*-  3  =  5o-ft.  throw. 

In  most  tables,  as  in  that  given  on  page  84,  the  fact 
that  the  width  of  the  light  aperture  at  the  mask  or  gate 
is  £  in.  less  than  i  in.  is  ignored,  the  width  being  taken  as 
i  in.  It  will  be  noted  that  the  dimensions  given  are, 
therefore,  only  approximate. 

The  Care  of  Lenses. — Do  not  clean  lenses  with  a 
chamois  leather  ;  keep  two  old  cambric  handkerchiefs  for 
the  purpose.  Do  not  touch  the  surfaces  of  the  lenses 
with  the  fingers,  as  finger-marks  leave  a  greasy 
impression,  which  is  difficult  to  remove,  while  they  may 
also  show  on  the  screen.  Avoid  unscrewing  the  com- 
binations as  much  as  possible.  The  inside  surfaces  of 
the  lenses  seldom  need  cleaning  if  the  lenses  fit  properly 
in  the  mount.  But  always  give  the  outside  surfaces 
of  the  lenses  of  both  the  condenser  and  the  objective  a 
gentle  polish  before  beginning  an  exhibition,  because 
these  surfaces,  being  always  exposed,  attract  dust  and 
moisture. 


CHAPTER  IX 
Projection  Illuminants 

The  Various  Illuminants  Compared. — The  source  of 
light  in  an  optical  lantern  may  vary  from  an  oil  lamp 
to  an  electric  arc,  but  many  of  the  ordinary  lantern 
illuminants  are  far  too  feeble  for  use  in  the  cinematograph 
projector.  Such  illuminants  as  the  oil  lamp,  with  its  two, 
three  or  four  wicks ;  incandescent  gas,  with  upright  or 
inverted  mantle ;  and  electric  incandescent  lamps  with 
carbon  or  preferably  metallic  filaments,  need  be  little 
more  than  referred  to  in  this  place  ;  for  home  exhibitions 
they  may  be  made  to  serve,  but  there  is  little  of  a  practical 
nature  that  need  be  said  about  them.  The  oil  lamp  must 
be  kept  scrupulously  clean  and  the  charred  wick  be 
rubbed  (not  cut)  smooth  and  straight ;  the  wicks,  after 
lighting,  should  be  turned  up  slowly,  and  the  adjust- 
able chimney  altered  in  height  until  a  proper  draught 
is  obtained.  The  incandescent  mantle  is  cleanlier  and 
less  "  smelly  "  in  use,  but  the  improvement  in  illumina- 
tion is  very  doubtful,  and  the  mantle  is  not  easily  pre- 
served entire  after  the  one  show.  Electric  incandescent 
lamps  of  the  most  modern  type  are  convenient,  but 
suffer  from  the  great  defect  that  characterises  the  oil 
lamp  and  gas  mantle — the  light  rays  are  given  off  by  a 
relatively  large  surface  and  a  great  proportion  of  them  is 
lost,  whereas  if  the  rays  were  emitted  by  a  point  or  spot 
(as  in  the  case  of  limelight  and  the  arc  lamp)  the  con- 

87 


88  THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

denser  lenses  could  re-combine  them  into  a  strong  beam 
of  light.  Acetylene  is  better  than  any  of  the  foregoing, 
the  light  being  more  intense  and  the  area  from  which  it  is 
emitted  being  much  smaller ;  but  still  it  is  useless  for 
public  shows  of  any  size,  and  its  employment  generally 
necessitates  a  generator,  to  which  there  is  often  objection. 
In  the  form  of  "  dissolved  "  acetylene  (charged  under 
pressure  into  cylinders  containing  acetone,  which  is 
capable  of  absorbing  relatively  large  volumes,  acetylene 
being  liable  to  explosion  if  compressed  by  itself)  the  gas 
can  be  used  with  the  minimum  of  inconvenience  but  a 
maximum  of  expense.  Limelight,  in  one  of  its  many 
forms,  is  an  excellent  illuminant  for  both  ordinary  lantern 
and  cinematograph  projector,  and  in  the  case  of  the  latter 
it  is  the  only  practical  alternative  to  the  use  of  the  electric 
arc  lamp.  Limelight  is  produced  by  causing  an  intense 
flame  to  play  upon  a  cylinder  of  lime,  the  heat  raising  a 
spot  of  the  lime  to  brilliant  incandescence.  The  best 
of  all  illuminants  for  the  cinematograph  projector  is 
the  arc  lamp,  and,  needless  to  say,  this  is  employed 
in  practically  all  the  permanent  cinematograph  theatres. 
The  British  standard  of  illuminating  power  is  the 
amount  of  light  given  out  by  a  sperm  candle  £  in.  in  dia- 
meter; size,  six  to  the  pound ;  each  burning  120  gr.  per  hour. 
The  relative  values  of  projection  illuminants  are  given 
by  Molteni  as  follow  : — 

Photometric  values 

Oxy-hydrogen  limelight 16.6 

Electric  incandescent  lamps — 

32  candle-power          . .         . .         . .         . .        0.68 

50      „          ,,      vertical        . .         . .         . .        0.93 

50      „          „      horizontal 0.93 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  89 

Electric  arc  lamps — 

7  amperes 39-O3 

10        „  75.61 

12         „  86.50 

15         „  117-61 

50        „  . .         . .         . .         . .         . .    160.80 

Illuminating  power 
Oxygen  gas  compressed  in  cylinders,  and 

ordinary  coal-gas,  with  blow-through    candle-power. 

jet  . .         . .         . .         . .         . .       300  to   500 

Both  gases  compressed  in  cylinders,  with 

mixed  jet  . .         . .         . .         . .     1000  to  1500 

Injector  jet  . .         . .         . .         . .  1200 

Gwyer  No.  i  jet . .         . .         . .         . .  1200 

„       No.  2.  jet . .         . .         . .         . .  1600 

Electric  arc  light     . .          . .         . .    from  1000  upwards 

(approximately  10  amperes  will  give  1000  c.p.) 
For  small  rooms,  with  a  disc  of  light  on  the  screen  up 
to  10  ft.,  with  limelight,  a  blow-through  jet ;  or,  with 
the  electric  arc,  a  lo-ampere  arc  lamp  will  suffice  either 
for  cinematograph  films  or  glass  slides.  For  larger 
rooms,  with  a  disc  of  light  on  the  screen  up  to  12  ft., 
with  limelight,  a  mixed  jet  will  be  required,  or  with  the 
electric  arc  about  15  amperes.  This  amperage  should  not 
be  exceeded  when  valuable  slides  are  shown,  because  the 
great  heat  which  accompanies  the  light  may  ruin  them. 
For  halls  and  theatres,  with  a  long  throw  and  a  disc 
of  light  on  the  screen  up  to  15  ft.,  with  limelight,  an  in- 
jector jet  should  be  used ;  with  the  electric  arc  an  am- 
perage of  from  30  to  50,  or  even  70,  with  a  larger  arc 
lamp  relatively,  may  be  necessary  for  cinematograph 
films.  The  general  rule  is  :  Take  the  distance  between 


90          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

the  lamp  and  the  screen,  in  yards,  and  add  10  ;  the  pro- 
duct will  be  the  amperage  required.  Say  the  distance  is 
100  ft.  =  33  yd.  Therefore  33  +  10  =  43.  Therefore 
40  to  45  amperes  will  suffice.  This  is  for  continuous 
current. 

But  as  alternating  current  is  about  20  per  cent,  less 
in  candle-power  for  the  same  amperage,  one-fourth  more 
will  be  required  with  it  than  for  continuous  current. 

How  Intensity  of  Illumination  Varies  with  the 
Area  of  the  Picture. — It  will  be  understood  from  the 
foregoing  that  the  greater  the  distance  between  the  pro- 
jector and  screen  or  the  greater  the  size  of  the  picture, 
the  more  powerful  must  be  the  source  of  light  to  obtain 
equal  intensity  of  illumination  on  the  screen.  But  the 
reader  must  not  hastily  conclude  that  doubling  the 
distance  between  machine  and  screen  would  decrease  the 
illumination  to  one-half.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  it  would 
decrease  it  to  one-quarter,  because  the  same  amount  of 
light  would  now  have  to  suffice  for  an  area  four  times 
as  large  as  before.  In  other  words,  the  intensity  of  the 
illumination  is  inversely  as  the  square  of  the  distance 
from  the  source  of  light.  Referring  to  the  table  of  distances 
given  on  p.  84,  a  circular  picture  formed  at  a  distance 
of  50  ft.  with  a  2j-in.  focus  lens  is  20  ft.  wide  ;  if  the 
projector  is  moved  back  until  the  distance  is  100  ft.,  the 
picture  becomes  40  ft.  wide,  and  its  area  (the  important 
factor)  has  grown  from,  say,  300  sq.  ft.  to  1,200  sq.  ft. 
The  same  amount  of  light  has  now  to  illumine  four  times 
the  previous  area,  and  it  is,  therefore,  obvious  that  its 
intensity  per  square  foot  must  sink  to  one-quarter  of  what 
it  was  before.  The  same  applies,  of  course,  when  the 
size  of  the  picture  is  increased  by  substituting  a  lens  of 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  91 

smaller  focal  length.  For  double  the  diameter  of  the 
screen  picture,  the  consumption  of  gas  at  the  jet  or  of 
current  at  the  arc  lamp  would  be  increased  by  four,  if 
such  a  course  were  practicable,  to  obtain  equal  intensity 
of  illumination. 

ACETYLENE 

Acetylene  is  a  gas  evolved  by  the  action  of  water  on 
calcium  carbide.  There  are  two  forms  of  generator,  one  in 
which  water  drips  upon  the  carbide,  and  the  other  in 
which  the  small  lumps  of  carbide  fall  into  water.  The 
easiest  to  construct  is  the  water-to-carbide  style,  but 
its  disadvantage  is  that  once  gas-making  is  started,  it  is 
difficult  to  stop  it  until  the  whole  of  the  carbide  has  been 
used  or  spoiled.  The  carbide-to-water  style  is  more 
economical  in  use,  but  more  expensive  in  first  cost. 
Particulars  of  a  variety  of  acetylene  generators  are 
given  in  dealers'  catalogues,  but  the  following  description 
applies  to  a  carbide-to-water  generator  of  approved 
design,  which  may  be  made  by  the  lanternist  himself  if 
he  has  some  knowledge  of  metal  working. 

The  acetylene  generator  shown  by  Fig.  63  is  intended 
to  carry  4  Ib.  of  carbide,  which  will  give,  say,  a  3OO-c.p. 
light  for  three  hours  or  an  equivalent,  if  there  is  no  waste  ; 
but  it  can  be  made  any  proportionate  larger  size.  The 
size  of  the  generator  is  controlled  by  the  number  of  hours 
the  lights  are  to  be  burned  and  the  candle-power  of  the 
burners.  A  usual  size  of  burner  is  that  consuming 
0.7  cub.  ft.  of  gas  per  hour,  giving  a  27-c.p.  light.  As 
each  pound  of  carbide  yields  (actual)  4!  ft.  of  gas,  a  pound 
will  supply  one  of  these  burners  six  and  a  half  hours. 
Fig.  64  shows  the  lid  or  cap,  which  is  a  simple  water- 
sealed  arrangement.  The  depth  of  the  annular  trough 


92          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

into  which  the  cap  or  lid  drops  may  be  6  in.,  and  this 
trough  should  be  about  half-full  of  water  when  in  use, 
so  as  to  provide  a  water  seal. 

The  apparatus  can  be  made  of  tin  or  galvanised  sheet- 
iron  and  painted  ;  or  it  may  be  of  sheet-zinc  provided  the 
carbide  holder  is  of  sheet-iron.  The  gaspipe  can  be  iron 
or  compo.  Copper  should  not  be  used  in  the  construction 
of  acetylene  apparatus  ;  the  use  of  brass  is  permissible, 
though  not  encouraged  in  the  actual  generating  part. 

The  carbide  holder  should  be  of  a  cylindrical  shape, 
3  in.  in  diameter  and  12  in.  high,  well  perforated.  The 
cylindrical  chamber  in  which  the  carbide  holder  works 
should  be  3  J  in.  in  diameter ;  the  lower  half  of  the 
apparatus  (the  water  tank)  10  in.  in  diameter  and  24  in. 
high  ;  the  upper  half  (the  gas  bell)  9^  in.  in  diameter  and 
24  in.  high  to  the  shoulder.  The  carbide  holder  should  be 
suspended,  so  that  it  is  wholly  submerged  when  the  gas 
bell  is  at  its  lowest,  but  should  be  well  clear  above  the 
water  when  the  bell*  is  at  its  highest.  This  means 
arranging  the  suspending  wires  or  chains  so  that  the  top 
of  the  holder  is  about  3  in.  below  the  level  of  the  shoulder 
of  the  bell. 

The  gas  outlet  pipe  is  usually  J  in.,  but  for  brief  high- 
power  lights  it  had  better  be  f  in.  The  cock  and  short 
pipe  A  can  be  the  same  size  as  the  gas  outlet  pipe.  It 
should  be  explained  that  the  purpose  of  the  cock  and 
pipe  A,  and  the  cylindrical  chamber  round  the  carbide 
holder,  is  to  admit  of  re-charging  (that  is,  withdrawing  the 
carbide  holder  and  replacing  it)  without  discharging  and 
wasting  the  gas  in  the  bell.  By  closing  the  cock,  com- 
munication between  the  bell  and  the  generating  centre  is 
cut  off ;  and  if  the  lid  is  removed  the  bell  is  not  emptied. 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  93 

This  is  shown  because  the  apparatus  may  suit  some 
readers  for  a  permanent  purpose,  as  for  lighting  a  small 
office,  workshop,  or  the  like  ;  but  for  temporary  purposes, 
such  as  cinematograph  work,  the  cock  and  pipe  and  the 
cylindrical  chamber  referred  to  might  both  be  omitted, 
as  no  good  end  is  served  in  retaining  gas  in  the  bell  after 


fit.  63 


Fit  64 


Fig.  63.  —  Section 
through  Home- 
made Acetylene 
Generator 


Fig.  64.  —  Lid  or 
Cap  of  Gene- 
rator 


the  exhibition  is  ended ;  in  fact,  the  apparatus  is  then 
emptied,  it  having  to  be  portable  in  the  fullest  sense  of 
the  word. 

For  temporary  work,  two  or  three  lugs  or  ears  might 
be  attached  at  the  bottom  of  the  tank,  so  that  the  base 
could  be  secured  to  the  floor  with  one  or  two  small  nails 
or  screws. 

When  starting  the  apparatus,  fill  the  tank  with  water 
to  within  3  in.  of  the  top.  Fill  the  carbide  holder  with 


94          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

carbide,  but  do  not  shake  it  down  to  pack  close ;  it 
should  be  as  loose  as  possible.  Put  the  carbide  holder 
in  the  bell,  then  lower  altogether  into  the  tank  ;  but 
do  this  in  such  a  manner  that  the  lower  part  of  the 
carbide  holder  only  just  touches  the  water.  Gas  will  be 
immediately  given  off,  and  then  the  bell  will  sustain 
itself.  If  possible,  do  this  all  outdoors,  and  also  dis- 
charge a  little  of  the  first  gas  to  waste  without  lighting 
it,  as  the  first  to  come  away  will  be  air  and  gas  together, 
and  this  is  an  explosive  mixture.  This  should  always  be 


Figs.  65  and  66. — Kamm's  Separate-control  Acetylene  Burners 

done  when  the  apparatus  is  charged  and  started  after 
being  completely  empty,  but  is  not  necessary  when  the 
apparatus  is  in  permanent  use,  the  cock  being  closed 
when  re-charging,  as  already  explained. 

It  is  not  considered  necessary  to  purify  the  gas  for 
lantern  work,  as  it  is  only  in  use  one  or  two  hours  at  a 
time  ;  but  for  residence  lighting  purification  is  essential, 
for  which  purpose  it  needs  to  be  passed  through  water 
and  also,  if  possible,  through  bleaching  powder  (commonly 
called  chloride  of  lime)  mixed  with  coke  or  powdered 
brick,  and  afterwards  through  lime.  The  purification  re- 
moves those  properties  that  give  acetylene  its  evil 
smell. 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  95 

Compressed  and  Dissolved  Acetylene. — The  com- 
pression of  acetylene  is  not  a  safe  thing  in  the  hands  of 
any  but  those  practised  in  the  work  or  well  up  in  the 
chemistry  of  the  subject.  Acetylene  when  compressed 
quickly  becomes  liable  to  explode  by  simple  shock.  The 
practice  now  followed  is  to  compress  acetylene  into  liquid 
acetone,  the  latter  having  a  high  solvent  power,  so  that  it 
is  correct  to  say  that  the  acetylene  is  dissolved  in  it,  which 
gives  the  element  of  safety.  To  make  this  practicable, 
the  steel  cylinders  are  filled  with  porous  inert  solid 
material,  such  as  fossil  meal,  this  being  saturated  with 
acetone  and  the  acetylene  then  pumped  in.  The  latter 
must  be  properly  purified  beforehand.  In  England, 
the  gas  is  compressed  to  not  more  than  ten  atmo- 
spheres, and  the  capacity  at  that  maximum  is  roughly 
100  cub.  ft.  of  acetylene  per  i  cub.  ft.  of  porous  material 
contained  by  the  cylinder.  The  cylinders  are  in  various 
sizes,  that  having  a  diameter  of  6J  in.  containing 
approximately  60  cub.  ft.,  and  the  8J  in.  containing 
approximately  100  cub.  ft.  The  gas,  when  liberated, 
exerts  the  same  pressure  that  was  employed  to  compress 
it.  It  comes  away  from  the  acetone  unchanged  in  quality. 

Acetylene  Jets  or  Burners. — Three  or  four  Bray's 
"  Beto  "  burners,  each  taking  i  ft.  per  hour,  make  an 
excellent  arrangement  for  the  home  cinematograph. 
They  may  be  placed  with  the  thin  part  of  the  flame 
facing  the  condenser,  but  many  prefer  the  other  way. 
The  distance  apart  of  the  burners  may  equal  their  thick- 
ness, and  they  may  be  stepped  g%  in.  above  each  other  ; 
but  the  stepping  can  be  omitted  if  desired,  simply  placing 
them  in  line.  It  will  be  understood  that  a  reflector  is  an 
essential  fitting.  While  in  most  jets  all  the  burners  are 


96          THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

fitted  to  one  pipe,  and  the  supply  of  gas  is  not,  therefore, 
adjustable  to  each,  there  are  some,  as,  for  example,  the 
Kama  outfit  shown  by  Fig.  67,  in  which  there  is  a  separate 
supply  to  each  burner  adjustable  by  means  of  a  screw- 
down  valve.  In  this  generator,  the  charge,  nearly  i  Ib. 
of  carbide,  gives  a  three-hour  light.  If  preferred,  the 


Fig.  67. — Kama  Acetylene  Generator 

generator  may  be  placed  on  the  ground  and  connected 
to  the  jet  by  means  of  a  long  rubber  tube.  Other  burners 
of  the  same  make  and  type  are  shown  by  Figs.  65 
and  66. 

LIMELIGHT 

It  has  already  been  shown  that  limelight  is  the  best 
projection  illuminant  in  the  absence  of  the  arc  lamp.   The 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  97 

equipment  is  reasonably  cheap  and  the  gases  are  generally 
easily  obtainable.  The  modern  system  of  supplying 
compressed  gases  in  steel  cylinders  is  convenient,  and 
has  advantages  over  the  use  of  a  generator.  Of  course,  in 
villages  away  from  photographic  depots  it  may  be  more 
convenient  to  generate  the  gases  on  the  spot,  but  the 
cinematograph  operator  has  quite  enough  to  do  without 
undertaking  further  responsibilities  if  these  can  be 
avoided,  and  he  is,  therefore,  strongly  advised  to  leave 
alone  the  generation  of  gases  wherever  possible  and  to 
employ  the  compressed  gas,  which  is  readily  obtainable 
from  chemists  and  photographic  stores  throughout  the 
land. 

There  are  many  systems  of  limelight,  these  including 
the  oxy-hydrogen  with  blow-through,  injector,  or  mixed 
jets ;  the  oxy-ether,  oxy-petrol,  etc.  ;  and  the  oxy- 
acetylene  ;  and  these  will  be  described  in  the  order  in 
which  they  are  here  mentioned,  but  as  limes  and  com- 
pressed gas  are  essential  to  all  of  them,  these  may  be 
discussed  first. 

Limes. — Limelight  is  produced  by  the  action  of 
an  intense  flame  upon  a  small  cylinder  of  lime.  Lime 
subjected  to  an  ordinary  gas  flame  becomes  dull  red-hot ; 
but  when  the  combustion  of  the  gas  is  forced  by  mixing 
pure  oxygen  with  the  gas,  the  flame  becomes  considerably 
hotter  and  more  concentrated,  and  the  lime  becomes 
brilliantly  incandescent. 

During  the  last  few  years,  a  better  substance  than  lime 
has  been  introduced  for  the  purpose.  It  consists  of  a 
mixture  of  two  rare  earths — thorium  and  cerium,  put  up 
in  the  form  of  round  "  pastilles  " — and  this  mixture  re- 
quires an  even  hotter  flame  than  does  the  lime  to  produce 


98          THE   CINEMATOGRAPH   BOOK 

its  maximum  incandescence,  at  which  point  it  yields  a 
light  more  powerful  than  limelight  and  of  a  colour  even 
more  suited  for  projection  purposes.  Limes  are  cylin- 
drical and  have  a  central  hole  through  which  passes  a  pin 
of  the  jet  (see  Fig.  78,  p.  108).  A  metal  strip  bent  to  the 
form  of  tongs  (see  Fig.  68)  is  a  convenient  means  of  lifting 
a  hot  lime  off  the  pin;  when  made  of  wire,  it  is  also 
useful  for  clearing  out  the  hole  in  the  lime.  Limes 
are  sold  packed  in  lever-lid  tins  containing  one  dozen, 
and  also  in  the  form  of  single  limes  each  sealed  in 
glass.  The  boxed  limes  are  cheaper  than  the  others, 
but  the  single  limes  are  always  to  be  preferred ;  should 
the  lid  of  the  tin  be  carelessly  replaced  so  as  to  allow  of 
air  reaching  the  inside,  the  limes  will  soften  and  crumble. 
Limes  are  obtainable  in  different  sizes,  the  smaller  ones 
for  ordinary  lantern  use,  and  larger  ones  for  cinemato- 
graph purposes.  They  rapidly  disintegrate  when  ex- 
posed to  atmospheric  action,  and  for  this  reason  should 
be  removed  from  the  jet  immediately  a  show  is  over, 
because  if  left  till  the  next  day  they  may  possibly  be 
found  to  have  gone  to  pieces  and  have  made  a  mess. 
Limes  have  their  vagaries,  some  being  much  harder  and 
more  durable  than  others  ;  some  will  scarcely  be  affected 
by  an  hour's  work,  and  others  will  be  pitted,  cracked 
and  worthless  in  less  than  half  an  hour.  It  is,  therefore, 
necessary  always  to  have  spare  limes  at  hand.  The  intense 
flame  rapidly  pits  a  soft  lime,  and  the  operator  must  watch 
for  this  and  give  the  lime  an  occasional  turn  by  means  of 
the  milled  head  and  rod  provided  for  that  purpose  on  the 
jet.  Should  he  neglect  to  do  so,  the  light  will  decrease 
as  the  surface  of  the  lime  retreats  from  the  flame, 
breaking  up  of  the  lime  is  rendered  more  likely,  and  the 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  99 

flame  is  liable  to  be  deflected  by  the  slanting  surface  of 
the  pit,  and  may  even  strike  the  condenser,  in  which  case 
a  cracked  lens  is  inevitable.  Pitting  is  more  marked  in 
the  case  of  the  mixed  than  the  blow-through  jet. 

There  is  a  class  of  limes — the  "  Mabor  " — moulded 
under  pressure  from  fine  magnesia  powder,  and  these  are 


tigs.  69  and  70.— Pastille 
of  Rare  Earths  in 
on  Limelight  Jet 


Pit.  69 


not  affected  by  atmosphere,  are  far  more  durable  on  the 
jet  than  the  ordinary  limes,  and  cost  but  little  more. 

Pastilles. — Coming  now  to  the  pastilles  which  in 
recent  years  have  to  some  slight  extent  supplanted  limes, 
these  also  are  made  up  in  the  form  of  cylinders,  but  they 
are  not  bored,  as  they  are  supported  by  a  horizontal 
claw  or  clamp,  and  the  jet  flame  plays  upon  the  flat  end 
of  the  pastille  (see  Figs.  69  and  70).  Pastilles  do  not  de- 


ioo         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

teriorate  with  exposure  to  the  atmosphere,  and  do  not 
pit  under  the  action  of  the  flame,  and  thus  may  be  used 
over  and  over  again  up  to  as  many  as  a  dozen  times  or 
even  more  ;  but  they  require  to  be  rubbed  smooth  on 
each  occasion  before  use.  Thus,  although  from  eight  to 
a  dozen  times  the  first  cost  of  a  lime,  they  may  in  the  end 
be  cheaper,  and  they  certainly  save  the  operator  some 
trouble  and  anxiety.  Any  jet  can  be  adapted  to  take  a 
pastille. 

Gas  Cylinders. — Compressed  gases  are  sold  in  steel 
cylinders  that  have  been  carefully  annealed  and  thoroughly 
tested  by  the  gas-compressing  companies.  These  cylin- 
ders can  withstand  an  internal  pressure  of  at  least  3,000 
Ib.  per  sq.  in.,  but  they  are  not  charged  to  a  greater 
pressure  than  slightly  more  than  half  that  (120  atmo- 
spheres). The  customer  may  own  the  cylinders  he  uses  or 
he  may  pay  rent  for  them  in  the  form  of  a  very  slightly 
higher  charge  for  the  gas.  Cylinders  to  be  sent  to  the 
gas-compressing  companies  or  to  their  agents  should  be 
enclosed  in  long,  stoutly-built  wooden  boxes,  or,  instead, 
they  may  have  the  permanent  protection  of  a  closely- 
plaited  hemp  or  coir  cover. 

The  part  of  the  cylinder  that  will  give  most  concern  to 
the  user  is  the  valve,  a  cross  section  through  which  is 
shown  by  Fig.  71.  The  valve  is  screwed  into  the  cylinder, 
the  gas  from  which  leaves  by  the  narrow  passage  A  when 
the  spindle  B  is  slightly  withdrawn  by  turning  its  squared 
portion  c  by  means  of  a  key  ;  the  gas  passes  to  the 
lantern  fittings  through  the  inverted  cone  D.  The  gas- 
tight  joint  with  the  automatic  regulator  or  reducing  valve 
is  made  entirely  by  mechanical  means,  and  all  daubing 
of  the  screw  threads  with  soap,  grease,  red-lead,  etc.,  must 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  101 

be  strictly  avoided  ;  accidents  have  been  caused  in  this 
way.  The  stem  E  of  the  regulator  or  reducing  valve 
is  itself  threaded,  and  has  an  adapter  F  upon  it.  First 
turn  the  adapter  until  it  is  close  to  the  shoulder  G  of  the 
fitting.  Then,  without  any  relative  movement  between 
stem  and  adapter,  screw  the  latter  into  the  cylinder  valve. 
In  this  way  the  cone  on  the  end  of  the  stem  will  go  home 
into  the  inverted  cone  D  of  the  valve.  When  it  can  go 


fit.  72 


Fig.  71. — Section    through   Cylinder    Valve, 
etc. 


Fig.  72.— Combination  Key  and  Wrench 


no  farther,  it  may  be  found  necessary  to  undo  the  fitting 
by,  say,  the  third  of  a  turn,  and  then  screw  the  adapter 
in  as  far  as  it  will  go ;  before  finally  connecting  up 
the  rubber  tubing  from  regulator  to  jet,  place  a  thumb 
over  the  regulator  outlet  and  gently  turn  on  the  gas  to 
test  for  leakage,  which  will  be  betrayed  by  a  slight  hiss. 
The  valve  is  opened  or  closed  by  means  of  a  box 
spanner  with  folding  handle.  The  extra  leverage  when 
the  handle  is  open  is  convenient  when  turning  on  the 
gas,  and  the  reduced  leverage  when  the  handle  is 
folded  prevents  the  valve  being  strained  when  the  gas 


102         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

is  turned  off.  Occasionally  the  valve  itself  needs  tighten- 
ing up,  and  for  this  purpose  a  combination  spanner  of 
the  type  shown  by  Fig.  72  is  useful. 

The  sizes,  weights  and  capacities  of  gas  cylinders  are 
as  follow : — 


Overall 
length  and 
diameter, 

A  pproximate 
weight 
empty,  in  Ibs. 

No.  of  cub.  ft. 
at  atmospheric 
pressure 
compressed  into 

Style  of 
cylinder 

m  i)is. 

cylinder 

14    x   4 

10 

6 

Seamless 

19    x   4 

13 

10 

Seamless 

23    x   4 

15 

12 

Seamless 

27    x   4 

18 

15 

Seamless 

35    x   4 

23 

20 

Seamless 

36   x   5* 

43 

4° 

Seamless 

50    *   5* 

65 

60 

Seamless 

32    x   7_ 

66 

60 

Seamless 

52    x   si 

67 

60 

Lap-welded 

41    x   7 

85 

80 

Seamless 

68    x   5* 

85 

80 

Lap-welded 

49    x   7 

103 

100 

Seamless 

82    x   si 

-103 

100 

Lap-  welded 

Pressure  Regulators. — Certain  fittings  are  neces- 
sary with  these  cylinders.  Gas  at  a  pressure  of  120 
atmospheres  must  not  be  allowed  to  pass  unchecked  to 
the  jet,  it  being  necessary  to  have  some  means  of  re- 
ducing the  pressure.  This  reduction  is  generally  effected 
by  means  of  an  automatic  regulator,  which  may  be 
either  the  Beard  or  duplex  pattern,  the  former  being  in 
more  general  use  and  being  shown  by  Fig.  73.  The  gas 
from  the  cylinder  enters  at  A,  and  fills  the  bellows  c, 
which  rises  against  the  spring  s.  Inside  the  bellows  a 
kind  of  lazy-tongs  arrangement  of  levers  L  is  attached 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  103 

at  D,  so  that  the  greater  the  pressure  in  the  bellows  the 
more  tension  is  put  on  a  cam  at  the  other  end,  which 
presses  the  valve  I  tightly  into  the  neck,  thus  stopping 
any  further  supply  of  gas  from  the  cylinder  entering  the 
bellows  until  the  pressure  is  reduced.  On  opening  the 
jet  taps  the  gas  flows  out  of  the  outlet  P,  which  is  con- 


Fig.  73. — Section  through 
Beard's  Regulator 


Fig.  74. —  Fine  -  adjustment 
Non-eutomaticReguIator 


nected  to  the  jet.  The  spring  s  now  forces  the  gas 
through  the  jet,  and  at  the  same  time,  the  pressure  of  the 
gas  inside  the  bellows  being  reduced,  the  lazy-tongs 
closes  and  moves  the  cam,  which  opens  the  valve  and 
admits  more  gas  into  the  bellows  from  the  cylinder. 
These  operations  proceed  quite  automatically  through- 
out the  exhibition,  and  they  do  not  require  any  attention 
whatever,  the  pressure  of  the  gas  always  remaining 
the  same  until  the  cylinders  are  nearly  empty. 


104         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

A  much  cheaper  attachment  than  the  automatic 
regulator  is  a  simple  nipple,  or,  preferably,  a  fine-adjust- 
ment non-automatic  regulator  (Fig.  74).  Either  of  these 
screws  into  the  cylinder  valve  exactly  in  the  way  already 
described,  and,  in  the  second  device,  the  pressure  is  cut 
down  by  means  of  a  conical  valve  controlled  by  means 
of  the  milled  head  A,  the  gas  passing  to  the  jet  through 
tube  B.  Either  arrangement  may  be  used  for  small 
lantern  shows,  but  is  not  recommended  for  cinematograph 
use.  As  the  gas  pressure  in  the  cylinder  becomes  re- 
duced, the  light  is  affected,  and  further  adjustment  of 
the  cylinder  valve  or  milled  head  required.  There  is  one 
important  point,  too,  that  must  always  be  remembered. 
When  a  simple  nipple  or  non-automatic  regulator  is  used, 
the  adjustment  must  always  take  place  at  the  cylinder 
valve  or  regulator.  No  adjustment  whatever  must  be 
made  at  the  jet  itself,  or  the  rubber  tubing  will  be 
burst  or  blown  off. 

Pressure  Gauges. — It  will  often  be  desirable  to 
know  how  much  gas  a  cylinder  contains.  Therefore,  the 
use  of  a  pressure  gauge  (Fig.  75),  to  be  screwed  into  the 
cylinder  valve,  becomes  necessary.  The  construction  of 
a  typical  gauge  is  shown  by  Fig.  76,  which  illustrates  the 
instrument  with  the  dial  removed.  The  gas  passes 
from  the  cylinder  up  the  stem  of  the  valve  and  through  B 
into  the  elliptical  spring  tube  A,  which  the  pressure  tends 
to  straighten,  and  in  so  doing  operates  through  c  the 
quadrant  D,  which  engages  with  the  spindle  of  the  index 
ringer  (shown  dotted).  In  the  stem  is  a  check  valve  F, 
which  prevents  any  sudden  rush  of  gas  injuring  the 
elliptical  tube. 

A  very  convenient  form  of  gauge  is  one  combined 


PROJECTION   ILLUMINANTS  105 

with  an  automatic  regulator,  or  even  with  a  fine- 
adjustment  valve,  the  connections  for  which  are  shown 
in  Fig.  77.  It  tells  the  operator  in  a  moment,  and  while 
the  show  is  in  progress,  how  much  gas  he  has  left. 


Fig.  77.— T- 
connection 
for  Gauge 
and  Regu- 
lator 


Fig.  76.— 
Mechanism 
of  Gauge 


To  read  the  pressure  gauge,  and  so  be  able  to  ascertain 
the  amount  of  gas  in  a  cylinder,  it  should  be  noted  that 
the  pointer  will  stand  at  a  pressure  of  120  atmospheres 
when  the  cylinder  is  full,  and  at  90,  60,  and  30  when 
three-quarters,  one-half,  and  one-quarter  full  respectively, 
thus : — 


106         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 


Atmo- 

Size of  Cylinders  in  cubic  feet. 

spheres. 

6 

12 

20 

40 

120 

6 

12 

2O 

40 

90 

4i 

9 

15 

3« 

60 

3 

6 

10 

20 

30 

ii 

3 

5 

IO 

15 

i 

ii 

a| 

5 

5 

4 

If 

The  gas  may  be  run  out  to  the  third  of  an  atmosphere 
(between  4  Ib.  and  5  Ib.  per  sq.  in.),  this  being  the  lowest 
pressure  at  which  a  regulator  will  work  without  causing 
anxiety. 

Distinguishing  between  Oxygen  and  Hydrogen 
Fittings. — Certain  mixtures  of  oxygen  and  hydrogen 
(or  coal-gas)  are  explosive,  and  it  is,  therefore,  very 
important  to  guard  against  any  accidental  mixture  of 
the  two  gases.  For  this  reason,  cylinders,  regulators  and 
gauges  for  use  with  oxygen  are  painted  black,  whereas 
those  for  hydrogen  are  painted  red.  Further,  to  render 
the  indiscriminate  use  of  the  fittings,  etc.  impossible, 
those  for  oxygen  have  right-hand  screw  threads,  and 
those  for  hydrogen  left-hand  threads. 

Low-pressure  Hydrogen. — Whilst  in  all  forms  of 
limelight  the  oxygen  must  be  supplied  under  pressure, 
the  hydrogen  can  be  used  at  the  low  pressure  at  which 
it  issues  from  the  ordinary  domestic  gas  fittings.  (Of 
course,  pure  hydrogen  is  not  coal-gas,  but  for  projection 
purposes  coal-gas  is  nearly  always  meant  when  the  term 
hydrogen  is  used,  and  even  when  hydrogen  is  ordered 
from  the  gas-compressing  companies,  coal-gas  is  usually 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  107 

supplied.)  When  gas  at  ordinary  pressures  is  used,  the 
jet  should  be  of  the  blow-through  or  injector  type,  as 
described  later. 

Oxygen  Generators. — A  word  or  two  must  be  said 
with  regard  to  other  sources  of  oxygen,  as  a  showman 
may  be  obliged  at  times  to  generate  the  gas  on  the  spot. 
The  old  method  was  to  heat  a  mixture  of  4  parts  by 
weight  of  potassium  chlorate  and  I  part  of  black  oxide  of 
manganese  in  an  iron  or  copper  retort,  and  to  pass  the 
gas  which  came  off  the  heated  mixture  through  a  wash- 
bottle,  which  cooled  and  purified  it.  It  then  passed  to 
a  gas  bag,  which,  when  the  show  was  in  progress,  was 
loaded  with  weights  to  produce  the  necessary  pressure. 
A  mixture  of  4  Ib.  of  chlorate  and  I  Ib.  of  oxide  yields 
about  20  cub.  ft.  of  gas.  The  more  modern  method  is 
to  use  cakes  of  the  chlorate  and  oxide  already  prepared 
in  the  correct  proportions,  two  cakes  yielding  enough 
oxygen  for  a  one-hour  cinematograph  show.  One  of  the 
newest  generators  for  use  with  such  cakes  is  Kamm's ; 
it  is  well  made  and  comprises  a  retort  heated  by  a 
methylated-spirit  lamp  or  blow-lamp  and  a  gas-container, 
in  which  the  pressure  is  produced,  not  by  weights,  but  by 
the  action  of  adjustable  springs.  As  the  generated  gas 
passes  into  the  container,  the  latter  rises  and  tilts  the  steel 
lever  back ;  then,  as  the  gas  is  used  and  the  container 
begins  to  descend,  a  spring  pulls  the  steel  lever  forward, 
this  bringing  the  retort  forward  with  it  and  exposing 
more  of  the  cake  to  the  action  of  the  heat,  so  that  before 
the  gas  stored  in  the  container  is  wholly  consumed  there 
is  a  new  supply  coming  from  the  retort. 

Oxygen  cakes  for  use  in  retorts  are  made  by  mixing 
the  potassium  chlorate  and  the  manganese  oxide  in  the 


io8         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH   BOOK 

proportions  already  stated,  slightly  damping,  pressing 
into  a  mould  and  turning  out,  and  leaving  in  a  warm 
place  till  dry. 

Generating  Oxygen  from  Oxylith,  Etc. — Oxygen 
may  be  produced  in  such  quantities  as  the  lanternist 
requires  by  using  one  of  the  special  substances  such 
as  oxygenite  or  oxylith  (prepared  from  sodium  peroxide) 
which  yield  oxygen  when  in  contact  with  water. 

Limelight  Jets. — Oxy-hydrogen  limelight  jets  are  of 
at  least  three  main  types  :  (i)  the  blow-through  jet, 


Hydrogen 

Fig.  79.  —  Nipple  of  Fig.  78.— Simple  Blow-through  Jet 

Blow-through  Jet 

suitable  for  use  with  hydrogen  issuing  at  low  pressure 
from  the  ordinary  gas  fitting  and  for  oxygen  from  a  cylin- 
der ;  (2)  the  mixed  jet  for  use  when  both  gases  are  under 
pressure  ;  and  (3)  the  injector  (or  ejector)  jet  for  use  under 
the  same  conditions  as  No.  i,  but  giving  a  more  powerful 
light  than  the  blow-through  jet. 

A  simple  blow-through  jet  is  illustrated  by  Fig.  78, 
H  and  o  indicating  the  hydrogen  and  oxygen  nozzles, 
c  the  lime,  and  D  the  rod  by  means  of  which  the  lime  is 
rotated.  Such  a  jet  is  useful  for  general  lantern  work 
or  for  cinematograph  projection  at  close  quarters  or  for  a 
small  picture.  The  detail  of  the  nipple  given  in  Fig.  79 
will  suggest  that  the  jet  of  oxygen  is,  as  it  were,  thrust 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS 


109 


through  the  hydrogen  flame,  there  being  no  mixture  of 
the  gases  within  the  jet  itself.  This  is  the  safest  of  all 
oxy-hydrogen  jets,  but  also  the  feeblest. 

The  injector  or  ejector  jet  provides  a  means  by  which 
the  passage  of  the  oxygen  under  pressure  induces  an 
increased  flow  of  hydrogen,  and  the  two  gases  mix  within 
the  jet  on  their  way  to  the  nipple. 
A  section  through  a  good  jet  of 
the  injector  type  (Fig.  80)  will 
serve  to  explain  the  principle. 
Oxygen  passes  through  the  cham- 
ber A  under  pressure,  and  issues 
as  a  fine  stream  through  the  nozzle 
B.  The  low-pressure  hydrogen, 
supplied  through  barrel  c,  fills 
the  chamber  D,  and  is  induced 
to  leave  it  by  the  stream  of  oxy- 
gen flowing  from  the  nozzle  B. 
The  two  gases  mix  in  chamber  E 
and  then  pass  through  the  holes 
F  F'  into  G,  and  thence  through  v 
to  the  nipple  H.  There  are 
various  forms  of  this  jet,  but 
that  illustrated  will  give  a  fair 
idea  of  the  working  principle.  It  should  be  said  that 
occasionally  the  term  "  ejector  "  is  applied  to  a  blow- 
through  jet  in  which  the  hydrogen  tube  is  extended  past 
the  oxygen  nipple — much  in  the  way  shown  by  Fig.  79 — 
thus  causing  a  slight  mixing  of  the  gases  before  combustion. 

The  simplest  type  of  mixed  jet  is  that  shown  by  Fig.  81, 
H  and  o  indicating  hydrogen  and  oxygen  nozzles.  The 
gases,  both  under  pressure,  mingle  in  the  mixing  chamber 


Fig.  80. — Section  through 
Injector  Jet 


no         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

B  and  thence  pass  to  the  jet.  The  mixing  chamber  may 
be  packed  with  metal  gauze  to  assist  the  mixing  action. 
Mixed  jets  are  obtainable  fitted  with  a  great  variety  of 
devices  to  facilitate  the  turning  of  the  lime  ;  centring 
of  the  light,  both  horizontally  and  vertically  ;  altering 
the  distance  between  light  and  condenser  and  between 
lime  and  nipple  ;  obtaining  fine  adjustment  of  the  pro- 
portions of  the  two  gases  ;  providing  a  by-pass,  etc. 
It  is  possible  in  some  high-class  jets  to  cut  off  the  gases 
at  the  jet  itself,  except  for  a  small  by-pass  flame,  and  at 
a  subsequent  time  to  restore,  simply  by  turning  two 

handles,  the  full  light 
with  exactly  the  ori- 
ginal proportions  of 
the  two  gases. 
Dealers'  catalogues 
show  a  variety  of 
Fig.  81.-SimPle  Mixed  Jet  *  '  patterns  of  limelight 

jets. 

A  jet  is  supported  in  the  lantern  body  on  a  stout 
upright  steel  pin  standing  in  a  tray,  or  on  a  plate,  which 
slides  into  the  body,  and  the  jet  is  clamped  at  the  re- 
quired height  by  means  of  the  set-screw  shown  in  the 
various  illustrations  already  given.  Some  trays  have 
mechanical  movements  to  assist  in  centring  the  light. 
For  example,  in  Beard's  "Biojector"  jet,  equally  suit- 
able for  high-pressure  or  low-pressure  hydrogen,  there  is 
a  variety  of  movements :  i  indicates  the  hydrogen  valve 
(to  which  the  compressed  hydrogen  or  the  house  gas 
is  supplied)  ;  2,  oxygen  valve,  used  when  the  hydrogen 
is  under  pressure;  3,  oxygen  valve,  used  when  gas  is 
taken  from  the  house  system  ;  4,  cut-off  lever ;  5,  cut-off 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  in 

hydrogen  bye-pass  adjusting  screw ;  6,  elevating  milled 
head ;  7,  lateral  milled  head  (hidden  in  illustration) ; 
8,  lime-turning  milled  head ;  9,  lime  adjustment  to  and 
from  nipple;  10,  tray  to  catch  broken  lime;  n,  iron 
base. 

Fitting    up    for    Limelight.— First    stand  the  gas- 


\ 


Pig.  82. — Beard's  "Biojector"  Combination  Mixed  and  Injector  Jet 


cylinders  on  end,  and  tie  them  to  a  support  to  prevent 
their  falling.  Do  not,  however,  attach  them  to  the  cine- 
matograph stand.  Open  the  valves  with  the  key  for  an 
instant,  so  that  any  dust  may  be  blown  out.  Screw  the 
automatic  regulators  into  the  cylinders,  as  already 
explained.  Connect  the  regulator  outlets  by  stout 
rubber  tubing  to  the  jets — usually  hydrogen  or  coal-gas 
to  the  left  and  oxygen  to  the  right-hand  tubes.  Both 
taps  of  the  jets  should  be  shut  off. 


H2         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

Managing  a  Limelight  Jet. — Select  a  good  lime,  and 
bore  out  the  hole  so  that  it  may  fit  the  pin  freely.  Open 
the  valves  of  the  cylinders,  so  that  the  bellows  in  the 
regulators  may  become  distended.  Now  turn  the  hy- 
drogen tap  of  the  jet,  and  allow  a  little  to  escape  before 
lighting  up.  Then  turn  on  a  little  oxygen,  just  sufficient 
to  cause  a  blue  flame.  Let  it  burn  thus  for  a  few  minutes, 
so  that  the  condenser  may  be  warmed,  and  also  to  prevent 
any  black  spot  on  the  lime.  Then  turn  on  a  little  more 
hydrogen  and  allow  the  lime  to  get  thoroughly  hot.  Now 
gently  turn  on  oxygen  until  the  lime  is  incandescent,  but 
not  enough  to  cause  a  hissing  sound.  Turn  on  more 
hydrogen,  then  more  oxygen,  little  by  little,  until  a  good 
light  is  obtained  and  the  flame  is  silent. 

Hissing  in  a  good  jet  is  caused  by  excess  of  one  gae — 
generally  oxygen — and  is  to  be  avoided,  because  in  itself 
it  indicates  inefficiency  and  because  it  is  liable  to  alarm 
nervous  people  in  the  audience.  Neglect  to  turn  the 
lime  may  also  give  rise  to  a  hissing  noise. 

The  distance  of  the  lime  from  the  nipple  or  orifice 
depends  on  the  kind  of  jet.  In  blow-through  jets  it  will 
be  about  f  in.,  and  in  mixed  and  ejector  jets  about  J  in. 
A  black  spot  on  the  lime  shows  that  it  is  too  near  the  jet. 
Begin  with  the  lime  well  down,  so  that  should  a  split  occur 
it  may  still  leave  enough  of  the  lime  to  work  with,  and 
turn  it  slightly  from  time  to  time,  to  avoid  pitting,  and 
also  to  prevent  the  flame  being  deflected  upon  and  so 
cracking  the  condenser. 

Having  worked  up  a  good  light,  insert  a  slide  and 
roughly  focus  by  means  of  the  draw  tubes,  the  objective 
or  focusing  tube  having  been  racked  exactly  half-way 
out.  Then  withdraw  the  slide,  and  push  in  the  jet  or 


PROJECTOR    MECHANISM.    SHOWING    WORM-DRIVE 
AND    SPUR    WHEELS 

(New  Bioscope  "Dreadnought"  type) 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  113 

withdraw  it  from  the  condenser,  raise  it  or  lower  it,  or 
swing  it  slightly  to  one  side  as  may  be  necessary,  until 
there  is  an  even  field  of  light ;  if  the  jet  is  not  central, 
there  will  be  coloration  or  a  shadow  somewhere  on  the 
screen  and  the  jet  should  be  moved  in  the  opposite 
direction  to  the  defect  until  this  is  removed  (see  Figs.  83 
to  88).  Three  minutes'  experimenting  should  teach  all 


Fig.  86  Fig.  87  Fig.  88 

Figs.  83  to  88. — Centring  of  Illuminant  in  Lantern  or  Cinematograph 

Projector 

that  it  is  necessary  to  know  in  this  matter.  Then  insert 
a  slide  and  finely  adjust  the  focus  by  means  of  the  milled 
head  on  the  lens.  During  the  show,  remember  to  turn 
the  lime  occasionally. 

Always,  when  turning  off  the  light,  cut  off  the  oxygen 
first,  as  otherwise  there  may  be  a  slight  pop  in  the 
hydrogen  tube  of  a  mixed  or  injector  jet. 

It  is  wise  to  retain  the  key  on  the  cylinder  valve 
stem,  so  that  in  the  case  of  a  burst  rubber  tube  or  other 
similar  accident  the  gas  can  be  cut  off  immediately.  An 


ii4         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

annoying  accident  is  the  bursting  off  of  the  string  that 
binds  the  flexible  bellows  of  the  automatic  regulator. 
Unscrew  the  brass  cover  and  overhaul  the  binding  occa- 
sionally. Should  the  accident  happen  during  a  show, 
turn  off  the  oxygen  immediately,  and  either  re-tie  the 
bellows  with  fine  string  or  replace  the  regulator  with 
an  ordinary  nipple  or  fine  adjustment  valve. 

The  Saturator  or  Carburettor. — This  is  a  device 
which  may  commend  itself  to  the  operator  when  a  supply 
of  hydrogen  in  the  gaseous  state  is  unavailable.  It  takes 
a  number  of  different  forms,  but  in  all  of  them  the  prin- 
ciple is  that  a  stream  of  oxygen  is  forced  through  ether, 
petrol,  alcohol,  etc.,  vaporising  the  volatile  liquid  and 
passing  onwards  to  the  jet  in  the  state  of  a  combustible 
gas.  There  are  great  prejudices  against  the  use  of  the 
ether  saturator,  and,  indeed,  in  the  London  area  its  em- 
ployment in  a  licensed  building  is  not  allowed  ("  ether 
and  other  inflammable  liquids  shall  not  be  employed  under 
any  circumstances  for  producing  light  " — L.C.C.  Regu- 
lations ;  6th  April,  1909),  but  there  is  a  number  of  types 
which  the  manufacturers  guarantee  to  be  safe  and  re- 
liable, and  among  these  special  mention  may  be  made  of 
the  pendent  saturator  (Fig.  89),  which  is  hung  up  at  a  dis- 
tance from  the  jet,  and  is  thus  kept  cool,  the  connec- 
tions to  the  jet  nozzles  being  from  the  outlets  A  and  c. 
Methylated  ether  of  about  .717  sp.  gr.  is  poured  in  through 
the  opening  shown  closed  by  plug  D  until  it  overflows 
at  E,  which  plug  must  previously  have  been  removed. 
(F  is  another  overflow  plug,  and  through  it  the  saturator  is 
occasionally  pumped  out  to  keep  it  in  good  condition.) 
r>  and  E  are  next  screwed  in  tightly,  and  the  oxygen 
cylinder  connected  to  nozzle  B,  while  the  outlet  noz-zle  A  is 


PROJECTION    ILLUMINANTS  115 

connected  to  the  oxygen  side  of  the  jet,  and  c  to  the  hy- 
drogen side.  Then  proceed  as  with  the  ordinary  oxy- 
hydrogen  light,  noting  that  the  valves  on  the  saturator 
should  be  wide  open  and  adjustments  made  at  the  jet. 
Saturators  are  liable  to  "  pop  "  when  near  exhaustion. 
Should  such  a  tendency  be  noted  after  turning  off  the 
oxygen  tap  of  the  jet  at  the  end  of 
a  show  (it  is  indicated  by  the  light 
continuing  at  the  jet  nipple),  imme- 
diately turn  on  the  oxygen  tap 
again  fairly  full,  and  then  turn  off 
the  hydrogen  tap  and  wait  for  the 
lime  to  lose  its  red  heat.  Then 
turn  off  the  oxygen  tap. 

Mixed  jets  used  with  oxy-ether 
gas  must  have  the  mixing  chamber 
packed  with  metal  gauze. 

When  methylated  ether  (sp.  gr., 
.717)  cannot  be  obtained,  the  makers 
of  the  pendent  saturator  say  that 
gasolene  may  be  used  instead,  but 
that  on  no  account  is  the  use  of 
petrol,  benzoline,  or  methylated 
spirit  allowable.  This  is  puzzling  instruction,  inasmuch 
as  in  Great  Britain  the  terms  gasolene,  petrol  and  benzo- 
line are  almost  synonymous.  The  safest  course,  we  think, 
is  to  use  the  methylated  ether — or  nothing. 

There  are  many  ethers,  but  the  ordinary  ether  or 
ethyl  oxide  (C2H5)2O  is  prepared  by  heating  alcohol  with 
strong  sulphuric  acid.  After  drying  over  lime  this  forms 
a  pure  ether  suitable  for  medicinal  purposes.  Methylated 
ether  is  made  in  an  exactly  similar  manner,  but  from 


Fig.  8V. — Pendent  Satu- 
rator  —  the       Safest 

Saturator 


n6         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

methylated  spirit  instead  of  the  pure  alcohol,  hence  it 
contains  some  of  the  impurities  of  the  spirit  from  which 
it  is  prepared.  Gasolene  is  the  lightest  portion  of  the 
petroleum  distillate,  boiling  at  a  very  low  temperature 
and  evaporating  entirely  on  exposure  to  air.  Petrol  or 
petroleum  spirit,  benzoline,  and  benzine  were  one  and  the 
same.  They  evaporate  easily,  but  not  so  quickly  as 
gasolene.  Petrol  is  now  heavier  than  it  used  to  be,  the 
proportion  of  the  original  petroleum  distilled  into  it 
being  much  greater  since  the  enormous  increase  in 
price.  Petrol  would  leave  much  residue,  while  methy- 
lated spirit  would,  probably,  not  burn  in  an  ether 
saturator.  Benzine  or  light  coal-tar  naphtha  would  suit, 
only  that  it  might  cause  a  deposit  of  carbon  in  the  jet. 
Oxy  -  acetylene  Limelight.  —  The  combustion  of 
acetylene  with  oxygen,  under  pressure,  as  in  the  blow- 
pipe or  limelight  jet,  produces  a  temperature  in  the  hottest 
part  of  the  flame — the  extreme  end  of  the  white  part — 
of  about  4,000°  C.,  this  being,  probably,  twice  that 
reached  in  the  oxy-hydrogen  or  oxy-coal-gas  flame. 
As  the  melting  point  of  lime  is  approximately  3,000°  C., 
the  use  of  this  substance  is  out  of  the  question,  and  it 
becomes  necessary  to  employ  a  "  pastille  "  of  the  rare 
earths  already  mentioned  (see  p.  99).  Both  the  acety- 
lene and  the  oxygen  must  be  under  pressure,  and  about 
equal  quantities  of  each  are  used  ;  these  may  be  produced 
by  generators  or  taken  from  cylinders.  In  a  special  oxy- 
acetylene  plant  on  the  market,  the  oxygen  is  generated 
with  oxygenite  powder  (one  of  the  sodium  peroxide  pre- 
parations) and  the  acetylene  is  produced  by  a  generator. 
One  charge  (30  oz.  of  oxygenite)  is  sufficient  for  90  minutes' 
light,  at  the  rate  of  6  cub.  ft,  of  oxygen  per  hour. 


CHAPTER   X 
The  Projection  Arc  Lamp  and  its  Management 

Electric  Current. — In  buildings  where  electricity  is 
laid  on,  a  supply  of  current  can  be  obtained  from  the 
company's  mains  by  connecting  two  cables  of  suitable 
carrying  capacity.  Current  is  either  "  alternating  "  or 
"  continuous."  The  electrical  pressure  or  the  E.M.F.  is 
measured  in  "  volts,"  and  stands  in  a  similar  relation  to 
electricity  as  the  hydraulic  force  or  pressure  does  when 
applied  to  water. 

Electric  current,  that  is,  quantity  flowing,  is  measured 
in  "  amperes."  Electrical  power,  or  the  amount  of 
electricity  used,  is  measured  in  "  watts."  The  watts  are 
equal  to  the  volts  multiplied  by  the  amperes,  thus  :  100 
volts  x  10  amperes  =  1,000  watts,  or  i  kilowatt. 

A  Board  of  Trade  Unit  (B.T.U.)  is  1,000  watts  for  one 
hour,  that  is,  I  kilowatt-hour,  and  is  the  commercial  unit 
for  purposes  of  public  supply. 

Continuous  current  is  the  most  suitable  for  projection 
purposes,  as  it  gives  a  steady  and  silent  arc,  which  is  due 
to  the  current  continually  flowing  in  one  direction,  from 
positive  to  negative.  The  positive  or  top  carbon  in  the 
arc  lamp  assumes  a  crater-like  form,  which  is  easily 
maintained,  thereby  giving  a  beautiful  and  brilliant  light. 
Low-pressure  supplies  are  usually  100  or  no  volts,  occa- 
sionally 105  or  115  ;  and  high- pressure  supplies  are  200, 
220,  250,  400,  and  480  volts. 
117 


u8         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

Alternating  current  is  usually  considered  not  very 
satisfactory  for  projection  purposes,  although  it  is  some- 
times used.  The  current  is  continually  changing  from 
one  direction  to  another,  so  that  it  is  impossible  to  say 
which  carbon  of  the  arc  lamp  is  positive  and  which  nega- 
tive. These  changes,  or  oscillations,  vary  from  40  to  120 
per  second,  are  termed  cycles,  alternaces,  or  periods,  and 
are  written  thus  (\t.  When  alternating  current  is  used, 
the  feeding  of  the  carbons  requires  constant  care  and 
watchfulness ;  otherwise  the  light  will  soon  dim  down 


Fif.  90.— Wiring  of  Simple  Circuit  (Resistance  and  Lamp) ; 
Continuous  Current 

and  go  out.  Besides  the  difficulty  of  keeping  the  light 
bright  and  steady,  there  is  a  continual  buzzing  sound 
proceeding  from  the  arc.  Low-pressure  alternating 
supplies  are  usually  105,  no,  and  120  volts ;  high- 
pressure  210,  220,  and  440  volts. 

Electrical  Connections. — Arc  lamps  with  an  auto- 
matic feed  are  not  so  reliable  for  projection  purposes  as 
the  hand-feed  or  Davenport  lamp.  The  latter  requires 
from  45  to  50  volts  for  its  efficient  working.  As  the 
supplies  of  electricity  are  from  100  volts  upwards,  it 
is  clear  that  some  sort  of  apparatus  is  required  to  choke 
down,  reduce,  or  regulate  the  extra  voltage — to  put  the 


THE   PROJECTION    ARC    LAMP         119 

brake  on,  in  a  sense.  With  continuous  current  this  is 
done  by  using  a  rheostat  or  resistance,  which  is  composed 
of  a  number  of  coils  of  german-silver  or  other  wire 
attached  to  a  frame  and  arranged  in  such  a  manner  that, 
by  shifting  the  regulating  key,  the  current  is  caused  to 
pass  through  a  greater  or  lesser  number  of  the  coils. 
In  connecting  the  cables  from  the  mains,  the  positive 


MOPS 


SB 


Fig.  91. — Wiring  of  Circuit  including  Switchboard  ;  Continuous  Current 

wire  or  lead  should  be  taken  first  to  the  resistance  and 
then  to  the  arc  lamp.  From  the  other  terminal  of  the 
lamp,  the  negative  wire  or  lead  goes  straight  to  the  main, 
as  in  Fig.  90.  Other  apparatus  may  be  included  in  the 
circuit  for  greater  economy,  safety,  and  convenience,  and 
these  will  be  described  later  (see  Figs.  91  and  92).  With 
alternating  current,  a  transformer  and  a  choking  coil  are 
used  in  place  of  an  ordinary  resistance  (see  Fig.  92). 

In  the  illustrations  above-mentioned,  A  is  the  ammeter, 
F  the  fuses,  DPS  the  double-pole  switch,  E  s  the  electric 


120         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

supply  from  mains,  M  the  meter,  M  D  P  s  the  main  double- 
pole  switch,  M  F  the  main  fuses,  P  the  plug,  with  flexible 
cable  to  arc  lamp,  R  R  the  resistance  regulator,  x  s  the 
tumbler  switch  to  voltmeter,  v  the  voltmeter,  T  R  the 
transformer,  P  c  the  primary  coil  (210  volts),  s  c  the 
secondary  coil  (105  volts),  T  F  the  twin  flex,  P  L  the  pilot 
light,  s  B  the  switchboard,  A  c  the  arc  lamp,  c  c  the  choking 
coil,  and  M  R  the  motor  regulator. 

Fig.  93  also  makes  clear  the  connections  for  a  simple 


Fig.  92.— Wiring    of   Circuit 

including  Transformer.Chok- 
ing  Coil,  etc. ;  Alternating 
Current 


circuit,  M  being  the  main  leads,  v  the  voltmeter,  R  the 
resistance,  A  the  ammeter,  and  L  the  arc  lamp.  The  volt- 
meter is  in  "  parallel,"-  while  the  ammeter  and  resistance 
are  in  "  series." 

Fig.  94  shows  a  model  lay-out  or  wiring  diagram  for 
a  two-machine  plant,  as  actually  installed  by  the  Wal- 
turdaw  Company  in  a  number  of  electric  theatres.  A 
three-wire  service  from  the  public  main  is  indicated, 
and  there  is  a  motor-generator  to  deal  with  an  alter- 
nating-current supply.  The  change-over  switch  puts 
400  volts  on  to  the  motor  side  of  the  motor-  generator. 


THE    PROJECTION   ARC   LAMP         121 

or  it  puts  200  volts  only  through  a  resistance  across 
the  lantern  arc.  There  is  a  throw-over  switch  to  put 
distributor  pressure  on  the  motor  or  on  the  primary 
of  a  static  transformer ;  another  throw-over  switch  takes 
current  for  the  lantern  from  the  generator  or  from  the 
secondary  of  the  transformer. 

Resistance  to  the  Electric  Current. — All  sub- 
stances offer  some  resistance  to  the  passage  of  a  current 
of  electricity,  although  some — notably  the  precious  metals, 
copper,  aluminium,  etc. — allow  it  to  pass  more  readily 


Fit.  93.— Wiring  of  Simple  Circuit  with  Voltmeter  in  Parallel 
and  Ammeter  in  Series;  Continuous  Current 

than  others.  Early  in  the.  nineteenth  century  Ohm,  the 
scientist,  discovered  that  the  strength  of  a  current  of 
electricity  through  any  circuit  varies  directly  as  the 
pressure  of  the  E.M.F.,  and  inversely  as  the  resistance. 
This  has  since  been  known  as  Ohm's  Law  of  Resistance. 
In  other  words,  the  current  yielded  by  any  cell,  battery, 
dynamo,  or  other  generator  varies  directly  as  the  differ- 
ence of  potential  between  the  poles,  and  inversely  as  the 
resistance  through  which  the  current  has  to  pass.  This 

fact  is  expressed  by  the  now  well-known  formula  C=  ~, 

c  being  current  in  amperes,  E  pressure  in  volts,  and  R 
resistance  in  ohms. 


122         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

The  unit  of  measurement  is  called  an  "  ohm."  For 
instance,  the  resistance  of  a  mile  of  No.  20  gauge  copper 
wire  is  practically  41 1  ohms,  or  2.3579  ohms  per  100  yards. 

The  resistance  of  a  uniform  wire  varies  :  (i)  Directly 
as  its  length,  or  proportional  to  its  length  (the  longer  the 
wire  the  greater  the  resistance)  ;  (2)  Inversely  as  its 
sectional  area,  or  inversely  proportional  to  its  cross  section 
(the  thicker  the  wire  the  less  the  resistance)  ;  (3)  Directly 
as  the  specific  resistance  of  the  material  of  which  it  is 
made. 

As  a  general  rule,  the  resistance  of  materials  in- 
creases with  an  increase  of  temperature  ;  the  rate  of 
increase  is  not  in  direct  proportion,  and  varies  with 
different  kinds  of  materials.  Thus  annealed  copper 
alters  0.388  per  cent.,  and  iron  about  9.5  per  cent,  per 
degree  centigrade  at  about  20°  C.  Carbon  is  an  ex- 
ception ;  its  resistance  decreases  with  an  increase  of 
temperature. 

To  overcome  the  resistance  to  the  flow  of  current 
along  a  conductor  energy  must  be  expended  ;  this  energy 
is  usually  wasted,  and  appears  as  heat  at  the  surface  of 
the  conductor.  The  amount  of  current  flowing  is  not 
diminished,  but  a  loss  of  pressure  results. 

Ohm's  law  enables  this  loss  of  voltage  to  be  calculated 
if  the  resistance  of  the  conductor  and  the  value  of  the 
current  in  amperes  are  known.  Thus  the  volts  lost  are 
equal  to  the  amperes  multiplied  by  the  resistance  ex- 
pressed in  ohms.  For  example,  a  current  of  20  amperes 
is  made  to  flow  through  a  wire  which  has  a  resistance 
of  4  ohms,  and  the  voltage  required  to  send  the  current 
against  the  resistance  will  be  20  x  4  =  80,  the  voltage 
required.  This  pressure  of  80  volts  will  be  lost  in  the 


THE    PROJECTION    ARC    LAMP        123 

wire,  and  if  the  current  is  to  do  work  after  passing  through 
the  conductor,  additional  voltage  will  be  necessary. 


Pit.  94. —Wiring  of 
Elaborate  Circuit  for 
Two  Machines ;  Three- 
wire  Service,  Alter- 
nating Current 


If  only  10  amperes  are  to  flow  through  the  circuit, 
then  the  voltage  lost  will  be  10  x  4  =  40  volts  lost  in 
the  conductor  ;  then  a  total  of  40  4-  50  =  90  volts  only 


of    which    the    flow    of 


124         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

would  be  required  to  work  the  projector.  Thus  the 
voltage  lost  in  a  given  wire  will  vary  according  to  the 
current  flowing  along  that  wire. 

Ammeters  and  Voltmeters.  —  The  ammeter,  amp- 
meter,  or  ampere-meter  is  an  instrument  by  means 
an  electric  current  can  be 
measured.  It  is  constructed 
in  the  simplest  form  possi- 
ble in  order  that  it  should 
not  be  affected  by  any  heat- 
ing of  the  coils  which  mea- 
sure the  current  during  the 
passage  of  electricity.  An 
electro-magnet  is  placed  so 
that  its  magnetism  increases 
proportionally  to  the  amount 
of  current  passing,  the  result 
being  shown  by  means  of  a 
needle  working  over  a  dial 
which  carries  a  graduated 
scale  in  amperes.  Some 
kinds  are  made  for  use  with 
"  continuous  "  current  only, 
while  others  may  be  used 
with  either  "  alternating  " 

or  "  continuous  "  currents.  It  should  be  remembered 
that  ammeters  are  always  placed  in  series  with  the  other 
main  appliances  in  the  circuit,  as  shown  in  Figs.  91 
to  93. 

The  voltmeter  or  voltameter  is  an  instrument  by 
means  of  which  the  intensity  of  the  pressure  is  measured. 
Its  construction  is  similar  to  that  of  the  ammeter,  but  the 


Fig.  95. — Usual  Type  of  Resist- 
ance or  Rheostat 


THE    PROJECTION   ARC   LAMP        125 

windings  of  the  electro-magnet  are  of  finer  wire,  and 
consequently  of  a  higher  resistance.  Hence  the  voltmeter 
takes  very  little  current.  It  should  be  remembered  that 
a  voltmeter  is  always  placed  in  parallel  with  the  other 
main  appliances  in  the  circuit,  as  in  Figs.  91  to  93. 


i 


FUSE 


N°l  MXCHiNE         N°2MACHI«E         RESISTANCE 


Fig.  96. — Switchboard,  showing  Instruments  and  Switches 

Determining  Positive  and  Negative  Poles.— It  has 
been  shown  that  the  positive  lead  should  be  connected  to 
the  upper  carbon  of  the  lamp.  When  there  is  doubt 
as  to  which  wire  or  lead  is  the  positive  and  which  the 
negative,  simply  place  the  two  ends  in  a  glass  of  water, 
switch  on  the  current,  and  notice  which  cable  gives  off 


126         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

bubbles  of  gas.  That  is  the  negative.  Then  connect  up 
accordingly. 

The  positive  terminal  of  a  dynamo,  battery,  or  other 
electrical  apparatus,  the  polarity  of  the  terminal  of  which 
it  is  essential  to  know,  is  usually  marked  with  plus  sign, 
thus  +,  or  it  is  painted  red.  In  the  case  of  large  secondary 
batteries  (accumulators)  the  positive  terminal  is  in- 
variably painted  red,  and  the  negative  black.  Cables 
may  also  be  obtained  of  these  distinctive  colours. 

Use  of  the  Resistance  or  Rheostat. — In  working  a 
projector  it  is  necessary  to  absorb  the  excess  voltage  by 
means  of  a  resistance  or  rheostat  placed  in  the  circuit, 
and  through  which  the  current  must  pass  at  the  pressure 
required  before  reaching  the  lamp  in  which  it  is  utilised. 
Thus,  if  the  current  varies,  the  resistance  must  be  altered 
accordingly,  or  the  number  of  volts  will  not  be  a  constant 
quantity.  It  is,  therefore,  not  correct  to  say  that  a 
certain  resistance  will  absorb  so  many  volts  unless  the 
number  of  amperes  which  will  be  made  to  flow  through 
it  is  also  determined.  An  ordinary  form  of  resistance 
is  illustrated  by  Fig.  95,  while  a  typical  switchboard  is 
shown  by  Fig.  96. 

The  amount  of  energy  lost,  expressed  in  watts,  in 
sending  a  current  through  a  resistance  can  be  calculated 
by  the  following  formula  :  the  current  multiplied  by 
itself  and  multiplied  by  the  resistance.  Taking  the 
previous  examples,  in  the  first  case  the  wasted  energy  is 
20  x  20  x  4  =  i, 600  lost  watts.  In  the  second  case, 
10  x  10  x  4  =  400  lost  watts. 

The  resistance  is  placed  in  the  circuit  chiefly  for  reg- 
ulating the  flow  of  current  required  for  the  arc  lamp. 
It  is,  therefore,  clear  that  the  amount  or  flow  of  current 


THE    PROJECTION    ARC    LAMP         127 

will  be  increased  proportionately  as  resistance  is  switched 
out  of  circuit,  and  decreased  as  resistance  is  switched  into 
operation.  Resistances  are  constructed  to  suit  either 
low  or  high  voltages. 

A  combination  resistance  which  will  cut  out  250 
volts  is,  perhaps,  the  most  convenient,  as  it  takes  up 
very  little  more  space  than  one  which  might  be  found 
on  occasion  to  be  too  small.  A  combination  resistance 
is  so  arranged  that  only  half  the  coils  are  in  use  when  on 
low  voltage,  whereas  all  the  coils  are  available  when  on 


« 12  ohms 


Fig.  97. — Resistances  Connected  in  Series 


-12*4- 


Fig.  98. — Resistances  Connected  in  Parallel 

-4  + 
Fig.  99.— Resistances  Connected  in  Series-parallel 


high  voltage.  It  has  three  terminals ;  one  is  a  neutral 
for  both  low  and  high  voltage,  and  the  others  are 
respectively  for  whichever  voltage  is  required. 

In  a  large  hall  connect  the  cables  to  the  main  fuses. 
In  a  small  hall,  or  in  a  room,  say,  of  a  house,  connect 
the  cables  to  the  bus-bars  of  the  distribution  board.  In 
any  case  see  that  the  cables  and  fuses  are  of  the  sizes 
required  to  carry  the  current. 

The  fuse  is  a  safety  device  which  breaks  the  circuit. 


128         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

It  consists  of  a  wire  or  number  of  wires  forming  part  of 
the  circuit,  and  of  such  size  and  material  that  they  melt 
and  perish  when  subjected  to  an  electric  current 
almost  powerful  enough  to  damage  the  lamps  and  other 
apparatus  in  the  circuit. 

Having  wired  up  the  outfit,  be  careful  at  first  to  cut 
out  almost  the  whole  of  the  current  when  "  striking  the 
arc  "  (see  p.  140),  and  only  gradually  switch  out  the  re- 
sistance, and  thereby  increase  the  current  as  required 
and  as  notified  by  the  ammeter,  but  never  to  the  maxi- 
mum amount  that  the  wires  will  carry.  If  too  much 
current  is  allowed  to  flow  suddenly,  the  fuse  may  be 
blown  or  fired,  which  might  also  put  out  the  lights 
in  the  hall.  Always  have  some  fuse  wire  at  hand  in 
case  of  such  an  emergency.  In  a  large  hall  the  lights 
would,  of  course,  be  on  a  separate  circuit  from  that  of 
the  projector. 

In  determining  the  amount  of  resistance  required  in 
a  circuit  containing  a  hand-feed  arc  lamp  working  a 
projector,  care  should  be  taken  that  the  rheostat  is 
sufficiently  large  for  the  purpose,  otherwise  the  resistance 
coils  will  become  too  hot.  To  prevent  this,  and  where  a 
large  resistance  is  not  available,  it  is  sometimes  preferable 
to  use  two  or  more  small  rheostats  connected  together  in 
parallel,  so  as  to  disperse  the  heat  over  a  greater  area, 
and  thereby  keep  the  resistance  coils  cooler  than  if  only 
one  small  rheostat  were  used.  The  key  of  only  one 
rheostat  should  be  used  for  regulating  the  current. 

In  connecting  up  rheostats  in  series,  the  total  re- 
sistances in  ohms  are  added  together  (see  Fig.  97).  In 
connecting  up  rheostats  in  parallel,  the  total  number  of 
ohms  is  divided  by  4,  in  accordance  with  Ohm's  law,  the 


THE   PROJECTION    ARC   LAMP        129 

resistance  of  a  conductor,  neglecting  temperature  effects, 
is  directly  proportional  to  its  length,  and  inversely  pro- 
portional to  its  cross  sectional  area  (see  Fig.  98).  It 
may  be  necessary  on  occasion  to  connect  up  rheostats  in 
series-parallel  (see  Fig.  99). 

When  the  hand-feed  arc  lamp  is  working  normally, 
that  is,  when  the  carbons  are  an  average  distance  apart, 
its  resistance  is  about  2  ohms.  This  lamp  requires  about 
50  volts  for  its  efficient  working.  This  voltage  with  the 
lamp  resistance  of  2  ohms  would  give  a  current  of  25 

amperes  according  to  Ohm's  law  (25  =  y ).    But  as  the 

tips  of  the  carbons  burn  off,  and  the  space  between  them 
increases,  the  resistance  also  increases  until  it  becomes 
so  great  that  no  current  will  pass,  and  the  arc  goes  out. 
While,  on  the  other  hand,  at  the  time  when  the  arc  is 
"  struck "  (see  p.  140),  that  is,  when  the  carbons  are 
touching,  the  resistance  is  practically  nil,  which  allows 
an  abnormal  amount  of  current  to  pass,  thereby  practi- 
cally short-circuiting  the  system. 

To  find  the  resistance  in  a  circuit,  divide  the  voltage 
by  the  amperage.  The  result  will  be  the  amount  of 
resistance  expressed  in  ohms. 

volts  E 

Ohms  =  amperes  or  R=   ^ ;  no  volts  -+-  30  amperes  = 

3.666,  approximately  3^  ohms. 

An  arc  lamp  requires  a  certain  definite  voltage  ;  if  of 
open  type  about  45  volts,  if  of  enclosed  pattern  about 
80  volts. 

An  ordinary  incandescent  lamp  (metallic  filament)  of 
16  c.p.  supplied  with  current  at  200  volts  pressure  takes  a 
current  of  about  £  ampere  =  a  consumption  of  50  watts. 
J 


130         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

200  -*-  J  =  50.  The  same  lamp  at  100  volts  takes  |  am- 
pere, which  is  also  —  50  watts.  100  -+-  |  =  50.  An 
arc  lamp,  such  as  is  used  for  street  lighting,  takes  about 
8  amperes.  A  small  electric  fan  motor,  with  a  12-in. 
diameter  fan,  takes  about  |  ampere,  at  200  volts  =  50 
watts.  Therefore,  one  could  be  worked  by  connecting 
it  to  an  ordinary  incandescent  lamp  socket.  A  lo-h.p. 
electric  motor  takes  about  50  amperes  when  working  at 
full  load  from  20O-volt  mains. 

The  voltage  or  pressure  of  the  E.M.F.  is  found  by 
multiplying  the  amperage  by  the  amount  of  resistance 
in  ohms.  V  =  A  x  O. 

How  many  volts  are  needed  to  send  20  amperes 
through  10  ohms  ?  If  the  circuit  included  a  back  E.M.F. 
of  40  volts,  how  many  volts  would  then  be  required  ? 
Answer :  20  x  10  =  200  volts,  with  no  back  E.M.F., 
and  20  x  10  +  40  =  240  volts,  with  a  back  E.M.F.  of 
40  volts. 

A  difference  in  potential  (P.D.)  between  two  points 
gives  rise  to  an  electrical  pressure,  or  E.M.F.,  from  one  to 
the  other  of  them.  Hence,  if  two  bodies  at  different 
potentials  are  placed  in  electrical  communication  with 
each  other,  this  difference  of  potential  will  give  rise  to 
an  electric  current  flowing  from  the  one  at  the  higher  to 
the  one  at  the  lower  potential. 

What  is  the  P.D.  at  the  terminals  of  a  dynamo  which 
sends  50  amperes  through  20  ohms  ?  Answer  :  50  x  20 
=  1,000  volts  =  P.D. 

What  horse-power  is  needed  to  run  a  65-volt  zo-ampere 
arc  lamp  ?  Answer :  i  h.p.  =  746  watts.  65  x  10  = 

650  watts.      /.  X  =  |jg  =  j^  h.p.,  or  nearly  i  h.p 


THE    PROJECTION    ARC    LAMP        131 

The  ampere  is  the  unit  of  flow,  or  the  measurement 
of  current.  One  ampere  of  current  would  result  from 
i  volt  of  pressure  of  the  E.M.F.  passing  through  a 
resistance  of  i  ohm. 

Generally  speaking,  to  find  the  amperage,  that  is,  the 
amount  of  current  in  a  circuit,  the  voltage  is  divided  by 
the  resistance,  expressed  in  ohms.  .*.  A  =  V  -*-  O  ;  or 

V 

A  =  Q.     Thus  a  20-h.p.  dynamo  is  running  at  500  volts. 

What  current  is  it  yielding  ?     Answer :    20    x   746  = 


Fig.  100.— Choking  Coil 

14,920  watts.  14,920  -*-  500  =  29.84,  or  nearly  30 
amperes. 

Again,  what  amount  of  current  is  being  used  by  an 
arc  lamp  working  a  picture  projector  from  no- volt  mains 
with  a  4-ohms  resistance  in  the  circuit  ?  Apparently,  the 
answer  would  be  no  -*-  4  =  27.5  amperes.  But  this  is 
not  correct,  because  the  resistance  of  the  lamp  has  not 
been  taken  into  consideration. 

If,  then,  according  to  Ohm's  law,  two  places  between 
which  there  is  a  P.D.  of  i  volt  are  connected  by  means 
of  wire,  of  such  a  resistance  that  its  resistance  plus  that 
already  existing  between  the  places  is  i  ohm,  a  current 


132         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

of  I  ampere  will  flow  through  the  entire  circuit.  There- 
fore, in  the  above  example  the  resistance  in  the  circuit  is 
4  ohms  plus  the  resistance  of  the  lamp,  which  is  2  ohms. 
.'.4  +  2=6  ohms,  the  total  resistance.  Hence,  no 
-4-  6  =  18.333  amperes  is  the  correct  answer.  In  other 
words,  no  volts  at  the  mains  —  50  volts  absorbed  by  the 


Fig.  101.— Combined  Transformer  and  Choking  Coil 

lamp  =  60  volts,  which  is  the  P.D.    And  60  •+-  18.333 
=  3.272  ohms. 

What  is  the  resistance  of  a  glow  lamp  which  takes  .2 
ampere  at  100  volts,  and  what  horse-power  does  it  use  ? 
Answer :    100  -*-  .2  =  500  ohms.     .*.  .2    x   100  =  20 
20       10 


What  resistance  must  be  put  in  series  with  a  45-volt 


THE    PROJECTION   ARC   LAMP        133 

lo-ampere  arc  lamp  so  that  it  may  be  run  from  65-volt 
mains  ?  Answer :  Volts  across  resistance  =65  —  45 
=  20.  Current  through  resistance  =  10  amperes. 
/.  20  -*-  10  =  2  ohms  resistance. 

The  Use  of  a  Choking  Coil. — In  Fig.  92  (p.  120) 
there  is  no  resistance  indicated,  in  its  place  being  a  choking 
coil  c  c.  This  is  a  coil  of  copper  wire  wound  round  a 
soft  iron  core,  without  direct  contact.  When  an  electric 
current  is  passed  through  the  wire  the  core  becomes 
magnetised,  and  a  secondary  electric  current  is  induced 
which  flows  in  the  opposite  direction.  Such  a  coil  is  used 
in  "  alternating  "  current  working,  in  place  of  a  resistance, 
in  connection  with  a  transformer.  Its  induction  is  great 
compared  with  its  resistance,  and  its  advantage  over  a 
simple  resistance  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  absorbs  but  little 
power,  whereas  the  resistance  uses  up,  in  the  form  of 
heat,  the  power  not  taken  by  the  lamp,  much  of  the 
current  being  thus  wasted,  but  having  to  be  paid  for  all 
the  same.  A  choking  coil  saves  nearly  all  this  waste, 
which  is  otherwise  dissipated  by  a  resistance  as  heat, 
and  soon  reduces  the  cost  of  the  bill  for  current.  A 
choking  coil  appears  to  push  back  the  current,  or  hold  it 
back,  until  required  by  the  lamp.  Fig.  100  shows  such  a 
coil,  and  Fig.  101  a  coil  combined  with  a  transformer. 

Electrical  Conductors. — In  column  I  of  the  tables  on 
p.  134  is  given  the  size  of  conductor  in  common  use. 
Thus  7/16,  19/17,  and  225/40  mean  that  these  cables  are 
composed  of  seven  wires  of  No.  16 ;  nineteen  wires  of 
No.  17 ;  and  225  wires  of  No.  40  standard  wire  gauge 
respectively. 

In  column  2  is  given  the  maximum  current  per- 
missible in  conductors  laid  in  casing  or  tubing,  provided 


134         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH   BOOK 

CARRYING  CAPACITY  OF  CABLES  =  1,000  AMPERES  PER 
SQUARE  INCH. 


Size 
S.W.G. 

Amperes. 

Volt 
drop. 

Sfei 

SJF.G. 

Amperes. 

Volt 
drop. 

3/25 

2'5 

15 

7/19 

15-0 

24 

3/24 

2-9 

16 

7/18 

21  'O 

25 

3/23 

3'3 

17 

7/i7 

27-0 

26 

1/18 

4'2 

18 

19/20 

29-0 

27 

3/22 

4'2 

18 

7/16 

33-o 

28 

7/36 

4'9 

18 

19/19 

35-o 

28 

3/21 

5'3 

19 

7/15 

40-0 

29 

1/17 

5'4 

19 

19/18 

47-0 

30 

7/24 

5'7 

19 

7/M 

48-0 

30 

3/20 

6'4 

19 

19/17 

60-0 

32 

7/23 

6-6 

20 

19/16 

75  -o 

33 

1/16 

6-8 

2O 

19/15 

91-0 

35 

3/19 

7-6 

2O 

19/14 

108-0 

36 

I/I5 

8-2 

21 

37/16 

130-0 

37 

7/22 

8-5 

21 

19/13 

136-0 

38 

1/14 

9-8 

21 

37/15 

157-0 

39 

3/i8 

10-3 

21 

37/H 

187-0 

40 

7/21 

II-O 

21 

61/13 

35°-o 

47 

7/20 

13-0 

22 

91/12 

625-0 

5i 

CARRYING  CAPACITY  OF  CABLES   (FLEXIBLES)   =  1,000 
AMPERES  PER  SQUARE  INCH. 


Size 

S.W.G. 

Amperes. 

7o//  drop. 

35/4° 

=  1/22 

1-7 

15 

36/38! 
23/36) 

=  1/20 

2-6 

16 

70/4° 

=  I/I9 

3-2 

16 

64/381 
40/36) 

=  1/18 

4-2 

18 

136/40 

=  I/I7 

5'4 

19 

"4/38! 
70/36) 

=  1/16 

6-8 

20 

225/40  \ 
90/36} 

=  1/15 

8-2 

21 

178/38) 

_ 

Q-8 

21 

110/36! 

—  I/I4 

y  *-' 

THE    PROJECTION    ARC    LAMP 

CAPACITY  OF  FUSING  CURRENT  IN  AMPERES. 


Size  of 
Wire 
S.W.G. 

Copper. 

Alumin- 
ium. 

Lead. 

Tin. 

Alloy 
(Lead  2, 
Tin  i). 

40 

3-41 

2-52 

0-46 

°-55 

0-44 

39 

3-84 

2-84 

0-52 

0-62 

0-49 

38 

4-76 

3-52 

0-64 

0-76 

0-61 

37 

574 

4-25 

0-77 

0-92 

0-74 

36 

6-79 

5-03 

0-92 

1-09 

0-87 

35 

7-88 

5-83 

i  -06 

1-26 

1.02 

34 

9-04 

6-68 

I-2I 

1-44 

1-16 

33 

10-2 

7-55 

1  '37 

1-64 

1-31 

32 

"•5 

8-5 

1-55 

1-84 

1-48 

12-8 

9-47 

1-72 

2-06 

1-65 

30 

14-1 

10-4 

1-9 

2-27 

1-82 

29 

15-5 

xx-4 

2-II 

2-52 

2  -O2 

28 
27 

1  8-4 
21-5 

13-6 
15-9 

It 

2-96 
3'45 

2-37 
2-76 

26 

24-7 

18-3 

3'33 

3-96 

25 

29 

21-4 

3-9 

4-65 

3-73 

24 

33'4 

24-7 

4'5 

5-36 

4'3 

23 

38-1 

28-2 

5-13 

6-1 

4'9 

22 

48 

35'5 

6-46 

7-69 

6-17 

21 

58-6 

48-4 

7-88 

9'4 

7'54 

20 

69-9 

9-41 

II-2 

9 

19 

81-5 

60-3 

10-9 

13 

10-4 

18 

107 

79-7 

14-5 

17-2 

17 

132 

98 

17-8 

21-2 

17 

16 

166 

122 

22-3 

26-6 

21-3 

15 

198 

I46 

26-6 

31-7 

14 
13 

III 

171 
212 

38-5 

48  X 

29-8 

37-8 

12 

344 

254 

46-3 

55 

443 

II 

300 

54'5 

65 

52-2 

10 

— 

347 

63-2 

75 

60-5 

9 

— 

— 

75'4 

90 

72-2 

8 

— 

— 

88-3 

105 

84-5 

7 

— 

— 

102 

121 

98 

6 

— 

— 

116 

138 

in 

5 





X34 

160 

128 

4 

— 

— 

165 

197 

158 

3 

— 

— 

204 

167 

2 

— 

— 

200 

239 

191 

I 

— 

— 

221 

263 

211 

0 

— 

— 

254 

3°3 

243 

136 


THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 


the    external    temperature    does    not    exceed    100°    F 

(37-9°  C.). 

In  column  3  is  given  the  total  length  in  yards  of  the 
conductor,  "  lead  "  and  "  return,"  for  one  volt  drop, 
when  the  current  in  each  conductor  is  that  as  given  in 
column  2. 

The  Fuse.  —  This  has  already  been  mentioned. 
Electrical  circuits  and  the  appliances  therein  should 
be  protected  by  a  fuse  wire  or  other  cut-out,  such  as  the 


Fig.  102.— A  Widely-used  Type  of  Hand-feed  Arc  Lamp 

magnetic  circuit-breaker,  which  will  automatically  open 
the  circuit  should  the  current  attain  such  abnormal 
dimensions  as  are  liable  to  injure  the  appliances  or  the 
circuit. 

The  fuse  is  the  most  elementary  form  of  cut-out. 
It  usually  consists  of  a  few  inches  of  wire,  of  a  less  carrying 
capacity  than  the  circuit  wires,  and  its  destruction  by 
the  current  means  the  other  parts  of  the  circuit  have 
been  saved  from  injury  and  danger.  In  selecting  a 


THE   PROJECTION   ARC   LAMP        137 

fuse  it  is  necessary  to  take  into  account  the  overload 
time  element  or  time-lag  and  the  liability  to  oxidation 
as  well  as  the  fusing  capacity — that  is,  fusing  current — 
inasmuch  as  a  certain  period  of  time  elapses  before  the 
fusing  current  can  raise  the  temperature  of  the  metal 
to  the  melting  point. 

In  determining  the  relative  sizes  of  fuse  wire  to  be 
used  on  the  several  parts  of  a  circuit,  it  is  important 
that  the  fuses 
should  be  so 
arranged  that 
in  the  event  of 
a  short-circuit 
or  fault  on  any 
branch  or  sub- 
circuit,  the  fuse 
protecting  this 
branch  will 
blow  before  the 
main  fuse,  as 
otherwise  cur- 
rent will  be  cut 
off  from  the 
whole  installa- 
tion until  the  main  fuse  is  replaced.  By  employing 
copper  for  the  main  fuses  and  tin  or  lead  for  the  sub- 
circuit  fuses,  this  may  generally  be  prevented.  It  is 
inadvisable  to  use  as  fuses  wires  of  a  larger  gauge  than 
about  No.  13  s.w.G.  Above  this  size,  strip  fuses  are  pre- 
ferable ;  or,  failing  this,  several  strands  of  a  smaller 
gauge  wire  may  be  connected  in  parallel  and  so  made  to 
serve  the  purpose. 


Fig.  103. — Kineto  Arc  Lamp  (Carbons  arranged 
for  Continuous  Current) 


138         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

The  Electric  Arc  Lamp. — The  discovery  of  the 
electric  arc  is  generally  attributed  to  Sir  Humphry  Davy, 
the  English  scientist,  who  found  that  a  continuous  dis- 
charge of  electricity  across  an  air  gap  separating  two 
carbon  pencils  connected  to  the  poles  of  an  electric 
generator  produced  light  of  dazzling  brilliancy.  The 
name  arc  is  suggested  by  the  curved  form  which  the 
current  here  takes,  as  it  leaps  across  from  point  to  point. 
The  arc  itself  produces  only  about  5  per  cent,  of  the  light, 
the  negative  carbon  10  per  cent.,  and  the  "  crater  "  in 
the  positive  carbon  the  remaining  85  per  cent.  The 
carbons  wear  away  as  the  light  continues,  and  there  must 
be  means  of  bringing  them  closer  together.  In  arc  lamps 
for  general  lighting  purpose  the  means  is  automatic,  but 
for  projection  work  the  hand- feed  arrangement  is  preferred. 
The  ordinary  hand-feed  arc  lamp  is  shown  by  Fig.  102. 
A  is  the  elevator  to  raise  the  lamp  ;  B  the  traverser  for 
lateral  adjustment ;  c  the  hand-feed  for  "  striking  the 
arc  "  and  feeding  the  carbons  ;  D  the  top  arm  carbon 
adjuster ;  E  the  bottom  arm  carbon  holder ;  F  the  jaws 
to  hold  the  carbons ;  G  the  winged  nuts  to  tighten  the 
jaws;  H  the  positive  terminal  for  "lead"  to  the  top 
or  positive  carbon  ;  I  the  negative  terminal  for  "  lead  " 
to  the  bottom  or  negative  carbon ;  j  the  handle  to 
draw  or  push  the  lamp  in  or  out ;  K  the  clamp  to  alter 
the  angle  of  the  lamp  ;  and  L  an  asbestos-beaded  cable 
leading  from  terminals  to  the  top  and  bottom  arms  of 
the  lamps.  The  mechanism  is  insulated  by  plates  of 
mica  in  between  the  parts,  to  prevent  short-circuit. 

Up-to-date  arc  lamps  of  reliable  types  are  shown 
by  Figs.  102  to  106.  In  the  third  of  these  figures,  i 
indicates  clamping  screw  for  upper  carbon ;  2,  clamping 


THE   PROJECTION   ARC   LAMP        139 

screw  for  lower  carbon;  3,  carbon  feed;  4,  vertical 
adjustment  of  arc  lamp ;  5,  lateral  adjustment  ;  6,  an- 
gular adjustment,  for  tilting  lamp ;  7,  longitudinal  ad- 
justment of  upper  carbon;  8,  lateral  adjustment  of 
upper  carbon ;  9,  screw  for  advancing  entire  arc  lamp ; 


Fig.  104.— Kamm's  Universal  Arc  Lamp  (Carbons  set  for  Alternating 
Current) 

10,  parallel  rods  sliding  in  sleeves  on  tray;  n,  fixing 
lever  for  tray ;  12,  adjustable  tray. 

Carbons  should  be  fine  grained  and  of  the  best  quality, 
in  order  to  give  a  good  and  steady  light.  Common 
quality  carbons  are  generally  of  coarse  grain,  and  are 


140         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH   BOOK 

often  the  cause  of  a  poor  and  unsteady  light.  The  arc 
is  "  struck  "  by  turning  the  milled  head  c  (Fig.  102)  sharply 
to  the  right  and  then  to  the  left.  This  brings  the  carbons 
into  momentary  contact  together,  and  then  separates 
them  to  a  short  distance,  thus  forming  the  arc.  Some 
knack  is  required  to  do  this  smartly.  The  carbons  must 
be  brought  together  and  then  immediately  separated  by 
a  short  distance  varying  according  to  the  strength  of  the 
current,  as  the  ordinary  voltage  used  in  practice  is  in- 
sufficient to  force  the  electricity  to  jump  across  any 
considerable  space  separating  the  carbons.  When  these 
are  separated,  the  current  meets  with  very  great  re- 
sistance, and  the  energy  expended  in  overcoming  this 
resistance  produces  a  high  degree  of  heat,  which  is  suffi- 
cient to  vaporise  a  portion  of  the  carbon ;  the  gases 
produced  are  better  conductors  of  electricity  than  the 
air,  and  thus  permit  the  current  to  flow  across  the  space 
between  the  two  carbons.  The  current  in  passing  from 
the  positive  to  the  negative  detaches  minute  particles 
of  solid  carbon,  which  strike  back  with  immense  velocity 
upon  the  positive  carbon,  their  impact  being  so  great 
as  to  raise  a  portion  of  that  carbon,  the  "  crater," 
to  a  white  heat.  The  temperature  of  the  crater  is 
the  highest  known  to  science,  as  far  as  practical  produc- 
tion by  artificial  means  is  concerned,  and  is  sufficient  to 
melt  even  the  diamond,  which  is  the  hardest  and  most 
refractory  substance  known.  This  high  temperature 
produces  an  immense  volume  of  light  from  a  very  small 
spot,  and  it  is  upon  this  fact  that  the  use  of  the  electric 
arc  in  cinematograph  projection  depends.  The  greater 
the  efficiency  of  the  working  of  the  lamp,  the  whiter  the 
light  and  the  better  for  projection  purposes. 


THE    PROJECTION    ARC    LAMP        141 

If  the  carbons  are  new,  allow  them  to  burn  a  few 
minutes  before  starting  the  projection,  so  that  a  good 
crater  may  be  formed  on  the  top  carbon,  and  to  give 
the  light  time  to  settle  down  steadily  and  to  become 
quite  silent. 

It  is  seldom  necessary  to  look  into  the  lantern  to  see 


Fig.  105. — Walturdaw  Arc  Lamp  with  Special  Carbon  Adapters 

if  the  carbons  are  all  right.  Watch  the  gate,  and  notice 
if  it  is  well  covered  by  a  bright  disc  of  white  light,  having 
a  thin  bluish  tinge  at  the  top.  This  bluish  tinge  gradu- 
ally widens  as  the  carbons  burn  away  and  the  light 
begins  to  dim  down.  Consequently,  a  very  slight  ad- 
justment of  the  hand-feed  c  (Fig.  102)  will  be  needed  to 
maintain  a  good  light. 


142         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

When  the  disc  of  light  on  the  gate  falls  down,  or  goes 
to  one  side,  use  the  elevator,  or  the  traverser,  as  the  case 
may  be.  A  little  practice  will  enable  the  operator  to 
judge  of  the  condition  of  the  light,  by  the  illumination  on 
the  gate,  as  before  indicated,  and  so  save  his  eyes  from 
the  glare  of  light  inside  the  lantern. 


Fig.  106. — Beard's  "Ideal"  Arc  Lamp  (Carbons  arranged  for 
Alternating  Current) 

If  the  crater  formed  on  the  upper  carbon  is  too  small, 
the  shadows  are  too  sharply  contrasted  and  do  not  merge 
into  the  high  lights  in  a  gradual  or  natural  manner.  In  a 
life-like  picture  the  shadows  gradually  blend  into  the 
high  lights,  and  the  image  appears  to  stand  out  in  relief 
from  the  flat  surface  upon  which  it  is  projected.  This 


THE    PROJECTION   ARC   LAMP         143 

effect  is  readily  seen  in  a  good  half-tone  photograph, 
whereas  a  pen-and-ink  drawing  of  the  same  picture 
appears  as  a  flat  surface,  owing  to  the  shadows  being 
sharply  denned.  The  size  of  the  crater  depends  upon 
two  factors  :  (i)  The  strength  of  the  current,  or  am- 
perage, and  (2)  the  length  of  the  arc.  The  length  of  the 
arc  is  practically  proportional  to  the  voltage,  for  a  given 
current,  and  the  size  of  the  crater  increases  proportion- 
ally with  the  length  of  the  arc.  Hence,  expert  operators 
advocate  the  use  of  the  high-voltage  carbon  for  cine- 
matograph projection,  instead  of  the  ordinary  soft  low- 
voltage  carbon,  which  produces  such  a  small  crater  that 
the  shadows  in  the  picture  are  too  sharp.  An  increase 
of  from  5  to  8  volts  is  just  sufficient  to  produce  the  blending 
of  the  edges  of  the  shadows  necessary  to  give  the  most 
life-like  picture.  Other  advantages  are  : — (i)  The  arc 
being  longer,  less  attention  is  required  to  prevent  the  tip 
of  the  lower  carbon  from  getting  in  the  way  of  the  light 
from  the  crater  of  the  upper  one ;  (2)  the  high- voltage 
carbon  burns  away  much  less  rapidly,  and  the  arc  need 
not  be  adjusted  so  often  ;  while  (3)  there  is  a  considerable 
saving  in  the  amount  of  carbon  used,  up  to  about  50 
per  cent. 

When  using  alternating  current,  a  larger  disc  of  light 
on  the  gate  will  be  necessary.  The  carbons  will  also  need 
more  frequent  adjustment,  this  being  necessary  whenever 
the  arc  hisses.  When  the  light  is  correct,  there  is  only 
a  slight  buzzing  sound,  to  which  the  operator  will  soon 
become  accustomed. 

Carbons  for  Continuous  Current. — The  sizes  of 
carbons  for  continuous  current  are  as  follow  (25  mm. 
=  i  in.)  :— 


144         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

5  to  10  amperes,     7  mm.  solid  and  10  mm.  cored. 

10  to  15       „  10  „  „  „  13  ,, 

15  to  25  „  12  „  „  ,,  16  ,,        „ 

25  to  30  „  13  „  „  „  18  „        „ 

30  to  40  „  14  „  ,,  ,,  20  ,,        ,, 

40  to  50  „  16  „  „  „  22  „        „ 

50  to  60  \ 

or  more  I  „  18  „  „  „  25  „ 

Up  to  120' 

The  top  carbon  is  cored,  and  is  larger  than  the  bottom 
one,  which  is  solid.     They  are  usually  placed  at  an  angle 
of  about  30°,  and  with  the  front  sides  in  line  with  each 
other,  while  the  ends  are  about  |  in.  apart  (see  Fig.  107) . 
Carbons    for    Alternating    Current. —  The    sizes    of 
carbons  for  alternating  current  are  : — 
10  to  20  amperes,  13  mm.  cored. 
20  to  30        „        16    „ 
30  to  40        „        18    „ 
40  to  50        „        22    „ 
50  to  60  i 
upwards) 

Both  carbons  are  cored,  and  of  the  same  size  rela- 
tively according  to  the  amperage. 

D-shaped  carbons  are  the  best,  as  they  give  a  better 
light  than  the  ordinary  cylindrical  shape.  The  latter, 
however,  are  improved  by  rasping  away  the  front  side  a 
little.  They  may  be  placed  in  an  upright  position,  and 
with  the  ends  almost  touching  (see  Fig.  108). 

Other  arrangements  of  carbons  are  illustrated  by 
Figs.  109  to  in. 

Dynamos  and  Motors. — The  dynamo  is  a  machine 
for  producing  an  electric  current  by  means  of  mechanical 


KINEMACOLOR    PROJECTOR    MECHANISM 


THE   PROJECTION   ARC    LAMP        145 

power,  that  is,  for  converting  energy  from  a  mechanical 
into  an  electrical  form  by  the  use  of  electro-magnets. 
Practically,  the  terms  dynamo 
and  motor  may  be  explained 
together,  as  almost  any  dynamo 
properly  connected  to  a  source 
of  electrical  energy  will  run  as 
a  motor,  and  almost  any  motor 
suitably  driven  by  a  prime 
mover  will  generate  electrical 
current  as  a  dynamo.  The 
dynamo  is  not  a  source  of 
power  in  itself,  but  is  merely 
the  means  by  which  mechanical 
or  electrical  energy  is  trans- 
formed, just  as  in  a  motor,  where,  the  operations  being 
reversed,  electrical  energy  is  changed  into  mechanical 
power.  The  transformation  is  not  effected  without  loss 
of  energy.  Whether  as  a  dynamo  or  as  a  motor  this 
loss  is  about  20  per  cent.,  which  is  equivalent  to  an 
efficiency  of  80  per  cent,  for  either  machine. 


Figs.  107  and  108.— Carbons 
for  Continuous  and  Alter- 
nating Current 
tively 


Fig.  109.— Arrangement 
of  Carbons  for  Con- 
tinuous Current 
K 


Figs.   110  and  111.— Arrangements   of 
Carbons  for  Alternating  Current 


146         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

The  operation  of  either  a  dynamo  or  a  motor  depends 
upon  the  fact  that  a  bar  of  iron  having  a  coil  of  insulated 
copper  wire  wound  round  it  becomes  a  magnet  when 
a  current  of  electricity  is  passed  through  the  said  wire. 
This  arrangement  is  also  used  in  many  other  kinds  of  elec- 
trical appliances,  such  as  electric  bells,  induction  coils,  the 
solenoids  of  arc  lamps,  telephones,  etc.  But  in  the 
dynamo  and  the  motor  two  other  facts  are  utilised, 
namely : — (i)  The  magnetic  force  induced  in  the  bar 
of  iron  radiates  the  space  surrounding  the  ends  or  poles 
of  the  iron  bar,  and  takes  a  more  or  less  circular  direction 
from  one  pole  to  the  other.  This  is  termed  the  magnetic 
field,  and  when  the  intensities  of  different  magnetic 
fields  are  compared  they  are  said  to  have  so  many  lines 
of  magnetic  force  to  the  square  inch.  (2)  When  a  con- 
ductor is  so  arranged  as  to  cut  through  the  lines  of  magnetic 
force,  an  electric  current  passes  along  the  conductor  in  a 
definite  direction. 

The  existence  of  the  magnetic  field  can  be  exhibited  in 
the  following  simple  manner  (see  Fig.  112) : — Place  a 
magnet  between  two  pieces  of  wood  upon  a  table,  in  such 
a  manner  as  to  support  a  sheet  of  thin  cardboard.  Sprinkle 
a  thin  layer  of  iron  filings  on  the  cardboard,  when,  by 
gently  tapping  it  with  the  finger,  the  filings  will  arrange 
themselves  in  symmetrical  form  along  the  magnetic  lines 
of  force.  It  will  be  found  that  the  lines  start  from  one 
polar  region  of  the  magnet  and  return  by  curved  paths 
to  the  other  polar  region  of  the  magnet,  through  which 
they  may  be  supposed  to  be  continued.  These  curves 
do  not  cross  or  merge  into  one  another,  but  are  closed 
curves  of  the  lines  of  magnetic  force.  These  lines  are 
more  crowded  in  places  near  the  poles  than  in  other  parts 


THE   PROJECTION   ARC    LAMP        147 

of  the  field,  and  where  they  are  closest  together  the 
strength  of  the  field  is  the  most  intense.  This  magnetic 
figure  may  be  permanently  fixed  by  using  cardboard 
which  has  been  soaked  in  melted  paraffin  wax  and  dried 
before  being  sprinkled  with  the  iron  filings.  When  these 
are  in  position  pass  a  Bunsen  flame  gently  over  the  card- 
board so  as  to  melt  the  wax,  which  on  cooling  again  will 
retain  the  filings  in  position. 

In  a  dynamo  a  number  of  conductors,  suitably 
arranged  in  what  is  termed  the  armature,  are  revolved 
between  the  poles  of 
one  or  more  electro-  '•„  '• 
magnets,  thereby  cut- 
ting the  lines  of  O 
magnetic  force  and  -  « 
causing  a  current  of  .-'',. 
electricity  to  flow 
along  the  conductors  /  / 

in  the  armature  and     '   •'   p.g  112>_,,FIeld,,  of  Magnet 
pass  on  to  the  com- 
mutator, from  which  it  is  collected  by  the  brushes  and 
then  led  away  by  the  cables  to  wherever  the  current 
is  required. 

In  a  motor,  the  above  operations  are  reversed,  the 
current  being  led  to  the  commutator  and  passing  along 
the  windings  of  the  armature  to  the  field  magnets,  where 
a  strong  magnetism  is  induced. 

It  is  convenient  to  assume  that  the  direction  of  the 
lines  of  magnetic  force  point  towards  the  s  or  negative 
pole  of  the  magnet,  and  from  the  N  or  positive.  It  is 
also  well  to  remember  the  first  law  of  electricity 
and  of  magnetism,  namely,  that  like  polarities  repel, 


148         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

while  unlike  or  opposite  polarities  attract  each  other. 
Bearing  these  points  in  mind  the  operations  in  connection 
with  the  working  of  dynamos  and  of  motors  become 
simplified.  When  that  part  of  the  armature  which  at 
a  given  moment  is  magnetised  with  similar  magnetism  to 
the  field  magnet  behind  it  is  driven  forward  because  it  is 
repelled  by  it,  it  is  simultaneously  attracted  by  the 
magnetism  of  the  field  magnet  before  it.  The  opposite 
part  of  the  armature  is  also  affected  in  precisely  an 
opposite  manner,  and  the  moment  the  current  flows  the 
armature  tends  to  revolve.  Therefore,  if  the  electricity 
flowed  through  only  one  particular  coil  and  was  never 
interrupted,  the  armature  would  come  to  rest  with  its 
poles  adjacent  to  the  opposite  poles  of  the  field  magnet. 
The  commutator,  however,  ensures  that  as  soon  as  the 
current  has  passed  through  any  coil  of  the  armature, 
which  consists  in  all  machines  of  a  number  of  coils  of 
copper  wire,  it  is  shut  off  from  that,  and  caused  to  flow 
through  a  second,  and  in  turn  a  third  and  fourth  coil 
and  so  on.  The  effect  of  this  is  that  the  armature  is  con- 
stantly being  attracted  on  the  one  side  and  repelled  on 
the  other,  with  the  obvious  result  that  it  is  revolved 
with  extreme  rapidity. 

The  most  simple  form  for  a  commutator  consists 
essentially  of  two  contact  pieces,  turning  with  the  arma- 
ture, and  connected  respectively  with  the  extremities  of 
the  coil  of  wire  ;  the  current  is  carried  away  by  the  fixed 
brushes.  The  position  of  these  brushes  should  be  such 
that  they  pass  from  one  contact  piece  to  the  other  at  the 
moment  when  the  current  is  reversed.  Theoretically,  the 
brushes  should  press  against  the  commutator  at  points 
diametrically  opposite  to  each  other,  the  line  joining 


THE   PROJECTION   ARC   LAMP        149 

these  points  being  at  right  angles  to  the  line  joining  the 
north  and  south  poles  of  the  field  magnets.  But  practi- 
cally, it  is  found  that  the  field  of  the  armature  itself 
distorts  the  field  of  the  field  magnets  more  or  less,  with 
the  result  that,  to  prevent  excessive  sparking,  the  brushes 
have  to  be  twisted  round  in  the  same  direction  as  the 
armature  is  moving.  The  angle  which  the  brushes  must 
make,  and  which  depends  upon  certain  variable  con- 
ditions, is  spoken  of  as  "  the  lead  of  the  brushes." 

Portable  Petrol-driven  Dynamos. — The  operator 
knows  the  dynamo  best  in  one  of  two  forms  :  (i)  a  gas- 
engine-driven  stationary  dynamo,  and  (2)  a  portable 
lighting  set,  including  a  petrol  engine  and  slow-speed 
dynamo.  One  of  the  plates  to  this  book  illustrates  such 
a  set.  It  represents  a  3|-h.p.  water-cooled  petrol  engine 
with  circulating  pump  and  magneto  ignition,  mounted  on 
a  steel  girder  frame  and  coupled  with  a  "  Fulmen  " 
i, 500- watt  4-pole  dynamo,  wound  for  50  volts  x  30 
amperes,  and  over-compounded  by  5  per  cent.  The 
speed  at  full  load  is  900  revolutions  per  minute.  The 
dynamo  has  self-oiling  bearings.  The  two  steel  girders 
forming  the  foundation  are  of  H  section,  5  in.  by  4  in.,  held 
rigidly  together  by  i|-in.  steel  distance  pieces,  which 
are  extended  beyond  the  clamping  nuts  to  form  axles 
for  the  trolley  wheels.  The  dynamo  and  engine  bed  are 
bolted  directly  to  the  joists,  keeping  them  true  and  out 
of  twist.  It  is  not  necessary  to  plane  the  bed- plate  or 
joists,  but  the  shafts  are  lined  up  approximately  true,  any 
slight  inaccuracy  being  taken  up  by  the  flexible  coupling. 
This  consists  of  several  thick  leather  washers  pierced 
with  eight  f-in.  holes,  with  which  engage  four  projecting 
pins  equally  spaced  on  both  flanges  of  the  half  coupling 


150         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH   BOOK 

and  interleaving.  The  drive  is  practically  rigid  to 
torsional  stresses,  but  flexible  to  lateral  and  bending 
effect,  as  the  pins  slip  in  or  out  of  the  holes  slightly,  thus 
relieving  the  bearings  of  any  strain.  The  front  of  the 
trolley  is  fitted  with  a  detachable  drawbar  ;  the  complete 
set  without  tanks  weighs  8  cwt.  Of  course,  much  more 
powerful  sets  are  obtainable.  For  example,  with  a  6-h.p. 
engine  the  corresponding  dynamo  would  give  65  volts 
55  amperes,  of  which,  say,  40  amperes  might  be  required 
for  the  projector  arc,  the  remaining  15  amperes  being 
usefully  employed  in  lighting  two  7-ampere  "  Flame  " 
arcs  for  the  hall,  or,  if  metal  filament  lamps  are  preferred, 
in  supplying  the  necessary  current  for  thirty  lamps  of 
16  candle-power  each. 

When  lubricating  motors  and  dynamos,  always  use  a 
copper  oil  feeder,  because  ordinary  tin  (iron)  ones  are 
liable  to  be  attracted  by  the  field  magnets,  and  many 
serious  accidents  have  thus  been  caused.  For  the  same 
reason  do  not  leave  any  tools  near  the  machine,  especially 
while  it  is  running. 

Motor-generator. — This  electrical  machine  is  use- 
ful for  reducing  the  voltage  of  the  supply  in  an  economical 
manner.  When  current  at  a  given  pressure  is  supplied 
to  the  motor,  the  electrical  power  is  converted  into  me- 
chanical power,  which  in  its  turn  is  utilised  to  drive  a 
dynamo  from  which  current  at  the  desired  pressure  is 
obtained.  A  motor-generator  set  is  a  combination  of 
motor  and  generator,  or  dynamo,  whose  shafts  are  gener- 
ally direct-coupled,  the  whole  being  supported  on  one 
bedplate.  If  the  motor  be  an  "  alternating  "  current 
one,  and  the  generator,  or  dynamo,  be  a  "  continuous  " 
current  machine,  it  is  clear  that  alternating  current  will 


THE   PROJECTION    ARC   LAMP        151 

be  transformed  into  continuous  current.  Its  efficiency 
is  the  relation  of  the  generator  output  to  the  motor 
intake,  and  is  about  50  per  cent. ;  thus  for  an  output 
of  60  volts  50  amperes,  the  consumption  is  6  kilowatts. 

Rotary -converter. — This  is  used  for  "  continuous  " 
current  only,  and  is  a  modification  of  the  motor-generator. 
In  it  the  functions  of  the  motor  and  generator  are  carried 
out  by  only  one  machine,  which  has  two  commutators — 
one  at  each  end — one  of  which  receives  the  current  from 
the  mains,  while  the  other  gives  the  low-voltage  supply 
A  6o-volt  5o-ampere  (3,000  kilowatt)  machine  has  an 
efficiency  of  75  per  cent.,  the  consumption  being  about 
4  kilowatts. 

Auto-converter. — This  also  is  used  for  "  continuous  " 
current  only.  It  is  self-contained,  as  the  name  implies, 
with  one  armature,  one  commutator,  and  one  set  of 
brush  gear,  a  shunt  regulator  also  being  used  in  con- 
junction for  raising  or  lowering  the  secondary  voltage. 
Its  efficiency  is  about  90  per  cent.,  with  an  output  of 
60  volts  50  amperes,  equal  to  a  consumption  of  about 
3.35  kilowatts. 

Transformer. — This  is  an  apparatus  for  causing 
an  "  alternating  "  current  at  a  certain  pressure  to  give 
rise  to  an  induced  "  alternating  "  current  at  a  different 
pressure,  or  vice  versa.  A  circuit  containing  one  is  shown 
by  Fig.  92.  It  changes  the  voltage  but  not  the  nature  of 
the  current,  which  will  still  be  alternating  and  of  the 
same  frequency  as  before.  It  has  already  been  shown 
that  in  order  to  convert  alternating  to  continuous  cur- 
rent an  alternating  current  motor  must  be  coupled  to 
a  continuous  current  dynamo  (see  under  the  heading 
"  Motor-generators  "). 


152         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

The  action  of  a  transformer  depends  upon  the  fact 
that  if  a  considerable  length  of  thin  insulated  wire  is 
wound  closely  around  a  coil  of  thick  insulated  wire, 
and  an  alternating  current  at  a  high  pressure  be  passed 
through  the  coil  of  thin  wire,  an  alternating  current  of 
lower  pressure  will  pass  round  the  coil  of  thick  wire 
when  its  ends  are  connected  together.  These  conditions 
obtain  in  a  "  step-down  "  transformer. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  an  alternating  current  of  low 
pressure  be  sent  round  the  coil  of  thick  wire,  an  alter- 
nating current  of  higher  pressure  will  be  forced  round  the 
coil  of  thin  wire  when  its  ends  are  connected  together ; 
this  gives  the  "  step-up  "  transformer.  To  strengthen 
the  field,  a  series  of  laminated  plates  of  soft  iron  are 
adjusted  in  a  suitable  position.  A  6o-volt  50-ampere 
transformer  has  an  efficiency  of  97  per  cent.,  its  con- 
sumption being  3.7  kilowatt. 

Transformers  are  also  called  static  transformers,  as 
they  have  no  rotating  parts. 

Switches. — The  wiring  diagrams  already  given  in- 
clude some  switches,  the  principal  kinds  of  which  are  : — 

The  "  tumbler,"  for  controlling  incandescent  lamps, 
either  singly  or  in  groups,  on  the  smaller  or  branch  cir- 
cuits. On  larger  circuits,  containing  arc  lamps,  etc., 
heavier  switches  of  the  knife  or  chopper  type  are  used. 
It  is  evident  that  a  single-pole  switch  will  only  make  or 
break  electrical  continuity  in  one  wire  of  the  circuit, 
hence  the  conductors,  lamps,  etc.,  are  still  at  the  potential 
of  the  circuit,  and  in  the  event  of  a  fault  developing  there 
may  be  a  considerable  leakage  of  current  to  earth  (see 
Fig.  113).  With  a  double-pole  switch,  however,  electrical 
continuity  is  made  or  broken  on  both  the  "  lead  "  and  the 


THE    PROJECTION   ARC   LAMP        153 

"  return  "  wires  ;  hence  the  current  is  effectually  cut  off 
from  the  conductors  on  the  farther  side  of  the  switch,  and 
the  lamps,  etc.,  may  be  adjusted  without  any  fear  of 
a  shock  (see  Fig.  114).  It  is  customary  for  the  auditorium 
lights  to  be  controlled  not  only  from  the  operator's 
box,  but  also  from  the  manager's  office,  or  some  other 
easily  accessible  place 
near  the  entrance  to  +  f  *~ 
the  hall.  For  this  pur-  . 


pose,      "two-way"  FU.  m 

switches    are   used;    +      r^' r— 

but    these    are    not  ^^Y C 


"double-pole  "switches.    '  Fig.  114 

In  Fig.  114  a  group  of 

lights  is  shown  which 

are    controlled    by    a 

double  -  pole      switch  ; 

whereas  in  Fig.  115  a 

similar  group  of  lamps 

-,-  *  Figs.  113  to  115.-Single-pole,  Double- 

is     shown    which    are  ^  Md  Two-way  Switches 

controlled  by  two-way 

switches.  In  the  position  shown  the  lamps  are  out. 
When  the  manager,  at  A,  decided  to  light  up  the  hall 
before  the  entertainment  started,  he  would  simply  throw 
over  his  switch  to  the  other  side.  Then,  when  the 
operator  entered  his  box,  at  B,  and  was  ready  to  begin 
the  show,  he  (the  operator)  would  simply  throw  over  his 
switch  to  the  other  side,  and  so  extinguish  the  lamps. 
Or,  vice  versa,  the  lights  being  out,  the  operator  could 
switch  on  the  lights  at  once.  Thus,  perfect  control  of  the 
auditorium  lights  is  assured  from  two  different  points. 


CHAPTER   XI 
Screens 

LANTERN  or  cinematograph  screens  are  either  trans- 
parent or  opaque.  The  former  are  used  only  when  the 
pictures  need  to  be  projected  from  the  back.  Opaque 
screens  should  be  as  impervious  to  light  as  possible,  and 
at  the  same  time  should  preserve  the  brilliancy  of  the 
projected  light  without  undue  diffusion.  Good  materials 
are  stout  twill  and  linen  sheetings,  both  of  which  may 
be  had  woven  in  one  piece  and  without  seams.  Both 
kinds  are  improved  by  a  good  coat  of  whitewash  slightly 
toned  down  with  a  little  blue  or  black  mixed  in.  A 
black  sheet  placed  immediately  behind  the  white  one  is 
also  thought  to  be  an  improvement. 

A  good  composition  for  dressing  a  flexible  screen  is : 
glycerine  i  lb.,  white  glue  I  lb.,  french  zinc  oxide  2  lb., 
hot  water  i  gal.  This  is  applied  hot  to  the  stretched 
material.  A  sheet  so  prepared  will  roll  readily  with- 
out cracking,  but  it  is  doubtful  if  it  will  stand  folding. 
Another,  but  somewhat  troublesome,  method  of  gaining 
portability  is  to  dip  the  sheet  in  weak  whitewash  before 
stretching  it,  rinsing  it  out  in  water  at  the  close  of  the 
performance,  when  it  may  be  folded  and  wrapped  in  a 
waterproof  covering. 

For  a  perfectly  opaque  screen,  a  stout,  dead  white 
paper,  pasted  over  heavy  sheeting  and  well  whitewashed 
when  dry,  answers  excellently. 
154 


SCREENS  155 

The  best  screen  of  all  is  a  smoothly  plastered  wall, 
either  distempered  as  before  explained  or  painted  with 
aluminium  paint. 

In  a  regular  picture  hall,  that  portion  of  the  wall 
upon  which  the  picture  is  to  be  projected  should  be 
recessed  about  I  ft.  or  I  ft.  6  in.,  and  the  sides  thereof 
splayed,  somewhat  like  the  bevel  of  an  ordinary  picture 
frame.  Outside  of  this  bevel  a  i-ft.  unburnished  gilt 
frame  should  be  fixed.  The  inner  sides  of  the  frame  and 
the  bevelled  wall  should  be  painted  black,  with  a  matt 
surface,  right  up  to  the  edge  of  the  picture,  or  covered 
with  black  velvet.  Outside  the  frame,  dark  curtains 
tastefully  arranged  add  greatly  to  the  effect  of  the  pictures, 
and  also  reduce  the  reflection  of  light  in  the  vicinity.  The 
general  scheme  of  colouring  throughout  the  hall  should 
be  a  warm  tone  of  red,  but  never  white,  if  first-class 
pictures  are  to  be  shown. 

Likewise,  if  the  pictures  are  to  have  a  natural  ap- 
pearance they  should  not  be  too  highly  magnified,  as 
they  often  are,  even  in  so-called  first-class  shows.  A 
20-ft.  to  24-ft.  picture,  with  figures  in  the  immediate 
foreground,  is  anything  but  natural  in  appearance,  owing 
to  the  giant-like  magnification  of  the  said  figures  on  the 
screen.  The  same  film  projected  as  a  picture  12  ft.  by 
9  ft.,  or  14  ft.  by  io£  ft.  at  most,  would  have  a  much 
better  effect,  besides  requiring  less  current  to  illuminate  it. 

Silver  screens  are  produced  by  coating  with  aluminium 
paint  or  by  means  of  special  patented  methods,  of  which 
the  following,  quoted  from  patent  No.  17,276  of  1912, 
is  typical.  Material  with  a  painted  or  enamelled  surface 
is  used,  such  as  "  carriage  roofing,"  that  is,  cotton  cloth 
or  canvas  coated  with  white  paint  or  enamel,  similar  to 


156         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

the  material  used  to  cover  eating-house  tables.  On  the 
painted  or  prepared  side  of  this  is  applied  clear  size  or 
varnish,  or  even  a  solution  of  isinglass,  in  a  smooth 
coating,  and  before  the  adhesive  has  time  to  set,  finely 
powdered  aluminium,  or  a  light  metallic  powder,  is  sprayed 
over  the  surface.  When  dry  the  surplus  powder  is  lightly 
brushed  off.  The  silver  paint  sold  for  picture  frames, 
etc.,  is  not  suitable ;  but  a  satisfactory  commercial 
liquid  is  "  Reflex  Silver  Dressing." 

For  daylight  cinematograph  projection  a  linen  or 
calico  sheet  may  be  rendered  transparent  by  wetting, 
but  a  more  effective  way  is  to  use  rather  coarsely  ground 
glass  mounted  in  a  frame.  The  sides  of  the  screen 
facing  the  audience  must  be  shielded  all  round  by  wings 
painted  black,  so  that  the  screen  forms,  as  it  were,  the 
bottom  of  a  large  box  stood  on  edge.  The  cinematograph 
lantern  must  also  be  enclosed  at  the  back  of  the  screen, 
to  exclude  all  extraneous  light  from  the  rear.  With  such 
an  arrangement  daylight  exhibitions  may  be  given. 

For  special  effects,  there  is  what  is  known  as  the 
aerial  screen.  The  "  Bruce  "  aerial  screen  consists  of  a 
white  lath,  turning  on  a  vertical  axis  in  a  plane  parallel 
with  the  lantern  lens  and  in  front  of  a  black  velvet  screen 
or  background,  which  absorbs  all  rays  of  light  not  falling 
on  the  lath.  The  chief  object  of  this  form  of  screen, 
which  is  used  principally  for  still  slides,  is  to  bring  about 
relief,  but  naturally  a  full  stereoscopic  effect  is  not  ob- 
tained in  this  way.  Another  form  of  aerial  screen  con- 
sists of  a  column  of  vapour  rising  from  the  ground  and 
acting  as  a  reflector  of  the  projected  rays  of  light,  but 
it  is  only  useful  for  producing  weird  effects,  in  which 
absolute  definition  is  not  a  necessity. 


SCREENS  157 

By  means  of  the  "  invisible  screen,"  it  is  possible  to 
produce  aerial  images  or  spectra  in  combination  with  real 
actors.  A  method  of  reflection  somewhat  similar  to 
that  used  in  the  old  illusion 
known  as  "  Pepper's  Ghost  " 
is  adopted,  and  it  is 
thought  that  the  well-known 
"  Kinoplastikon  "  illusion  at 
the  Scala  Theatre,  London, 
was  worked  on  this  prin- 
ciple. Fig.  116  shows,  in 
vertical  section,  an  arrange- 
ment which  is  the  subject 
of  a  patent  granted  to 
Oskar  Messter,  in  1910. 
The  invisible  screen  A,  pre- 
ferably of  plate  glass,  corn- 


Fig.  116. — Arrangement  for  Pro- 
ducing Aerial  Image 


pletely  fills  the  stage  open- 
ing B.  In  the  stage  floor 
is  an  opening  c,  under  this  a  projecting  surface  or  lens  D, 
and  under  this  again,  at  the  proper  angle,  is  a  mirror  E 
(either  flat  or  concave),  upon  which  the  cinematograph 
pictures  are  projected  from  the  lens  F  in  the  usual  way. 
It  has  been  stated  that,  to  produce  the  "  Kinoplastikon  " 
illusion,  two  projecting  machines  with  films  taken  to 
give  a  stereoscopic  or  solid  effect  are  used.  The  scenery, 
suggested  at  G,  is  real,  and  the  pictured  actors  seem  to  be 
actual  people  occupying  that  part  of  the  stage  indicated 
at  H. 


CHAPTER    XII 
Operating  the  Projector 

ON  the  management  of  the  light  it  is  unnecessary  to 
say  anything  in  this  chapter,  the  subject  having  been 
fully  treated  in  Chapters  IX.  and  X.  The  operator  must 
take  care  that  his  kit  of  tools  and  accessories  is  complete, 
and  that  it  is  periodically  and  systematically  overhauled. 
An  operator's  kit  will  include  :  A  piece  of  felt,  or 
other  woollen  material,  about  |  yard  square  ;  i  doz. 
resist  surface  slides,  with  writing  needle  ;  i  bottle  of  fine 
lubricating  oil ;  refined  black  -  lead  ;  vaseline  ;  motor 
grease  ;  beeswax  ;  a  3-in.  steel  L-square  ;  twine  ;  strong 
pocket-knife  ;  2  hammers  ;  4  screw-drivers  ;  bradawls  ; 
gimlets  ;  scissors  ;  3  saws — hand,  tenon,  and  hack  ; 
i  cold  chisel ;  3  firmer  chisels,  £,  J,  and  i-in.  ;  fuse  wire  ; 
lead  clippings  ;  i  brace  and  set  of  Jennings'  twist  bits  ; 
6  files — flat,  round,  triangular,  etc.  ;  i  rasp ;  pliers — large 
and  small ;  2-ft.  rule  ;  tape  measure  ;  geared  drill  and 
set  of  bits ;  2  punches  ;  ordinary  oil-can  ;  copper  oil 
feeder ;  various  size  screws,  washers,  and  wire  nails ; 
film-mending  machine  ;  acetate  of  amyl  (or  film  cement) 
and  brush ;  small  painter's  tool ;  stiff  toothbrush  • 
dusters  ;  old  cambric  handkerchiefs  ;  wood  bobbins  and 
plugs  ;  rubber  tape  ;  rubber  solution  ;  Blackley  tape  ; 
a  "  Tinol  "  blow-lamp  and  soldering  set,  or  similar  set ; 
copy  of  Cinematograph  Act,  1909  ;  copy  of  L.C.C.  Regu- 
lations. 

158 


OPERATING   THE    PROJECTOR  159 

The  following  requisites  are  additional  for  limelight : 
2  Beard's  gas  regulators  ;  2  fine  adjustment  valves  ; 
i  doz.  hard  and  i  doz.  soft  limes  ;  several  feet  of  f-in. 
best  black  rubber  tubing  ;  several  feet  of  f-in.  best  red 
rubber  tubing  ;  2  folding  keys  and  i  spanner,  for  gas 
cylinders  ;  i  cylinder  of  oxygen  gas  ;  i  cylinder  of  coal- 
gas  ;  brass  connectors,  adapters,  and  clips ;  lime  borer 
and  tongs  ;  gas  pliers  ;  lead  washers  ;  screw  eyes  ; 
small  i  and  2  sheaf  pulleys  ;  strong  picture  cord  ;  2  gas 
pressure  gauges  ;  sets  of  lenses,  for  both  slides  and  cine- 
matograph films  ;  set  of  lengthening  tubes  ;  copy  of 
L.C.C.  limelight  regulations  ;  plain  glass  slides,  masks, 
and  binding  papers  ;  slide  boxes,  etc. 

Centring  the  Light.— Whether  a  limelight  jet  or 
an  electric  arc  lamp  be  used,  always  centre  the  light 
before  threading  the  film  in  the  machine.  Set  the  light 
so  that  it  evenly  illuminates  the  gate.  Now  look  at  the 
screen.  If  the  light  is  too  near  the  condenser,  the  screen 
will  not  be  brightly  illuminated,  and  there  will  be  dark 
blue  clouds  on  some  portion  of  it.  Draw  the  jet  or  the 
lamp  back  a  little  until  the  light  on  the  screen  is  more 
equally  distributed.  If  the  light  on  the  screen  is  brilliant, 
but  fringed  with  orange-coloured  edges,  the  light  is  too 
far  away  from  the  condenser.  An  orange-coloured  edge 
on  one  side  only,  or  at  the  top  or  bottom,  indicates  that 
the  jet  or  the  lamp  is  displaced  on  one  side,  or  is  too  high 
or  too  low  respectively  (see  illustrations  on  page  113). 
Centre  accordingly. 

When  the  light  is  correctly  centred,  see  that  the 
automatic  safety  shutter  and  the  cut-off  are  both  in 
place  before  putting  the  spool  of  film  on  the  machine. 
Careless  operators  centre  the  light  after  having  put  the 


160         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

spool  of  film  on  the  machine,  with  the  result  that  more 
than  one  disastrous  fire  has  occurred  through  the  loose 
end  of  the  film  having  fallen  down,  and  so  received  the 
heat  rays  during  the  process  of  centring  the  light. 

Winding  the  Film.— Be  sure  that  the  film  is  cor- 
rectly wound  on  the  upper  spool ;  that  is  to  say,  the 
pictures  must  be  upside  down,  and  the  last  one  wound 
on  to  the  spool  first,  so  that  the  full  spool  will  have  the 
first  picture  at  the  beginning  of  the  film  when  com- 
mencing. And  not  only  that,  the  gelatine  side  of  the 
film  must  always  be  inwards  and  towards  the  light  when 
threaded  in  the  machine  ;  the  shiny  side  of  the  film  will 
consequently  be  towards  the  screen.  Otherwise  the 
pictures  will  be  reversed  on  the  screen,  and  all  the  let- 
tering of  the  titles  will  read  backwards,  while  the  people 
in  the  pictures  will  be  left-handed.  There  is  no  ex- 
ception to  this  rule  when  pictures  are  shown  in  front  of 
the  screen. 

Of  course,  with  a  transparent  screen  and  the  machine 
behind  it,  the  film  must  be  reversed  accordingly,  in  order 
to  show  correctly.  However,  the  usual  way,  and  the  best, 
is  to  show  the  pictures  in  front  of  the  screen,  which 
always  gives  better  results. 

Threading  the  Film. — Having  centred  the  light 
correctly  and  closed  the  cut-off,  place  the  full  spool  on 
the  upper  arm  of  the  machine,  and  draw  off  about  i  yd. 
of  film  for  threading  through  the  apparatus  (see  Figs.  117 
and  118),  as  follows  : — Thread  the  film  round  the  roller  A. 
Then  round  and  under  the  sprocket-wheel  B,  seeing  that 
the  perforations  are  properly  engaged  in  the  pins,  and  the 
film  is  kept  on  the  sprocket-wheel  by  the  double  roller  c 
of  the  cradle.  Open  the  door  of  the  film  trap  D,  place 


OPERATING    THE    PROJECTOR          161 

the  film  in  the  groove,  leaving  a  slack  loop  E  above  it. 
Shut  the  door  and  see  that  it  does  not  jam  the  film,  which 
must  work  freely.  Then  pass  the  film  round  the  dog 
movement  F.  Leave  sufficient  slack  to  pass  round, 
without  too  much  strain,  when  the  eccentric  roller  or 
beater  is  down.  Some  machines  are  without  roller  A, 
and  the  film  passes  direct  to  the  sprocket-wheel  B. 


Fig.  118.— Threading   Film 
for  Maltese  Cross  Move- 


Fig.  117.— Threading  Filn 
for  "Dog"  or  "Beater1 
Movement 


In  Fig.  118  the  film  on  emerging  from  the  trap  D  is 
passed  round  the  Maltese  cross  movement  sprocket- 
wheel  F,  and  a  slack  loop  left  below  it.  In  both  cases 
the  film  is  now  passed  over  the  bottom  sprocket-wheel  G, 
taking  care  that  the  perforations  are  properly  engaging 
the  pins,  and  the  film  is  kept  in  position  by  the  double 
rollers  H  of  the  cradle.  Then  pass  it  under  the  roller  j 
when  so  fitted,  and  on  to  the  hub  of  the  bottom  spool, 
L 


162         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

where  it  is  secured  by  the  brass  clip.  Give  the  bottom 
spool  one  or  two  turns  so  that  the  end  of  the  film  may 
be  secured  firmly  by  one  or  two  laps  on  itself.  There  is  an 
improved  attachment  in  which  the  end  of  the  film  is 
gripped  by  a  clip  on  one  end  of  a  flexible  band  of  leather, 
while  the  other  end  of  the  band  is  fastened  to  the  hub 
of  the  spool. 

The  "  Take-up  "  Mechanism. — The  reliable  working 
of  the  projector  also  greatly  depends  upon  the  take-up  or 
driving  mechanism  of  the  bottom  spool.  In  the  older 
make  of  machines  a  spring  band  is  used  to  drive  the 
bottom  spool.  It  is  sometimes  rather  difficult  to  get  just 
the  right  tension  of  this  spring  band  to  suit  the  condition 
of  the  grooved  wheels  on  which  it  runs.  Any  dust  or 
grit  on  the  band  or  in  the  grooves  of  the  wheels  would 
increase  the  pull  on  the  film,  while  a  drop  of  oil  might 
cause  a  slip,  which  would  prevent  the  take-up  acting 
sufficiently.  Besides,  when  the  take-up  spool  has  only 
a  few  coils  of  film  wound  on,  the  pull  on  the  film  is  greater 
than  when  it  becomes  full.  Hence  the  tension  on  the 
spring  band  must  be  adjusted  to  suit  both  conditions. 
This  is  very  important,  because  if  not  thoroughly  at- 
tended to  it  may  be  found  that,  after  having  proceeded 
with  the  exhibition  for  a  minute  or  two,  the  film  has 
not  taken  up  on  the  bottom  spool.  Consequently  there 
m?.y  be  either  a  few  yards  of  loose  film  on  the  floor,  or 
else  making  its  way  through  the  projection  opening  of 
the  box  or  chamber.  Should  this  occur,  stop  at  once  by 
cutting  off  the  light  before  proceeding  to  adjust  the  take- 
up.  If  necessary,  switch  on  the  auditorium  lights,  and 
begin  again.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  tension  is  too 
great  it  may  cause  harder  work  in  turning  the  handle, 


OPERATING    THE    PROJECTOR  163 

and  any  excess  of  strength  might  damage  the  perforations 
of  the  film  (see  also  p.  73). 

In  the  newer  make  of  machines,  the  take-up  spool 
is  driven  by  gear  chains  and  bevel  wheels,  which  are  more 
satisfactory.  It  is  also  important  to  see  that  the  spring 
rollers  on  the  spool  boxes,  where  the  film  runs  between, 
act  properly,  and  are  kept  free  from  dust  and  oil. 

Masking  and  Projecting. — When  threading  the  film, 
always  endeavour  to  frame  the  picture  at  the  gate  cor- 
rectly, in  order  as  far  as  possible  to  avoid  using  the  masking 
adjustment  handle,  which  racks  the  film  up  and  down. 
Practice  will  enable  this  to  be  done  without  any  difficulty. 
It  is  certainly  better  to  show  a  complete  picture,  with 
little  or  no  perceptible  racking  movement,  on  the  screen 
at  once,  than  the  halves  of  two  pictures  which  require 
racking  up  or  down,  and  then  up  or  down  again  or  down 
and  up,  until  they  are  correctly  framed.  Avoid  sloven- 
liness and  slipshod  ways  in  this  as  well  as  in  other  mat- 
ters. Generally  speaking,  each  new  film  will  require  a 
little  re-masking  as  it  comes  into  view,  because  they  some- 
times vary  in  make,  or  there  may  be  a  slight  shrinkage 
due  to  temperature  effects. 

At  the  end  of  the  picture,  as  soon  as  the  film  leaves 
the  spool  box  and  before  it  reaches  the  gate,  simultane- 
ously close  the  cut-off,  and  stop  turning  the  handle. 
At  the  same  moment  the  automatic  safety  shutter  should 
fall  into  place,  and  so  effectually  cut  off  both  the  heat 
and  light  rays  emanating  from  the  lantern. 

Turning  the  handle  should  be  done  from  the  wrist 
only,  and  not  by  moving  the  arm.  The  movement  must 
be  perfectly  smooth  and  regular,  and  without  the  slightest 
degree  of  thrust  or  pull  on  the  handle.  Avoid  machines 


164         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

with  long  handles,  as  these  require  too  much  arm  move- 
ment, which  is  not  comfortable,  especially  in  long  shows. 
Besides,  a  short  handle,  worked  from  the  wrist,  must  of 
necessity  run  the  machine  more  smoothly  than  if  a  long 
one  were  used.  Insist  upon  a  short  handle  being  sub- 
stituted for  the  long  one,  whether  there  is  an  electric 
motor  to  do  most  of  the  work  or  not.  Experience  is 
the  best  teacher  in  this,  as  well  as  in  other  matters. 

When  two  or  more  pictures  are  wound  on  the  same 
spool,  it  is  usual  to  cement  about  12  in.  or  18  in.  of  white 
or  plain  film  in  between  each  picture,  so  as  to  form  one 
continuous  band  of  film,  and  also  to  indicate  the  end  of 
the  picture.  At  the  end  of  the  first  picture,  pause  a  few 
seconds  before  proceeding  with  the  second  one,  and 
likewise  with  any  others  that  may  be  on  the  same 
spool. 

When  the  last  picture  on  the  first  spool  has  been 
shown,  switch  on  the  auditorium  lights  for  the  interval. 
Also  switch  off  the  lantern  arc  lamp.  During  the  interval 
open  both  spool  boxes,  take  off  the  lower  spool,  which  now 
holds  the  pictures  that  have  been  shown,  and  place  it  in 
the  carrying  box  outside  the  operating  box  or  chamber ; 
see  that  the  box  is  closed  and  in  a  place  where  its  contents 
cannot  be  interfered  with.  Take  the  empty  spool  off  the 
top  arm,  and  place  it  on  the  bottom  one.  Put  the  next 
full  spool  of  pictures  which  are  to  be  shown,  and  which 
have  been  correctly  wound  previous  to  the  beginning  of 
the  show,  on  the  top  arm,  and  proceed  to  thread  in  the 
film  as  before.  When  ready,  having  "  struck  the  arc  " 
again,  see  that  all  is  in  order  to  proceed  with  the  next 
spool,  switch  off  the  auditorium  lights,  and  project  the 
films  as  before. 


OPERATING   THE   PROJECTOR  165 

Reducing  Flicker.  —  Steady  pictures  depend  on 
two  conditions,  a  perfect  film  and  a  perfect  machine,  in- 
cluding the  stand.  Without  a  perfect  film  no  machine 
will  project  a  steady  picture  ;  while,  on  the  other  hand, 
with  the  most  perfect  film  obtainable,  a  steady  picture 
cannot  be  projected  on  the  screen  without  a  machine  that 
is  thoroughly  accurate  in  all  its  vital  parts  and  most  rigidly 
supported  by  a  well-made  stand.  For  instance,  the 
slightest  movement  or  vibration  of  the  machine  or  its  stand 
will  be  magnified  10,000  times  on  the  screen.  An  error 
of  even  5^  in.  in  the  adjustment  of  either  the  film,  the 
sprocket-wheels,  or  the  Maltese  cross  movement,  will 
produce  with  a  6-in.  focus  lens  an  unsteady  or  dancing 
movement  of  the  picture  on  the  screen  to  the  extent 
of  approximately  i  in.  at  a  distance  of  100  ft.  Hence  it 
will  be  obvious  that  the  naturalness  of  the  image  on  the 
screen  will  greatly  depend  on  the  accuracy  and  steadiness 
of  the  machine,  and  the  constant  and  regular  speed  at 
which  the  film  is  passed  through  a  properly  illuminated 
gate. 

As  a  rule,  the  higher  the  speed  the  less  is  the  flicker. 
But  the  flicker,  consequent  on  the  rapid  substitution  of 
one  picture  for  another,  must  be  reduced  to  a  minimum. 
In  order  to  reduce  flicker  and  a  misty  appearance  of 
the  image  on  the  screen,  a  revolving  shutter  is  used,  as 
already  explained,  which  automatically  cuts  off  the  light 
as  each  picture  is  moved  into  view,  and  then  allows  the 
light  to  pass  and  illuminate  it  before  again  cutting  off 
the  light  for  the  moving  into  view  of  the  next  picture. 
Revolving  shutters  are  of  as  many  different  makes 
as  the  various  opinions  of  their  several  advocates.  In 
the  older  make  of  machine  the  revolving  shutter  is  placed 


166         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

in  front  of  the  projection  lens.  In  this  arrangement  the 
ratio  of  light,  or  exposure  of  the  picture,  is  equal  to  about 
5°  to  55  per  cent,  as  compared  with  a  duration  of  dark- 
ness or  non-exposure  on  the  screen,  equal  to  about  45  to 
50  per  cent.  A  greater  exposure  than  the  above  with  the 
ordinary  disc-type  shutter  would  be  at  the  expense  of 
brilliancy,  and  would  blur  the  picture  or  destroy  its 
sharpness,  on  account  of  the  film  being  exposed  during 
the  period  of  movement.  This  may  occur  through  the 
incorrect  adjustment  of  the  revolving  shutter,  or  by  the 
bad  construction  of  the  shutter  itself,  which  opens  and 
closes  the  light  aperture  across  its  diagonal  or  greatest 
length,  which  is  about  i£  in.  from  corner  to  corner  (see 
Fig.  119). 

Again,  a  long-focus  lens  must  be  farther  away  from 
the  film  than  one  of  short  focus  ;  hence  the  revolving 
shutter  in  front  of  the  lens  must  be  adjusted  accordingly. 
To  do  this,  loosen  the  set-screw  on  the  hub  of  the  shutter, 
take  the  shutter  off  the  spindle,  and  replace  it  reversed. 
Thus  the  extra  length  of  the  shutter  collar  will  give  the 
necessary  adjustment  required  by  the  longer-focus  lens. 
In  the  case  of  a  very  short  focus  lens  it  will  be  necessary, 
in  order  to  obtain  the  best  result,  to  push  the  lantern 
closer  up  behind  the  machine. 

Should  the  violet  gelatine  blade,  if  one  is  fitted, 
become  broken,  it  is  always  advisable  to  replace  it  with 
a  new  one,  because  it  cannot  be  gainsaid  that  by  its  use 
flicker  of  the  picture  is  greatly  reduced. 

In  a  large  number  of  modern  machines  the  revolving 
shutter  is  placed  behind  the  projection  lens  and  nearer 
the  gate.  This  position  is,  from  an  optical  point  of  view, 
the  correct  one,  because  it  more  nearly  approaches  one 


OPERATING    THE    PROJECTOR          167 

of  the  conjugate  foci  of  the  beam  of  light  transmitted  by 
the  condenser.  Besides,  the  revolving  shutter,  being 
smaller  and  opening  and  closing  the  light  aperture  across 
its  narrowest  width,  has  also  two  double  blades  of  a  more 
or  less  scissors-like  form,  which  open  and  close  from  both 
sides  at  the  same  time,  and  thereby  further  reduce 
the  shutter-travel  to  one-half  on  both  the  opening 
and  closing  movements,  thus  making  the  period  of 
opening  and  closing  cover  a  shutter-travel  of  only 
|  in.  (see  Fig.  120),  as  compared  with  the  diagonal 
shutter-travel  of  ij  in.,  or  three  times  as  great,  in  the 
old  disc-type  shutter. 

Another  advantage  is,  that  the  new  kind  of  revolving 
shutter  does  not  change  position  with  relation  to  the  light 


Figs.  119  and  120. — Gate  Apertures,  showing  Long  and  Short 
Shutter-travels  respectively 

aperture  while  framing  the  picture  in  the  gate.  Hence  a 
reduction  of  nearly  50  per  cent,  in  the  non-exposure,  and 
a  corresponding  percentage  of  gain  in  duration  of  ex- 
posure of  the  picture  reduces  the  amount  of  flicker  in  an 
equal  proportion,  and  consequently  gives  a  much  brighter, 
sharper,  and  more  brilliant  picture,  without  any  appre- 
ciable vibration,  as  compared  with  the  almost  continual 
flicker  observable  in  many  pictures  projected  by  machines 
having  the  old  form  of  shutter.  Therefore,  the  elimination 
of  flicker  in  the  picture  on  the  screen  depends  greatly  on 
the  degree  of  non-exposure  as  compared  with  the  period 
of  exposure. 


168         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

Gleaning  and  Oiling  the  Machine. — The  cinemato- 
graph is  really  a  wonderful  machine,  which  requires 
careful  handling  if  it  is  to  do  its  work  properly.  Run- 
ning as  it  does  at  a  great  speed,  some  parts  of  the  mech- 
anism must  eventually  wear  out  in  time,  especially 
so  in  continuous  shows,  day  after  day,  without  cessation, 
throughout  the  year.  Therefore,  it  is  of  primary  im- 
portance that  the  machine  should  be  well  cleaned  and 
lubricated,  at  least  once  a  day.  The  best  oil  only  should 
be  used.  Avoid  cheap  lubricating  oils  destitute  of  body. 

One  of  the  best  lubricants  of  all  is  neat's-f  oot  oil  which 
has  been  kept  for  some  time,  and  to  which  some  lead 
clippings  or  filings  have  been  added,  in  order  to  kill 
the  acid.  The  clear  portion  only  should  be  used.  This 
can  be  separated  from  the  sediment  or  thicker  portion 
by  decantation  and  filtration  through  filtering  or  blotting 
paper.  One  drip  of  this  oil  will  go  farther  than  three 
times  as  much  of  any  other  lubricant.  The  next  best 
is  pure  sperm  oil,  or  a  good  make  of  sewing  machine  oil. 

A  new  machine  should  have  a  few  hours'  trial,  in  order 
to  "  run  in  "  the  bearings.  It  should  also  be  tested  for 
"  end  shake."  Little  or  no  "  end  shake  "  shows  that  the 
bearings  are  too  tight.  A  tight  bearing  may  "  fire  "  or 
"  seize  "  during  the  first  few  hours'  run,  which  would  be 
rather  awkward  if  the  show  were  on.  End  shake  has 
been  defined  as  "  the  amount  of  play  that  can  be  felt  on 
taking  hold  of  a  spindle  and  pushing  and  pulling  it  in 
the  direction  of  its  length."  An  old  machine  may  run 
hard  through  having  been  neglected.  If  it  is  very  much 
clogged,  wash  out  the  bearings  with  paraffin  oil  and  keep 
on  turning  the  handle  until  the  machine  works  freely. 
Then,  after  wiping  up  all  the  dark  oil  which  has  exuded 


OPERATING   THE   PROJECTOR          169 

during  the  cleaning  process,  oil  with  the  best  oil  only. 
In  some  machines  a  little  motor  grease  may  be  used 
advantageously,  where  a  grease  box  is  fitted  for  the 
purpose. 

The  cog-wheels  should  be  lubricated  with  a  little  dry 
black-lead,  which  is  both  cleaner  and  better  than  oil  for 
these  parts.  This  will  reduce  noise  to  a  minimum,  and 
also  prevent  a  good  deal  of  "  wear  and  tear." 

The  film  trap  also  needs  special  attention  daily.  It 
must  be  perfectly  free  from  any  small  portions  of  emulsion 
which  may  collect  through  coming  off  the  film.  If 
necessary,  brush  and  scrape  the  bow  springs,  then  give 
them  a  smear  of  vaseline,  in  order  that  the  film  may  run 
smoothly,  and  so  prevent,  as  far  as  possible,  the  emulsion 
from  being  rubbed  off.  The  springs  should  have  suffi- 
cient tension  to  prevent  over-shooting  of  the  film.  To 
test  this,  place  a  film  in  the  machine  and  watch  the 
screen.  Turn  the  handle  slowly  and  notice  the  general 
position  of  the  picture,  then  turn  more  quickly.  If  the 
picture  rises  slightly  on  the  screen,  that  shows  there  is 
insufficient  tension  of  the  springs  in  the  film  trap.  Bend 
the  springs  outwards  a  bit  and  tighten  up  the  screws. 
If  the  springs  have  worn  thin  and  are  consequently  weak, 
renew  them,  because  when  they  have  been  worn  thin  the 
sharp  edge  is  apt  to  cut  the  margin  of  the  film  and  so 
render  it  useless  by  causing  a  break  with  considerable 
risk  of  fire,  especially  if  a  portion  of  the  cut  film  be  left 
in  the  gate  for  a  few  seconds.  With  the  "  skate  "  form 
of  gate  spring,  however,  there  is  not  so  much  risk  of  the 
film  being  cut.  In  both  cases  the  steadiness  of  the  picture 
on  the  screen  will  greatly  depend  upon  the  tension  of  the 
film  trap  springs. 


CHAPTER    XIII 
What  to  do  if  the  Film  Fires 

SHOULD  the  film  fire  in  the  gate  of  the  projector,  always 
remember  that  the  first  thing  to  do  is  to  keep  cool. 
Don't  be  in  a  hurry.  Know  exactly  what  you  should 
do,  then  do  it,  deliberately  and  promptly,  entirely  without 
flurry.  This  is  just  where  the  difference  comes  in  between 
a  well- trained  operator  and  a  mere  "  handle-turner." 

First,  switch  on  the  auditorium  lights  with  the  left 
hand,  and  with  the  right  pick  up  the  wet  blanket  and  beat 
out  the  flame.  Simultaneously,  of  course,  step  off  the 
pedal  upon  which  you  were  standing  while  operating, 
and  so  release  the  shutters  which  automatically  close  the 
projection  and  spy  holes  of  the  box  or  chamber.  The 
switching  on  of  the  auditorium  lights  gives  the  pianist 
the  cue  to  continue  playing,  and  so  keeps  the  attention  of 
the  audience  while  the  operator  looks  after  their  interests, 
although  they  would  and  should  know  nothing  about  it. 
Having  put  out  the  flame,  which  should  be  a  mere  nothing 
in  a  properly-constructed  and  well-cared-for  machine, 
switch  off  the  arc,  and  see  that  the  film  trap  is  clear. 
Then  proceed,  without  losing  a  second  of  time,  to  thread  in 
the  remaining  film,  just  as  if  nothing  had  happened,  and 
go  on  with  the  show  exactly  as  before  the  accident. 

In  order  to  enable  the  operator  to  do  so  efficiently,  he 
should  always  keep  at  hand  two  or  three  empty  spools 
170 


WHAT  TO  DO  IF  THE  FILM  FIRES    171 

hanging  on  nails  under  the  spy  hole  of  the  box  or  chamber. 
It  is  then  a  simple  matter  to  whip  out  the  used  spool 
from  the  lower  magazine  and  insert  an  empty  one  for  re- 
threading. 

In  addition  to  the  wet  blanket  ordered  by  the  authori- 
ties, it  is  always  advisable  to  have  an  extra  one,  which 
should  be  ready  to  hand  in  case  of  an  emergency.  Keep 
this  on  the  stand  or  base-board,  and  see  that  it  is  there 
ready  for  use  at  any  and  all  tunes.  Don't  keep  it  in  your 
kit-bag  while  operating. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  careful  operator  should  have 
neither  a  film  fire  nor  even  a  break  at  any  time.  Such  a 
contingency  ought  not,  and  should  not,  occur  at  all.  It 
will  not  occur  if  the  operator  has  properly  examined  and 
mended  the  films,  and  kept  the  machine  clean,  well 
lubricated,  and  in  good  working  order — in  short,  if  he 
has  conscientiously  done  his  duty,  and  cheerfully  com- 
plied with  the  regulations,  both  written  and  unwritten. 

Fire  Regulations. — The  reader  should  study  the 
requirements  of  the  Act  and  Regulations  given  on  later 
pages  ;  it  is  convenient  here  to  summarise  those  regu- 
lations relating  to  fire  and  its  prevention.  When  a 
portable  operating  box  is  used  it  should  be  constructed  of 
No.  16  gauge  sheet  iron,  and  be  not  less  than  6  ft.  6  in.  x 
5  ft.  x  4  ft.  6  in.  in  dimensions,  on  angle-iron  frame, 
well  fitted,  and  lined  with  sheet  asbestos ;  and  there 
should  be  a  self-closing  door  opening  outwards,  with 
flange  inside,  leaving  the  door  flush  and  smoke-tight. 
There  may  not  be  more  than  two  openings  for  each 
lantern  in  front,  having  reasonably  heavy  shutters, 
working  in  iron  guides,  dropping  freely  and  smoke-tight, 
held  up  by  a  light  cord  and  released  instantly  from  out- 


172         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

side  or  inside,  either  or  both,  when  they  close  automati- 
cally ;  bushed  and  insulated  openings  for  the  electric 
cables  ;  and  the  floor  shall,  if  boarded,  be  covered  with 
asbestos  or  other  fire-resisting  material. 

Resistances  and  transformers  are  preferably  kept 
outside,  or  in  another  room. 

The  portable  box  is  being  rapidly  replaced  by  a 
permanent  chamber,  built  of  brick  or  concrete,  or  with  a 
lining  of  fireproof  slabs  not  less  than  3  in.  thick,  having  a 
self-closing  door  and  shutters  fitted  in  a  similar  manner  to 
those  in  the  portable  box. 

The  fire  appliances  required  are  :  Two  buckets  of 
water,  one  bucket  of  sand,  and  a  wet  blanket. 

Except  the  operator  and  his  assistant,  no  other 
person  is  allowed  to  be  in  the  box  with  them  while  operat- 
ing, unless  the  local  authority  requires  the  presence  of  a 
fireman. 

Operators  must  not  allow  other  persons  to  perform 
their  duties  or  to  work  the  machine. 

Smoking  is  strictly  prohibited  at  all  times  in  the 
operating  box  or  chamber  ;  also  in  the  winding-room, 
when  re-winding,  mending,  and  manipulating  celluloid 
films,  in  any  way  whatsoever. 

Only  the  spool  of  film  actually  being  exhibited 
must  be  in  the  operating  box.  Other  spools  of  film 
must  be  kept  outside,  each  one  being  brought  in 
separately  as  required,  and  then  placed  outside  after 
exhibition. 

The  regulating  resistance  must  be  placed  above  the 
level  of,  and  behind,  the  machine  in  such  a  position  that 
should  the  take-up  fail  to  act,  the  film  could  not  reach 
the  resistance  coils. 


WHAT  TO  DO  IF  THE  FILM  FIRES    173 

The  film  must  not  be  allowed  to  collect  on  the  floor 
under  any  circumstances  whatsoever. 

The  lantern  shall  be  placed  on  firm  supports  con- 
structed of  fire-resisting  material. 

The  lamp  or  jet  shall  stand  on  an  iron  tray  .having  a 
vertical  edge  at  least  i  in.  in  depth. 

A  blank  metal  slide  must  always  be  kept  in  the  slide- 
carrier,  and  in  the  aperture  nearest  to  the  operator,  in 
order  that  the  light  may  be  cut  off  by  pushing  in,  and 
not  by  pulling  out  the  carrier  slide. 

Where  possible,  the  electric  arc  light  shall  be  adopted 
as  the  illuminant. 

Circuits  on  which  there  is  a  pressure  exceeding  250 
volts  between  the  poles  or  from  pole  to  earth  shall  not 
be  allowed  in  connection  with  the  apparatus. 

The  double-pole  switch  must  be  placed  in  such  a 
position  that  the  operator  can  cut  off  the  electric  current 
without  leaving  the  machine. 

No  waste  paper  or  rubbish  of  any  kind  must  be 
allowed  to  accumulate  in  the  operating  box  or  chamber, 
which  must  always  be  kept  clean  and  tidy. 


CHAPTER   XIV 
Cleaning  and  Repairing  Films 

FILMS  that  have  seen  long  or  careless  service  will  be 
found  to  show  scratches  and  dirt,  and,  perhaps,  portions 
may  be  slightly  torn,  or  have  broken  perforations.  Such 
defects  can,  as  a  rule,  be  easily  rectified  or  repaired. 

For  cleaning  the  films  and  removing  scratches  a  bench 
or  table  is  required,  close  to  a  window  and  in  a  room  with- 
out fire  or  naked  light.  The  table  should  be  covered 
with  clean  white  paper,  stretched  tightly  over  and  se- 
cured at  the  edges  with  drawing-pins.  There  will  also  be 
needed  a  few  small  pieces  of  soft  sponge  and  a  bottle  of 
methylated  spirit.  The  end  of  the  film  is  laid  lengthwise 
along  the  bench,  celluloid  side  upwards,  and  is  rubbed 
gently  with  a  sponge  very  slightly  moistened  with  methy- 
lated spirit.  This  will  clear  out  fine  grit  from  the 
scratches,  making  them  far  less  visible,  and  will  also 
remove  dirty  marks.  The  whole  length  is  done  in  turn, 
holding  the  film  up  to  the  light  now  and  then  to  note 
progress. 

The  celluloid  side  having  been  treated,  next  the 
emulsion  side  may  be  examined.  This  is  dealt  with  in 
the  same  manner,  but  with  much  greater  care,  as  it  is 
easier  to  injure.  It  should  only  be  rubbed  very  gently, 
with  scarcely  any  spirit  on  the  sponge,  and  there  is  no 
need  to  go  all  over  it,  but  merely  on  those  parts 
that  are  dirty  or  show  marks.  The  film  should  be 
174 


GLEANING  AND  REPAIRING  FILMS    175 

handled  throughout  by  the  edges  alone,  to  avoid  finger 
imprints.  Any  traces  of  grease  or  oil  may  be  removed 
separately  with  a  little  petrol  or  benzoline.  But  be 
exceptionally  careful  when  using  them.  The  fire  risk 
is  considerable. 

In  many  cases,  a  specially  made  film-cleaner  will  pay 
for  itself.  A  number  of  patterns  are  available,  the 
Brockliss-Seaborne  (Fig.  121)  being  excellent.  In  the 
illustration,  A  and  B  indicate  wiping  pads  which  remove 


Fig.  121.— Brockliss-Seaborne  Film  Cleaner 

the  superfluous  moisture  (benzoline)  from  the  film  before 
it  reaches  the  brushes  c  and  D,  these  being  soft  leather 
cleaners.  Drums  E  and  F  are  mounted  on  a  rocking 
lever,  and  press  the  film  upon  the  cleaners,  while  brushes 
G  and  H  are  chamois  leather  polishers.  Drums  j  and  K, 
mounted  on  a  rocking  lever,  press  the  film  upon  the 
polishers. 

Conspicuous  transparent  holes  or  scratches  in  the 
pictures  themselves  may  as  well  be  "  spotted "  out. 
For  this  purpose,  water-colour  is  mixed  on  a  palette  to 


176         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

the  exact  tint  of  the  film,  adding  a  slight  trace  of  gum. 
A  convenient  film-retouching  desk  may  be  extemporised 
by  supporting  a  piece  of  plate-glass  on  a  couple  of  fairly 
thick  books,  one  at  each  side.  When  the  film  is  laid 
on  the  glass,  the  white  paper  on  the  bench  beneath  will 
reflect  light  through  it  and  show  clearly  where  work  is 
needed.  The  colour  is  applied  with  a  finely-pointed  sable 
brush,  using  a  light  dotting  or  stippling  touch,  and 
keeping  the  brush  nearly  dry. 

Having  cleaned  and  spotted  the  film,  attention  may 
be  given  to  any  torn  portions  or  broken  perforations.  In- 
deed, films  should  be  examined  every  time  they  are  re- 
wound. This  is  done  by  allowing  the  edges,  not  the 
faces,  of  the  film  to  run  through  the  hand  in  the  course 
of  re-winding.  Any  gaps  or  tears  in  the  edges  and  per- 
forations of  the  film  must  be  cut  clean  out,  even  at  the 
sacrifice  of  a  few  of  the  pictures. 

In  Fig.  122,  a  typical  example,  the  film  is  torn  partly 
across  at  A,  while  one  of  the  perforations  is  broken  at  B. 
It  could  not  be  run  through  the  projector  in  its  present 
state  without  a  practical  certainty  of  further  damage 
and  possibly  a  dangerous  stoppage.  To  effect  a  repair, 
it  is  necessary  to  sacrifice  one  picture  at  the  defective 
portion  and  to  join  the  film  up  again.  The  places  at 
which  the  cuts  should  be  made  are  indicated  in  Fig.  123, 
which  shows  the  divided  film.  It  will  be  seen  that  one 
cut  is  made  straight  across  at  the  bottom  of  the  damaged 
picture,  while  the  other  is  made  from  |  in.  to  £  in.  below 
the  top.  The  end  having  the  narrow  strip  A  (Fig.  123)  .is 
laid  gelatine  side  upwards  on  the  bench,  and  with  a  knife 
and  straight-edge  the  gelatine  is  scratched  through  along 
the  line  c  D — that  is  to  say,  at  the  bottom  of  the  nearest 


CLEANING  AND  REPAIRING  FILMS     17? 

picture.  The  strip  A  should  be  wetted  (by  the  worker's 
tongue,  or  in  any  other  convenient  way),  when  in  a  few 
seconds  the  gelatine  can  be  scraped  away,  leaving  clear 
celluloid.  To  cement  the  two  ends,  a  camel-hair  brush 
and  some  amyl  acetate — a  liquid  smelling  strongly  of 
pears  and  costing  about  3d.  per  oz. — will  be  required.  The 


Fi«.  122  FU.  123  Ffc.  12S 

Fig.  122. — Tom  Film  with  Broken  Perforations. 
Fig.  123.— Method  of  Cutting  Film.  Fig.  124.— 
Repaired  Film,  showing  Join.  Fig.  125. — 
Another  Way  of  Mending  Perforations. 

end  B  of  the  film  (Fig.  123)  is  laid  celluloid  side  upwards 
on  the  bench,  and  a  width  of  about  J  in.  is  well  brushed 
over  with  amyl  acetate  ;  the  liquid  is  also  applied  to  the 
narrow  strip  A  on  the  other  portion  of  the  film,  which 
should  be  placed  gelatine  side  upwards  on  the  bench. 
The  end  B  of  the  film  is  then  turned  over  and  laid  without 
delay  on  the  narrow  strip  A,  taking  care  that  the  perfora- 
tions are  the  proper  distance  apart  and  that  the  junction 


iyS         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

is  true  and  straight.  The  effect  of  the  amyl  acetate, 
which  is  a  solvent  of  celluloid,  is  to  soften  the  two  ends 
so  that  they  readily  adhere.  The  junction  is  kept  well 
pressed  for  about  a  couple  of  minutes,  and  the  film  is 
finally  left  for  about  ten  minutes  to  harden.  The  ap- 
pearance of  the  mended  film  is  shown  by  Fig.  124,  in 
which  the  join  is  indicated  by  a  dotted  line. 

Another  form  of  repair — not  recommended  by  the 
writer — is  occasionally  used  when  a  perforation  only  is 


Fig.  126.— Hughes  Film  Mender 

broken,  without  the  film  being  torn.  The  edge  alone  is 
mended  by  cementing  on  at  the  back  of  the  film  a  strip 
of  celluloid  containing  perforations.  It  is  advisable  to 
do  this  equally  at  each  side,  as  shown  by  the  dotted  lines 
in  Fig.  125,  or  the  film  might  run  unevenly  and  perhaps 
jump  the  sprockets. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  amyl  acetate  forms  a  cement 
by  dissolving  the  surfaces  of  the  pieces  of  film  to  which 
it  is  applied.  Many  workers  prefer  to  use  a  cement 


GLEANING  AND  REPAIRING  FILMS     179 

already  prepared.  This  may  be  bought,  or  it  may  be 
made  by  adding  to  I  oz.  of  the  amyl  acetate  a  strip  of 
film  about  6  in.  long,  clean  and  free  from  emulsion.  Be 
sure  the  strip  of  film  is  clean,  then  cut  it  up,  and  place 
in  the  solvent.  It  soon  dissolves,  when  it  is  ready  for  use, 
being  applied  with  a  camel-hair  brush  as  before. 

Another  good  cement,  but  one  that  dries  more  slowly, 
is  a  solution  of  a  6-in.  strip  of  film  in  a  mixture  of  f  oz.  of 
acetone  and  |  oz.  of  amyl 
acetate.  If  too  thin,  add 
more  celluloid ;  if  too 
thick,  add  more  solvent. 

When  repairing  non- 
flam  film,  this  not  being 
soluble  in  amyl  acetate, 
chloroform  is  the  solvent 
to  be  employed.  This 
may  be  used  alone,  as 
already  explained  ;  but 
owing  to  its  volatile  nature  it  is  better  converted  into 
cement  by  adding  fragments  of  the  non-flam  film  until 
the  proper  consistency  is  obtained,  a  matter  that  a 
few  simple  experiments  will  easily  decide.  Special 
cements  for  non-flam  films  are  obtainable. 

Special  film  menders  are  obtainable  in  variety.  Most 
of  them  are  of  the  hinge  pattern  (see  Figs.  126  and  127), 
the  two  outer  hinges  holding  the  two  ends  of  the  film 
in  exact  position,  the  middle  portion  being  closed  down 
upon  the  completed  join. 


Fig.  127.— The  Waltnrdaw  Fill 
Mender 


CHAPTER    XV 
Film  Winders 

WHILE  a  film  is  running  through  the  projector  it  is 
being  wound  wrong  end  first  on  the  take-up  spool,  and 
obviously  before  it  can  be  exhibited  again  it  must  be 
entirely  re-wound.  This  takes  a  good  deal  of  time  with 
any  length  of  film,  unless  a  proper 
winding  appliance  is  at  hand. 
There  is  a  variety  of  such  appli- 
ances obtainable  (see  Figs.  128  and 
131),  or  one  can  be  made  by  the 
operator  himself  quite  cheaply  if  a 
couple  of  suitable  toothed  wheels 
are  available. 

Fig.  129  is  a  front  elevation  and 
Fig.  130  a  sectional  end  elevation, 
the  lettering  being  the  same  in 
each.  The  support  A  may  consist 
of  two  pieces  of  f-in.  hard  wood 
screwed  together  at  a  right  angle. 
The  toothed  wheels  B  and  c  are  in 
the  ratio  of  4  to  i,  or  thereabouts  ; 
thus  one  might  have  sixty -four 
teeth  and  the  other  sixteen  teeth. 
Fig.  128.— Kineto  Com-  Holes  are  bored  in  the  support  for 
w"e<J  Film  "»d  Spool  the  |-in.  diameter  spindles,  and  it  is 

Winder   (Double-arm    ,  .. 

Pattern)  better  if  these  holes  are  bushed  with 

180 


FILM   WINDERS  181 

pieces  of  brass  tube.  A  handle  L  runs  free  on  a  short  steel 
pin  screwed  in  the  wheel  B.  The  spindles  may  be  of  steel ; 
but  it  is  quite  practicable  to  make  them  of  hard  wood  if 
preferred.  That  for  the  large  wheel,  seen  at  D,  is  2  in. 
long,  while  that  for  the  small  wheel,  shown  at  E,  is  4$  in. 
long,  and  is  slit  at  the  free  end  to  take  a  drop  catch  F. 
The  wheels  are  secured  with  linen-pins  driven  through 
holes  bored  in  the  spindles.  To  keep  the  spool  in  position 
and  make  it  revolve  with  the  spindle,  a  fairly  strong 


Figs.  129  and  130.— Details  of  Home-made  Film  Winder 

spiral  spring  H  and  a  loose  circular  metal  plate  I,  2  J  in. 
in  diameter,  are  provided. 

The  spindle  G  for  the  spool  that  requires  re-winding 
may  be  of  hard  wood  ;  it  is  4  in.  long,  and  is  fixed  tightly 
in  a  hole  bored  in  the  support.  Having  adjusted  this 
spool  so  that  it  is  in  alignment  with  the  empty  spool  on 
the  spindle  E,  a  peg  is  inserted  and  glued  at  j  as  a  stop 
for  one  side  of  the  spool,  while  at  the  other  side  a  remov- 
able peg  K  is  provided.  These  should  be  just  far  enough 
apart  to  allow  absolutely  free  movement  of  the  spool. 
Instead  of  the  pegs,  it  is  an  improvement  to  fit  the  spindle 


i82         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

G  with  a  drop  catch,  spiral  spring,  and  disc  similar  to  those 
on  E  ;  but  the  spring  must  be  weak,  as  there  should  be  no 
resistance  to  the  unwinding  of  the  film. 

To  use  the  appliance,  a  full  spool  as  run  off  from  the 
projector  is  placed  on  the  spindle  G,  and  the  peg  K  is 
inserted  or  the  drop  catch  secured.  An  empty  spool  is 
adjusted  on  the  spindle 
E.  The  large  dotted 
circles  in  Fig.  129  show 
the  positions  of  the  two 
spools.  The  end  of  the 
film  is  carried  several 
times  round  on  the 
empty  spool,  then  on 


Fig.  131.— Collapsible    Film 
Winder 

turning  the  handle  the  film  will  be  rapidly  re-wound, 
since  the  spool  on  E  will  revolve  four  times  as  fast 
as  the  handle  is  turned.  Care  must  be  taken  that  the 
film  runs  freely,  otherwise  a  breakage  might  occur ; 
also,  it  is  necessary  to  stop  winding  just  before  coming 
to  the  end,  in  order  to  detach  the  film  from  the  spring 
clip  on  the  original  spool.  The  winder  is  adapted  for 
spools  up  to  9  in.  in  diameter  ;  but  by  increasing  the 
size  of  the  support  larger  spools  could  be  taken. 


CHAPTER    XVI 
Natural  Colour  Cinematograph  Pictures 

OF  the  many  attempts  to  produce  cinematograph 
pictures  in  natural  colours  on  a  scientific  basis,  as  distinct 
from  the  method  of  painting  or  dyeing  an  ordinary  film, 
the  greatest  amount  of  attention  so  far  has  been  at- 
tracted by  a  system  invented  by  G.  Albert  Smith,  and 
commercially  developed  by  Charles  Urban  under  the 
name  of  "  Kinemacolor."  In  this  system  (to  quote  from 
"  Cassell's  Cyclopaedia  of  Photography,"  edited  by  the 
editor  of  this  present  book),  only  two  colour  filters  are 
used  in  taking  the  negatives  and  only  two  in  projecting 
the  positives.  The  camera  resembles  the  ordinary 
cinematographic  camera  except  that  it  runs  at  twice 
the  speed,  taking  thirty-two  images  per  second  instead 
of  sixteen,  and  it  is  fitted  with  a  rotating  colour  filter 
in  addition  to  the  ordinary  shutter.  This  filter  is  an 
aluminium  skeleton  wheel  (Fig.  133)  having  four  segments, 
two  open  ones,  G  and  H  ;  one  filled  in  with  red-dyed 
gelatine,  E  F  ;  and  the  fourth  containing  green-dyed 
gelatine,  A  B.  The  camera  is  so  geared  that  exposures 
are  made  alternately  through  the  red  gelatine  and  the 
green  gelatine.  Panchromatic  film  is  used,  and  the 
negative  is  printed  from  in  the  ordinary  way,  and  it 
will  be  understood  that  there  is  no  colour  in  the  film 
itself. 

183 


l&t         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

The  projecting  apparatus  is  shown  in  Fig.  132.  It 
works  at  double  ordinary  speed,  projecting  thirty- two 
images  per  second,  sixteen  being  projected  through  the 
green  segment  of  the  colour  filter  A,  and  the  other  sixteen 
through  the  red  segment.  The  arrow  H  indicates  the 

direction  of  the  light  rays 
from  the  illuminant ;  c  is  a 
light  guard,  preventing 
stray  light  from  passing  to 
the  screen  ;  D  the  driving 
pulley,  F  the  film,  E  E 
safety  spool  boxes,  G 
governor  balls  and  B  safety 
shutter. 

A  special  feature  in  the 
formation    of    the    colour 


Fig.  132.— Kinemacolor 
Projector 


Fig.  133.— Kinemacolor 
Filter 


filter  must  now  be  referred  to.  Supplementary  to  the 
green  filter  A  B  (see  Fig.  133)  an  overlapping  segment  of 
green  is  filled  from  c  to  D  with  the  object  of  obtaining 
balance  of  colour,  since  red  is  more  vivid  to  the  eye  than 
green.  The  size  of  this  supplementary  segment  c  D  is  a 


NATURAL    COLOUR  CINEMATOGRAPH    185 

matter  of  importance.  If  it  is  not  large  enough,  the 
yellows  will  have  a  greenish  hue  ;  if  it  is  too  wide,  the 
green  will  be  too  dense  and  the  red  will  be  in  excess, 
giving  to  the  yellow  an  orange  hue.  If  the  red  and  green 
filters  have  been  rightly  balanced,  the  revolving  disc 
will  transmit  to  the  screen  a  neutral  white  "  colour." 

When  taking  the  negative  photographs,  the  speed  of 
film  through  the  camera  must  be  maintained  at  2  ft.  per 
second,  otherwise  the  object,  when  projected,  will  appear 
to  move  at  an  unnatural  pace.  Assuming  a  uniform 
rate  of  projection,  increased  speed  of  taking  will  cause 
an  effect  of  abnormally  slow  motion  in  the  projected 
pictures  ;  while  if  the  subject  is  taken  too  slowly,  the 
projected  images  will  show  everything  moving  too  fast. 

In  the  projecting  machine,  at  the  moment  when  the 
red  filter  is  opposite  the  lens,  a  monotone  image  taken 
through  the  green  filter  will  be  in  the  gate  and  be  pro- 
jected, and  vice  versa.  The  images  following  in  this 
order  at  the  high  speed  of  thirty-two  images  per 
second,  the  combined  effect  upon  the  screen  will  be 
a  picture  reflecting  not  only  red  and  green,  but  also 
their  complementary  or  accidental  colours  intermixed 
with  many  other  hues  resultant  from  the  blending 
of  the  red  and  green  proper. 

An  ideal  process  of  natural  colour  cinematography 
would  be  that  in  which  the  three  primary  colours  of  the 
solar  spectrum  were  embraced,  taking  the  negative  images 
through  suitable  colour  filters  and  projecting  positive 
images  therefrom  through  yellow,  blue  and  red  filters  ; 
but  the  chemical,  optical,  and  mechanical  difficulties  of 
doing  this  are  extremely  great. 


CHAPTER  XVII 
Making  Trick  Films 

IN  the  production  of  trick  films  resort  is  had  chiefly  to 
double  printing,  better  known  as  combination  printing. 
This  is  practised  when  transformation  scenes  have  to 
take  place,  such,  for  instance,  as  a  summer  landscape 
suddenly  becoming  a  winter  scene.  Also  in  cases  where 
spirits  from  the  unseen  world  are  made  to  appear,  or 
the  visions  and  dreams  of  a  sleeper  are  made  visible  as 
an  aerial  spectre.  All  such  effects  are  produced  by  com- 
posite printing.  It  will  be  noticed  that  in  most  cinemato- 
graph pictures  embracing  such  effects  the  composition 
contains  a  black  background  at  that  point  where  the 
apparition  first  makes  its  appearance,  and  herein  lies  the 
secret,  or  rather  the  possibility,  of  the  introduction  of 
the  ghostly  figures.  It  will  also  be  noticed  that  the  figures 
made  to  appear  are  generally  clad  in  white  attire. 

Ghost  Scenes.  —  The  trick  is  worked  as  follows  : 
Supposing  the  scene  is  one  in  which  a  ghost  has  to  make 
its  appearance.  Surrounding  or  at  the  side  of  the  black 
background  the  ordinary  furniture  of  a  room  may  be 
arranged,  the  occupants  taking  their  places  at  any  position, 
except  immediately  in  front  of  the  black  background 
referred  to,  which  place  is  essentially  kept  clear  for  the 
apparition.  The  stage  arrangement  having  been  com- 
pleted in  this  manner  the  scene  is  enacted  before  a  cine- 

186 


MAKING   TRICK   FILMS  187 

matograph  camera,  the  actors  assuming  to  see  the  ghost 
and  regulating  their  movements  accordingly.  The 
camera  operator  will  thus  have  secured  a  negative  show- 
ing a  scene  of  people  acting  as  though  they  saw  a  ghost. 
Without  moving  the  camera  from  its  original  position  a 
second  negative  film  is  taken ;  this  time  with  all  tite 
furniture  removed  from  the  stage,  and  the  back  entirely^ 
covered  with  a  black  cloth.  The  marks  on  the  stage 
floor  should  be  used  as  a  guide  to  the  one  acting  the  part 
of  the  ghost,  so  that  he  may  walk  in,  and  confine  his 
movements  to  the  limits  indicated  by  the  marks.  The 
ghost,  being  a  figure  clad  in  white,  first  stands  at  the 
position  where  he  is  to  become  visible,  and  then  moves 
forward  on  the  stage,  acting  as  though  making  motions 
and  signs  to  the  company  assumed  to  be  in  the  room. 
The  actions  must,  of  course,  be  so  arranged  as  to  fit  in 
with  the  acting  of  the  people  taking  part  in  the  scene 
previously  photographed,  and  the  length  of  time  oc- 
cupied by  the  ghost  is  also  regulated  to  agree  with  the 
previous  scene. 

The  second  negative  being  secured  completes  a 
pair  of  films  from  which  it  is  possible  to  make  a  so- 
called  composite-positive  print.  For  this  purpose  a  print- 
ing machine  is  used.  This  consists  of  mechanism  somewhat 
similar  to  that  used  for  the  projection  of  the  pictures 
on  the  lantern  screen,  only  instead  of  the  film  being 
intermittently  brought  to  a  standstill  it  is  carried  through 
the  apparatus  with  a  continuous  motion,  whilst  a  small 
slot-like  opening,  opposite  an  electric  lamp,  causes  it 
to  become  exposed.  Thus  the  developed  and  dried 
negative  film  is  turned  gelatine  side  towards,  and  in  con- 
tact with,  the  unexposed  and  sensitive  side  of  a  second 


i88         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

film  on  which  the  positive  is  to  be  made.  This  contact 
printing  is  very  similar  to  that  of  ordinary  negatives 
on  bromide  paper.  The  two  films  are  passed  simultane- 
ously, and  in  contact  with  each  other,  through  the  rotary 
printing  machine.  The  positive  film  having  passed 
through  with  the  first  negative  obtained  in  contact 
therewith,  it  is  passed  through  a  second  time  with  the 
second  negative  in  contact. 

At  this  stage  it  is  important  to  make  provision  for 
registration  of  perforations,  and  as  there  is  nothing  as 
yet  visible  on  the  positive  film  it  is  necessary  to  make 
some  indication  to  show  where  the  first  printing  from  the 
first  negative  commences.  Registration  is  all  important 
to  success.  To  make  the  ghost  appear  apparently 
out  of  thin  air  the  second  printing  is  regulated  with  this 
object  in  view.  Thus,  as  the  printing  of  the  ghost  com- 
mences, the  machine  is  operated  rather  fast  at  first,  and 
then  slowed  down  to  the  normal  speed.  The  result  is 
that  the  image  of  the  ghost  is  but  faintly  impressed  at 
the  commencement,  and  gradually  becomes  more  im- 
pressed with  the  increase  of  exposure.  The  reverse  will 
take  place  at  the  end  of  the  scene  or  film  if  the  speed  is 
varied.  Thus,  in  the  projected  picture  on  the  lantern 
screen,  the  ghost  will  gradually  make  its  appearance, 
and  as  gradually  fade  away.  When  the  positive  film 
has  received  its  duplex  impressions  from  the  two 
negatives  in  the  manner  described,  it  is  developed  in  the 
usual  way. 

"  Stop  Camera  "  Tricks. — The  sudden  appearance  and 
disappearance  of  figures  in  a  scene  is  often  produced  by 
the  "  stop  camera  "  trick.  A  scene  is  cinematographed, 
and  the  camera  may  be  stopped  working  for  a  moment 


MAKING   TRICK   FILMS  189 

to  allow  the  introduction  of  additional  figures  into  the 
scene,  the  figures  having  taken  up  their  positions  whilst 
the  camera  has  remained  inoperative.  The  camera  is 
again  worked,  and  the  scene  thus  continued  without  a 
break  in  the  series  of  pictures,  but  with  the  sudden 
addition  of  introduced  figures. 

Illusions  as  to  Size,  Distance,  Motion,  etc. — 
The  gradual  enlarging  of  objects,  and  the  diminution 
of  the  same,  can  be  produced  either  by  running  the  camera 
forwards  and  backwards  during  the  operation  of  taking, 
or  the  objects  can  be  moved  towards  or  away  from  the 
camera.  The  effect  of  a  balloon  ascent  can  be  produced 
by  keeping  the  balloon  stationary  within  the  field  of  view, 
whilst  a  background  roller  blind,  on  which  is  depicted 
clouds,  can  be  rolled  from  a  top  to  a  bottom  roller.  This 
will  create  the  impression  that  the  balloon  is  actually 
rising,  whilst  a  reverse  motion  of  the  blind  will  suggest 
that  it  is  descending. 

A  Man  Walking  through  a  Wall.— This  is  one  of 
the  double-exposure  type  of  trick  films.  Thus  a  picture 
is  first  taken  minus  the  man.  The  film  is  then  wound 
back  into  the  top  magazine  of  the  camera.  (Mechanism 
for  this  purpose  is  fitted  to  all  modern  trick  cameras 
for  cinematograph  work.)  The  amount  of  film  expended 
on  the  first  exposure  is  carefully  noted,  which  is  deter- 
mined by  reference  to  the  speed  indicator  fitted  to  the 
side  of  the  camera  ;  this  is  done  before  winding  back  into 
the  top  magazine.  Against  a  plain  background  the  man 
now  walks  through  an  allotted  space,  regulating  his 
movements  with  due  respect  to  the  assumed  presence  of 
the  wall.  The  film  is  run  through  the  camera  a  second 
time,  this  time  taking  the  man  only.  The  film  is  thus 


igo         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH   BOOK 

doubly  impressed.  On  development  a  negative  will 
have  been  secured  that  will  give  by  a  single  print  taken 
by  contact  a  picture  of  a  man  walking  through  a  visible 
wall. 

Appearing  and  Disappearing  Visions  in  a 
Seemingly  Well-lighted  Room.— This,  again,  depends 
for  its  results  on  the  double-printing  or  double-exposure 
method.  During  the  period  of  exposure  allotted  for  the 
spectral  appearances  the  space  to  be  so  occupied  is  vig- 
netted out  with  opaque  media,  so  that  the  first  exposure 
in  the  camera  results  in  impressions  of  the  interior  of  the 
room  with  its  furniture,  etc.,  but  with  an  unexposed  or 
blank  space  corresponding  to  that  to  be  occupied  by  the 
spectral  images,  timing  and  expenditure  of  film  length 
being  carefully  regulated  to  suit  the  time  the  spectral 
effects  are  to  be  evident.  The  first  exposure  made, 
the  film  is  wound  back  to  the  top  magazine  of  the  camera. 
The  vision  scene,  or  spectre,  is  now  to  be  impressed  on 
the  film.  An  opaque  mask  is  placed  in  the  exposure 
aperture  suitable  in  shape  for  completely  covering  the 
already  exposed  parts  of  the  film,  but  with  an  opening 
corresponding  to  the  part  first  vignetted  out.  Through 
this  aperture  the  spectral  image  is  to  make  its  impres- 
sion on  the  film,  as  it  is  for  the  second  time  run  through 
the  camera.  The  subject  forming  the  spectre  must  be 
situated  a  considerable  distance  from  the  camera  ;  so 
that  when  focused  sharply  and  reduced  to  a  plane  it  is 
of  the  right  magnitude  to  give  reduced  figures,  as  com- 
pared to  the  figures  or  figure  in  the  first  scene.  Melting 
away  effects,  otherwise  called  dissolving  effects,  may  be 
brought  about  in  various  ways.  Some  manufacturers 
produce  them  by  gradually  stopping  down  the  lens  during 


MAKING   TRICK   FILMS  191 

exposure,  which,  of  course,  produces  diminishing  exposure ; 
consequently  final  invisibility  obtains.  The  aperture  of 
the  iris  diaphragm  is  gradually  opened  out  for  reappear- 
ance. Other  makers  prefer  to  secure  the  effect  by 
control  of  the  light  during  the  printing  operations. 

Hand -bolted  Prisoner  Releasing  Himself  and 
Walking  Through  the  Bars  of  His  Apartment.— 
An  important  accessory  is  needed  here  in  the  form 
of  inflatable  rubber  arms  and  hands,  to  which  is 
attached  a  rubber  tube  and  bulb.  The  real  arms  and 
hands  of  the  prisoner  are  concealed  beneath  his  dress, 
so  that  he  is  free  to  actuate  the  artificial  limbs  at  the 
required  moments  and  in  the  required  manner.  When 
the  chains  are  put  on,  the  rubber  hands  are  inflated  by 
squeezing  this  secreted  bulb,  then  at  the  right  time  the 
bulb  is  allowed  to  go  free,  when  the  air  immediately 
rushes  out  of  the  hands,  allowing  the  latter  to  become 
i:mp,  elongated,  or  putty-like.  This  allows  the  chains 
to  fall  off.  When  the  prisoner  presses  the  bulb  the 
hands  again  assume  normal  proportions.  Walking 
through  the  bars,  or  rather  assuming  to  do  so,  is  produced 
by  the  double-exposure  dodge.  The  prisoner  is  absent 
during  the  first  exposure  when  the  bars  are  in  place,  and 
present  only  when  the  bars  have  been  removed  for  the 
second  picture  or  exposure. 

A  Horse  and  Cart  Going  up  a  House -side. — 
The  house  is  taken  on  the  film  first,  then  the  film  is  wound 
back  into  the  top  magazine  of  the  camera.  The  camera 
is  now  turned  on  its  side,  and  a  picture  of  the  horse  and 
cart,  travelling  over  a  prearranged  space,  is  taken  over 
the  same  film  by  exposure  a  second  time.  This  gives  a 
negative  showing  the  horse  and  cart  going  at  right 


192          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

angles  to  the  horizon,  corresponding  at  the  same  time 
with  the  perpendicular  position  of  the  house  or  wall. 
This  and  many  other  tricks  of  a  similar  nature  may  be 
done,  either  by  the  double-exposure  of  the  negative,  or 
two  separate  negatives  may  be  taken  and  double  printing 
resorted  to  when  making  the  positive  film.  The  former 
method  is  generally  that  adopted,  owing  to  the  greater 
simplicity  of  making  positives  afterwards,  a  large  number 
often  being  required.  It  is  also  better  because  the  same 
perforations  are  in  action  in  both  subjects  forming  the 
duplex  negative. 

Seraphim  in  the  "  Life  of  Christ "  are  made  to 
appear  and  disappear  by  adopting  one  of  the  methods 
above  described. 

The  Napoleon  Scene. — The  bust  on  the  mantel- 
piece is  gradually  vignetted  out  of  the  composition 
during  the  progress  of  the  film  through  the  camera.  A 
real  man  impersonating  Napoleon  is  printed  in  after- 
wards from  a  separately  obtained  negative.  The  dis- 
tance of  the  Napoleon  together  with  his  movements 
towards  the  camera  are  prearranged  with  regard  to  size 
and  positions  to  be  occupied  by  him.  The  space  where 
the  battle  appears  to  take  place  is  blocked  out  in  the 
film  first  exposed,  and  in  the  second  exposure  of  the  same 
film  the  space  to  be  occupied  by  the  view  of  the  room 
interior  with  its  dozing  veteran  is  blocked  out,  so  that 
the  spectral  space  only  is  subject  to  exposure.  The  group 
of  figures  constituting  the  battle  scene,  including  the 
veteran,  is  located  at  an  increased  distance  from  the 
camera,  so  that  its  magnitude  is  suitable  for  exactly  fill- 
ing the  space  reserved  for  the  phantom  scene.  The  lens 
is  focused  for  this  distance,  and  the  film  run  through  the 


MAKING   TRICK    FILMS  193 

camera  a  second  time.  From  this  it  will  be  understood 
how  it  is  possible  for  the  veteran  to  be  seen  dozing  in  his 
room,  and  at  the  same  moment  taking  part  in  the  battle 
scene  ;  for  he  is  not  required  to  be  in  two  places  at  the 
same  time  to  be  duly  photographed  in  both. 

A  True  Presentment. — The  camera  is  stopped  for 
the  purpose  of  substituting  a  mirror  for  a  picture,  while 
the  images  seen  in  the  mirror  get  there  by  reflection,  the 
actors  being  at  an  angle  with  the  mirror  and  at  such  a 
distance  that  their  magnitude  is  apparently  reduced. 
Double  exposure  is  here  resorted  to,  and  the  process  is 
similar  to  that  of  the  veteran  picture  already  described. 

It  is  worthy  of  note  that  these  reduced  living  images 
are  not  in  reality  reduced,  but  appear  to  be  so,  owing 
to  their  greater  distance  from  the  camera,  and  especially 
because  all  cinematograph  pictures  are  reduced  to  one 
plane  ;  that  is,  they  are  flat  images  on  a  flat  surface  (the 
lantern  sheet).  Hence  they  do  not  present  a  double 
perspective  for  consideration,  and  herein  lies  the  power 
to  deceive  the  eyes  of  the  observer,  who  is  unwittingly 
robbed  of  that  sense  of  sight  known  technically  as  binocu- 
lar perception  (vision  of  two  eyes  in  nature). 


CHAPTER    XVIII 
Cinematograph  Exhibitions  at  Home 

DRAWING-ROOM  cinematograph  displays  are  becoming 
increasingly  popular,  and  numerous  projectors  suitable 
for  home  exhibition  are  obtainable  at  prices  that  are 
modest  compared  with  those  of  the  heavier  and  more 
elaborate  machines  intended  for  use  in  halls  or  theatres. 
Thus  it  is  possible  to  procure  a  well-made  and  workman- 
like apparatus  taking  the  standard  Edison  gauge  films 
and  having  both  lantern  and  cinematograph  lenses,  so 
that  slides  may  be  shown  as  well  as  films,  from  about 
£5  153.  Less  expensive  still  are  the  cinematograph  attach- 
ments for  use  with  an  ordinary  magic-lantern.  These 
may  be  procured  in  various  patterns  from  £3  55.  It  is 
not  recommended  to  go  below  the  above  prices.  There 
are,  indeed,  many  cheaper  models,  but,  generally  speaking, 
they  are  only  toys,  and  are  not  adapted  for  the  serious 
exhibition  of  any  length  of  film.  The  larger  cinemato- 
graph supply  firms  often  offer  good  second-hand  pro- 
jectors at  reduced  prices,  or  they  may  sometimes  be  got 
by  studying  advertisements  of  articles  for  sale  or  ex- 
change. In  the  latter  case,  the  deposit-approval  system 
should  be  insisted  on.  As  the  vast  majority  of  films 
are  made  to  the  Edison  standard  gauge  and  perforation, 
it  is  the  best  policy  to  secure  a  projector  that  will  take  it. 
Many  cinematograph  dealers  supply  projectors  and 
194 


EXHIBITIONS    AT   HOME  195 

films  on  the  hire-purchase  system,  as  well  as  for  hire  by 
the  evening  or  week.  Terms  vary,  and  must  be  inquired 
individually.  Films  may  be  purchased  or  hired  at  much 
lower  rates  if  a  few  months  old,  a  newly-issued  film 
always  commanding  an  enhanced  price.  Beyond  a  few 
hints  as  to  the  class  of  entertainment  desired,  it  is  usually 
best  to  leave  the  choice  of  films  to  the  supply  firm.  In 
estimating  the  length  required  it  is  useful  to  remember 
that  about  i  ft.  of  Edison  standard  film,  containing 
sixteen  pictures,  is  run  through  the  machine  per  second — 
a  rate,  therefore,  of  3,600  ft.  per  hour  for  an  unbroken 
display. 

It  is  certainly  wiser  to  use  non-inflammable  film  for 
home  exhibitions,  if  possible,  since  it  does  not  call  for  so 
many  precautions  as  the  ordinary  celluloid  kind.  As- 
suming celluloid  film  to  be  used,  home  cinematograph 
displays  should  be  given  in  the  largest  room  available, 
so  that  a  clear  space  may  be  left  round  the  lantern.  If 
this  can  be  placed  in  a  doorway  just  outside  the  room,  so 
much  the  better,  as  in  case  of  any  mishap  the  audience 
may  instantly  be  cut  off  by  closing  the  door.  This  can- 
not be  done  unless  there  is  more  than  one  door,  as  an 
unobstructed  exit  should  always  be  available.  There 
should  be  no  curtains  or  drapery  near  the  lantern.  On 
no  account  should  the  operator  smoke,  nor  should  smok- 
ing be  allowed  anywhere  near  the  machine.  There  should 
be  no  naked  light  or  stove  in  proximity  to  the  film,  and 
the  supplies  must  not  be  close  enough  to  the  lantern  to 
get  hot. 

The  film  must  not  be  suffered  to  stand  still  while 
showing,  or  the  portion  in  the  gate  will  quickly  become 
hot  enough  to  ignite.  If  any  stoppage  occurs,  either  a 


196          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

safety  shutter  must  promptly  be  brought  into  action,  or, 
if  using  an  ordinary  lantern,  an  opaque  slide,  placed  in 
readiness  in  the  carrier,  may  be  pushed  forward  to  cut 
off  the  light.  It  is  safer  if  a  flat-sided  glass  tank  filled 
with  water  or  with  an  alum  solution  is  placed  between 
the  condenser  and  the  film  to  absorb  some  of  the  heat. 
It  will  be  as  well  to  form  a  barrier  of  some  kind,  even  if 
consisting  only  of  a  few  chairs,  to  prevent  anyone,  es- 
pecially children,  approaching  too  closely  with  inquisitive 
intentions.  The  films  should  not  be  left  lying  about 
before  or  after  the  exhibition,  but  should  be  kept  well 
out  of  harm's  way.  Loose  film  should  be  enclosed  in  a 
metal  box.  As  precautionary  measures,  two  buckets  of 
water,  a  bucket  of  dry  sand,  and  a  damp  blanket  should 
be  kept  close  at  hand.  A  reminder  may  here  be  ex- 
pedient that  a  home  display  with  celluloid  films  must 
be  strictly  private.  The  public  must  not  be  admitted, 
whether  for  payment  or  without,  otherwise  the  provisions 
of  the  Cinematograph  Act  (1909)  will  apply. 

The  arc  light  is  not  usually  available  for  home  dis- 
plays, nor  is  it  perhaps  the  safest  illuminant  for  the 
purpose  on  account  of  the  heat  produced  and  the  extra 
care  required.  As  the  screen  will  not  be  very  large  or 
very  distant,  so  powerful  a  light  is  really  unnecessary. 
Except  to  one  well  accustomed  to  handle  it,  limelight 
also  introduces  uncalled-for  complications.  Incan- 
descent gas  and  acetylene  are  very  suitable  for  a  small 
screen  not  over  about  3  ft.  in  diameter,  and  for  quite  a 
small  picture  it  is  even  possible  to  use  a  good  three-  or 
four-wick  paraffin  lamp.  As  the  film  picture  is  much 
smaller  than  a  lantern  slide,  it  is  easier  to  get  an  even 
and  concentrated  illumination.  The  cinematograph  ob- 


EXHIBITIONS   AT   HOME  197 

jective,  being  of  shorter  focus  than  a  lantern  objective, 
compensates  for  the  small  size  of  the  original  image  by 
giving  a  greater  ratio  of  enlargement  at  the  same  dis- 
tance from  the  sheet. 

The  screen  should  be  a  pure,  opaque  white ;  if  it 
lets  any  light  through,  so  much  is  obviously  lost.  A 
linen  or  calico  sheet  stretched  on  a  wooden  frame  and 
given  several  coats  of  good,  stiff  whitewash  is  difficult 
to  beat ;  or,  for  a  small  screen,  smooth,  thick  white 
Bristol  board  is  excellent.  It  is  an  improvement  if  the 
screen  has  a  black  margin  all  round,  almost  up  to  the 
picture.  The  apparent  size  of  the  screen  may  be  increased 
and  a  more  effective  display  obtained  by  draping  plush 
curtains  or  other  suitable  material  at  the  top  and  sides,  to 
simulate  a  stage,  and  disposing  a  few  plants  or  palms 
on  the  ground  in  front.  With  a  weak  illuminant,  in- 
capable of  giving  a  large  image,  the  lantern  will  have  to 
be  brought  very  close  to  the  screen,  and  will  be  in  the 
way  of  the  spectators.  In  such  a  case,  it  is  best  to  use  a 
tracing  paper  or  ground-glass  screen  set  in  a  curtained 
frame,  and  to  work  from  behind  it.  To  find  the  approxi- 
mate size  of  picture  at  a  given  distance,  divide  the  dis- 
tance of  the  cinematograph  from  the  screen  in  feet  by 
the  focus  of  the  lens  in  inches.  The  quotient  gives  the 
diameter  of  picture  in  feet.  Thus,  for  example,  at  6  ft. 
from  the  screen,  a  2-in.  focus  cinematograph  objective 
gives  a  3-ft.  picture. 

A  musical  accompaniment  to  the  pictures  is  now 
generally  expected.  A  little  thought  devoted  to  this 
to  secure  appropriateness  \vill  greatly  add  to  the  success 
of  the  entertainment,  especially  if  the  pianist  can  be 
coached  to  introduce  a  few  "  effects.*' 


198         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

The  cinematograph  should  be  stood  on  a  firm,  rigid 
support.  Anything  hollow,  such  as  a  box,  \vill  induce 
vibration  and  cause  unsteadiness  of  the  pictures.  The 
film  should  be  inserted  emulsion  side  to  the  condenser, 
with  the  pictures  upside  down.  If,  however,  the  machine 
is  worked  behind  a  transparent  screen,  the  celluloid  side 
should  face  the  condenser.  It  should  be  noted  that  the 
spool  has  the  commencement  of  the  film  outside,  for 
sometimes  it  is  supplied  as  last  wound  off,  when  the  end 
will,  of  course,  be  uppermost,  and  re-winding  on  another 
spool  is  necessary.  This  must  always  be  done  between 
any  two  exhibitions.  The  beginning  of  the  film  will  have 
the  sky  or  people's  heads  outwards. 

The  threading  up  varies  with  different  makes  of 
projectors ;  but  with  practically  all  it  should  be  seen 
that  a  short  loop  of  film  is  left  just  above  the  gate.  In 
addition  to  this,  a  Maltese  cross  machine  needs  a  loop 
between  the  intermittent  sprocket  wheel  and  the  take-up 
sprocket,  while  a  pin  or  claw  type  of  projector  requires 
a  loop  below  the  gate.  If  these  rules  are  not  observed 
a  breakage  is  probable.  Care  should  be  taken  that  the 
sprockets  engage  the  perforations  properly.  Needless  to 
say,  it  is  necessary  to  be  gentle  with  hired  films,  as  it 
will  not  do  to  return  them  scratched  or  damaged.  If 
in  doubt  as  to  the  working  of  the  machine  it  will  be  as 
well  to  buy  a  few  yards  of  discarded  film  and  to  practise 
running  this  through  until  the  method  is  grasped. 
Many  dealers  and  toyshops  sell  old  films  that  have  had 
their  day,  at  about  a  penny  per  yard. 

The  amateur  cannot  at  first  expect  to  insert  and 
change  the  films  with  anything  like  the  speed  of  an 
expert,  and  to  avoid  awkward  waits  it  is  decidedly 


EXHIBITIONS    AT   HOME  199 

advisable  to  have  a  machine  furnished  also  with  an 
ordinary  lantern  lens  so  that  a  few  stationary  slides  or 
announcements  may  be  shown.  If  well  chosen,  these 
will  have  a  good  effect  and  will  help  to  lengthen  an  other- 
wise too-short  programme.  The  machine,  in  such  a 
case,  either  slides  sidewise,  or  swings  round  so  that  the 
lantern  lens  is  presented  in  front  of  the  condenser  instead 
of  the  film  mechanism  and  objective  ;  or  the  lantern 
itself  slides  on  parallel  rails  or  grooves  while  the  cine- 
matograph casting  carries  the  two  objectives  side  by 
side  and  is  immovable.  The  lantern  lens  should  be 
separately  focused  with  a  slide  in  position  before  starting 
with  the  cinematograph.  To  the  novice  a  rehearsal 
beforehand  is  certainly  expedient. 

It  is  unwise  to  have  the  room  in  total  darkness.  A 
gas-jet  turned  almost  down  may  be  useful,  or,  better  still, 
one  or  two  metal  lanterns  glazed  with  red  glass ;  dark- 
room lamps  will  do.  The  seats  should  not  be  placed  too 
close  together  or  too  near  the  screen.  A  final  hint  that 
may  be  given  is  to  avoid  allowing  a  white  light  to  show 
on  the  screen  during  an  interval,  as  this  dazzles  the  eyes 
and  has  a  slipshod  appearance.  The  light  should  be 
cut  off  directly  the  end  of  the  film  is  reached  or  a  lantern 
slide  brought  into  view.  If  requested,  the  dealer  will 
supply  the  film  joined  up  on  the  spools  between  the 
different  items  with  black  spacing,  so  that  there  is  no  need 
for  a  stoppage.  It  is  then  only  necessary  to  exchange 
the  exhausted  spool  for  another  if  more  than  one  is  used. 

Projecting  Picture  Postcards,  etc.— A  pleasing 
break  in  the  home  cinematograph  entertainment  may 
take  the  form  of  picture  postcards,  other  small  pictures, 
or  even  solid  articles  in  relief  such  as  watches,  etc.,  being 


200          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

projected  in  all  their  natural  colours  on  the  screen,  the 
instrument  used  for  the  purpose  being  an  aphengescope. 
Figs.  134  to  136  show  details  of  a  lantern  for  projecting 
postcards,  Fig.  134  being  a  sectional  plan,  and  Fig.  135 
back  elevation,  with  the  revolving  door  removed.  The 


Fig.  134. — Horizontal  Section 
through  Picture  Postcard 
Projector. 


Fig.  136.— Revolving  Door 
of  Picture  Postcard 
Projector. 


Fig.  135.— Back  Elevation  of  Picture 
Postcard  Projector. 

body,  of  tinplate  or  sheet-iron,  is  i  ft.  square,  the  curved 
front  being  of  such  a  depth  that  the  centre  A  of  the  lens 
(Fig.  134)  is  at  a  distance  from  the  postcard  equal  to  its 
focal  length.  A  6-in.  focus  lens  A  will  be  suitable  ;  it 
should  be  of  large  aperture,  and  capable  of  covering  the 
full  postcard  size.  A  single  lens  is  unsuitable  ;  one  of 
the  portrait  or  lantern  type  is  required.  An  ordinary 


EXHIBITIONS   AT   HOME  201 

lantern  lens,  costing  from  8s.  6d.,  can  be  used,  but  as 
this  is  only  made  to  cover  a  slide  3^  in.  square  it  will 
not  project  the  whole  of  the  postcard.  If,  however,  the 
cards  are  selected  with  this  restriction  in  view,  that  is 
no  great  objection.  To  show  the  whole  of  the  postcard 
the  lens  should  cover  at  least  full  postcard  size  (5$  in.  by 
3 1  in.).  A  lantern  lens  is  usually  of  about  6-in.  focus, 
and  should  therefore  be  so  fixed  that  the  middle  of  the 
brass  mount  is  6  in.  distant  from  the  postcard.  The 
rack  adjustment  will  then  allow  sufficient  play  for  accurate 
focusing  on  the  screen.  At  the  back  of  the  lantern  is  a 
circular  opening  7  in.  in  diameter,  the  edge  being  re- 
cessed |  in.  all  round  to  receive  the  revolving  door.  Four 
bent  strips  are  fixed  to  keep  this  in  place,  two  being  sol- 
dered and  two  fastened  with  small  nuts,  so  that  they 
will  turn.  Holes  are  made  at  A  and  B  (Fig.  135)  to  engage 
the  milled-head  screw  on  the  door,  and  keep  the  latter 
in  the  correct  position  for  horizontal  or  vertical  pictures. 
The  revolving  door  (Fig.  136)  is  j\  in.  in  diameter,  with  a 
rectangular  opening  5^  in.  by  3^  in.  On  three  sides  of 
this  are  soldered  bent  guides  to  take  the  sheath  which 
holds  the  postcards,  as  indicated  by  the  dotted  lines.  At 
one  side  is  soldered  a  strip  of  brass  A,  bent  so  as  to  clear 
the  strips  round  the  circular  opening,  and  made  to  take 
a  milled  head  screw.  The  sheath  measures  5§  in.  by 
3f  in.  in  its  rectangular  part,  with  an  additional  £  in.  at 
the  curved  end  ;  J  in.  extra  is  allowed  on  three  sides 
for  turning  over,  which  should  be  done  so  that  the  sheath 
is  1-16  in.  deep  and  has  a  turned-over  portion  3-16  in. 
wide.  Two  incandescent  gas  burners  are  fitted  as 
shown,  with  cowled  chimneys  over  them  and  a  tap  at 
the  side.  The  burners  should  be  placed  so  as  to  give 


202         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

the  best  possible  light  on  the  postcard,  while  not  obstruct- 
ing the  path  of  the  reflected  rays  to  the  lens.  To  screen 
off  direct  light  from  the  lens,  reflectors  may  be  fixed  at 
B  and  c  (Fig.  134).  Ventilation  holes  should  be  made 
at  the  back  of  the  lantern,  and  covered  inside  with  bent 
strips  of  tinplate.  The  outside  may  be  japanned,  and 
the  inside  is  painted  white. 


CHAPTER  XIX 
Acts   and   Regulations 

THE  professional  operator  will  need  to  be  familiar  with 
the  Cinematograph  Act  of  1909  and  with  the  regulations 
issued,  under  that  Act,  by  the  Secretary  of  State,  and  also 
— in  the  London  area — with  the  regulations  adopted  by 
the  London  County  Council.  These  are,  therefore,  given 
word  for  word  in  this  chapter. 

CINEMATOGRAPH  ACT,   1909 
[9  EDW.  7.    CH.  30] 

1.  An  exhibition  of  pictures  or  other  optical  effects  by  means  of  a 
cinematograph,  or  other  similar  apparatus,  for  the  purposes  of  which 
inflammable  films  are  used,  shall  not  be  given  unless  the  regulations 
made  by  the  Secretary  of  State  for  securing  safety  are  complied  with, 
or,  save  as  otherwise  expressly  provided  by  this  Act,  elsewhere  than 
in  premises  licensed  for  the  purpose  in  accordance  with  the  provisions 
of  this  Act. 

2. — (i)  A  county  council  may  grant  licences  to  such  persons  as  they 
think  fit  to  use  the  premises  specified  in  the  licence  for  the  purposes 
aforesaid  on  such  terms  and  conditions  and  under  such  restrictions  as, 
subject  to  regulations  of  the  Secretary  of  State,  the  council  may  by  the 
respective  licences  determine. 

(2)  A   licence   shall   be   in   force   for   one   year   or   for   such   shorter 
period  as  the  council  on  the  grant  of  the  licence  may  determine,  unless 
the  licence  has  been  previously  revoked  as  hereinafter  provided. 

(3)  A  county  council  may  transfer   any   licence   granted  by  them  to 
such  other  person  as  they  think  fit. 

(4)  An  applicant  for  a  licence  or  transfer  of  a  licence  shall  give  not 
less  than  seven  days'  notice  in  writing  to  the  county  council  and  to  the 
chief   officer  of   police    of    the   police   area    in    which    the   premises  are 
situated  of  his  intention  to  apply  for  a  licence  or  transfer  : 

Provided  that  it  shall  not  be  necessary  to  give  any  notice  where  the 
application  is  for  the  renewal  of  an  existing  licence  held  by  the  applicant 
for  the  same  premises. 

203 


204          THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

(5)  There  shall  be  paid  in  respect  of  the  grant,  renewal,  or  transfer 
of  a  licence  such  fees  as  the  county  council  may  fix,  not  exceeding  in 
the  case  of  a  grant  or  renewal  for  one  year  one  pound,  or  in  the  case 
of  a  grant  or  renewal  for  any  less  period  five  shillings  for  every  month 
for  which  it  is  granted  or  renewed,  so  however  that  the  aggregate  of 
the  fees   payable   in   any   year  shall   not  exceed  one   pound,   or,   in   the 
case  of  transfer,  five  shillings. 

(6)  For  the  purposes  of  this  Act,  the  expressions  "  police  area  "  and 
"  chief  officer  of  police,"  as  respects  the  city  of  London,  mean  the  city 
and  the  Commissioner  of  City  Police,  and  elsewhere  have  the  same  mean- 
ings as  in  the  Police  Act,   1890. 

3.  If   the   owner    of   a   cinematograph    or   other   apparatus   uses    the 
apparatus,  or  allows  it  to  be  used,   or  if  the  occupier  of  any  premises 
allows  those  premises  to  be  used,  in  contravention  of  the  provisions  of 
this   Act   or   the   regulations   made   thereunder,   or   of  the   conditions   or 
restrictions  upon  or  subject  to  which  any  licence  relating  to  the  premises 
has  been   granted  under  this  Act,  he  shall  be  liable,  on  summary  con- 
viction,  to   a  fine   not  exceeding   twenty  pounds,   and  in  the  case  of  a 
continuing    offence    to    a    further   penalty   of  five   pounds   for   each   day 
during    with   the    offence   continues,    and    the   licence    (if   any)    shall   be 
liable  to  be  revoked  by  the  county  council. 

4.  A  constable  or  any  officer  appointed  for  the  purpose  by  a  county 
council  may  at  all  reasonable  times  enter  any  premises,  whether  licensed 
or  not,   in   which  he  has   reason  to  believe  that  such  an  exhibition  as 
aforesaid   is    being    or    is    about   to    be    given,    with   a    view    to    seeing 
whether  the  provisions  of  this  Act,  or  any  regulations  made  thereunder, 
and   the   conditions   of   any   licence   granted  under   this   Act,  have   been 
complied  with,  and  if  any  person  prevents  or  obstructs  the  entry  of  a 
constable  or   any  officer  appointed   as  aforesaid,   he  shall   be  liable,   on 
summary  conviction,   to  a  penalty  not  exceeding  twenty  pounds. 

5.  Without  prejudice  to  any  other  powers  of  delegation,  whether  to 
committees  of  the  council  or  to  district  councils,   a  county  council  may, 
with   or   without   any  restrictions  or  conditions  as  they   may  think   fit, 
delegate  to  justices  sitting  in  petty  sessions  any  of  the  powers  conferred 
on  the  council  by  this  Act. 

6.  The   provisions  of   this  Act   shall  apply  in   the  case   of  a  county 
borough    as    if    the    borough    council    were   a    county    council,    and    the 
expenses  of  the  borough  council  shall  be  defrayed  out  of  the  borough 
fund  or  borough  rate. 

7. — (i)  Where  the  premises  are  premises  licensed  by  the  Lord 
Chamberlain  the  powers  of  the  county  council  under  this  Act  shall,  as 
respects  those  premises,  be  exerciseable  by  the  Lord  Chamberlain  instead 
of  by  the  county  council. 

(2)  Where  the  premises  in  which  it  is  proposed  to  give  such  an 
exhibition  as  aforesaid  are  premises  used  occasionally  and  exceptionally 
only,  and  not  on  more  than  six  days  in  any  one  calendar  year,  for  the 
purposes  of  such  an  exhibition,  it  shall  not  be  necessary  to  obtain  a 
licence  for  those  premises  under  this  Act  if  the  occupier  thereof  has 
given  to  the  county  council  and  to  the  chief  officer  of  police  of  the 
police  area,  not  less  than  seven  days  before  the  exhibition,  notice  in 
writing  of  his  intention  so  to  use  the  premises,  and  complies  with  the 
regulations  made  by  the  Secretary  of  State  under  this  Act,  and,  subject 


ACTS   AND    REGULATIONS  205 

to  such  regulations,  with  any  conditions  imposed  by  the  county  council, 
and  notified  to  the  occupier  in  writing. 

(3)  Where   it   is   proposed  to   give   any  such  exhibition   as  aforesaid 
in    any   building   or   structure   of  a   movable  character,   it  shall   not  be 
necessary   to  obtain    a   licence   under   this   Act   from   the  council  of  the 
county    in   which    the   exhibition    is    to    be    given    if    the   owner    of   the 
building  or  structure  — 

(a)  has  been  granted  a  licence  in  respect  of  that  building  or  structure 
by  the  council  of  the  county  in  which  he  ordinarily  resides,  or 
by  any  authority  to  whom  that  council  may  have  delegated  the 
powers  conferred  on  them  by  this  Act  ;  and 

(d)  has  given  to  the  council  of  the  county  and  to  the  chief  officer 
of  police  of  the  police  area  in  which  it  is  proposed  to  give  the 
exhibition,  not  less  than  two  days  before  the  exhibition,  notice 
in  writing  of  his  intention  to  give  the  exhibition  ;  and 

(c)  complies  with  the  regulations  made  by  the  Secretary  of  State 
under  this  Act,  and,  subject  to  such  regulations,  with  any 
conditions  imposed  by  the  county  council,  and  notified  in  writing 
to  the  owner. 

(4)  This    Act    shall    not   apply   to   an   exhibition    given    in    a   private 
dwelling-house  to  which  the  public  are  not  admitted,  whether  on  payment 
or  otherwise. 

8.  This    Act    shall    extend    to    Scotland    subject    to    the    following 
modifications  :  — 

(1)  For  references  to  the  Secretary  of  State  there  shall  be  substituted 
references  to  the  Secretary  for  Scotland  : 

(2)  For    the    reference    to    the    Police    Act,     1890,    there    shall    be 
substituted  a  reference  to  the  Police  (Scotland)  Act,   1890  : 

(3)  The  expression  "  county  borough  "  means  a  royal,  parliamentary, 
or  police  burgh  ;   and  the  expression  "  borough  council  "  means 
the  magistrates  of  the  burgh;  and  the  expression  "  borough  fund 
or  borough  rate  "  means  any  rate  within  the  burgh  leviable  by 
the  town  council  equally  on  owners  and  occupiers  : 

(4)  The    provision    relating    to    the   delegation    of    powers    shall    not 


apply. 
9.  This 


Act    shall    extend    to    Ireland    subject    to    the    following 
modifications  :  — 

(1)  For  references  to  the  Secretary  of  State  there  shall  be  substituted 
references  to  the  Lord  Lieutenant  : 

(2)  The  provision   of  this  Act   relating  to   the  delegation  of  powers 
shall  not  apply  : 

(3)  Any  of  the  powers  conferred  on  the  county  council  by  this  Act 
may    be    exercised    by    any    officer    of   the    council    authorised    in 
writing  by  the  council  in  that  behalf  for  such  period  and  subject 
to  such  restrictions  as  the  council  think  fit  : 

(4)  In  any  urban  district  other  than  a  county  borough,  and  in  any 
town,   the  provisions  of  this  Act  shall  apply  as  if  the  council  of 
the  district  and  the  commissioners  of  the  town,  as  the  case  may 
be,  were  a  county  council  : 

(5)  The  expenses  incurred  in  the  execution  of  this  Act  shall  — 

(a)  in   the  case  of  the   council  of  any  county   other   than  fe 
county  borough,  be  defrayed  out  of  the  poor  rate  and  raised 


206         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

over  so  much  of  the  county  as  is  not  included  in  any  urbai 
district  or  town  ; 

(*)  in  the  case  of  the  council  of  any  county  borough  or  other 
urban  district,  be  defrayed  out  of  any  rate  or  fund  applicable 
to  the  purposes  of  the  Public  Health  (Ireland)  Acts,  1878  to 
1907,  as  if  incurred  for  those  purposes ; 

(c)  in  the  case  of  the  commissioners  of  any  town,  be  defrayed 
out  of  the  rate  leviable  under  section  sixty  of  the  Towns  Im- 
provement (Ireland)  Act,  1854  :  Provided  that  the  limits  imposed 
upon  that  rate  by  that  section  may  be  exceeded  for  the  purpose 
of  raising  the  expenses  incurred  under  this  Act  by  not  more 
than  one  penny  in  the  pound  : 

(6)  The    expression   "  town  "    means    any    town    as    defined    by    the 
Local    Government    (Ireland)    Act,     1898,    not    being    an    urban 
district  : 

(7)  The   expressions    "  police   area  "    and    "  chief    officer   of   police  " 
mean,   as   respects   the  police  district  of   Dublin   Metropolis,   that 
district  and  the  chief  commissioner  of  the  police  for  that  district, 
and   elsewhere   a   police   district  and   the  county   inspector  of  the 
Royal  Irish  Constabulary. 

10.  This  Act  may  be  cited  as  the  Cinematograph  Act,  1909,  and  shall 
come  into  operation  on  the  first  day  of  January  nineteen  hundred  and  ten. 

STATUTORY  RULES  AND  ORDERS,   1910    (No.    189) 

REGULATIONS,   DATED   FEBRUARY   18,   1910,   MADE  BY  THE  SECRETARY  OF 
STATE  UNDER  THE  CINEMATOGRAPH  ACT,  1909  (9  EDW.  7,  c.  30). 

In  pursuance  of  the  power  vested  in  me  by  the  Cinematograph  Act, 
1909  (9  Edw.  7,  c.  30),  I  hereby  make  the  following  regulations  : — 

GENERAL. 

1.  In    these   regulations   the   word   "  building  "   shall   be   deemed   to 
include  any  booth,  tent,  or  similar  structure. 

2.  No    building    shall    be   used    for   cinematograph   or   other   similar 
exhibitions    to   which    the   Act  applies,    unless    it   be   provided    with    an 
adequate  number  of  clearly  indicated  exits  so  placed  and  maintained  as 
readily  to  afford  the  audience  ample  means  of  safe  egress. 

The  seating  in  the  building  shall  be  so  arranged  as  not  to  interfere 
with  free  access  to  the  exits ;  and  the  gangways  and  the  staircases, 
and  the  passages  leading  to  the  exits  shall,  during  the  presence  of  the 
public  in  the  building,  be  kept  clear  of  obstructions. 

3.  The   cinematograph    operator    and    all    persons    responsible   for   or 
employed    in    or    in   connection    with   the  exhibition    shall    take    all   due 
precautions  for  the  prevention  of  accidents,  and  shall  abstain  from  any 
act  whatever  which  tends  to  cause  fire  and  is  not  reasonably  necessary 
for  the  purpose  of  the  exhibition. 

FIRE  APPLIANCES. 

4.  Fire  appliances  adequate  for  the  protection  of  the  building  shall 
be  provided,   and  shall  include  at  least  the  following,  namely,   a  damp 
blanket,  two  buckets  of  water,  and  a  bucket  of  dry  sand.     In  a  building 


ACTS   AND    REGULATIONS  207 

used  habitually  for  the  purpose  of  cinematograph  or  other  similar 
exhibitions  they  shall  also  include  a  sufficient  number  of  hand  grenades 
or  other  portable  fire-extinguishers. 

The  fire  appliances  shall  be  so  disposed  that  there  shall  be  sufficient 
means  of  dealing  with  fire  readily  available  for  use  within  the  enclosure. 
Before  the  commencement  of  each  performance  the  cinematograph 
operator  shall  satisfy  himself  that  the  fire  appliances  intended  for  use 
within  the  enclosure  are  in  working  order,  and  during  the  performance 
such  appliances  shall  be  in  the  charge  of  some  person  specially  nominated 
for  that  purpose  who  shall  see  that  they  are  kept  constantly  available 
for  use. 

ENCLOSURES. 

Regulations  applying  in  all  cases  and  to  all  classes  of  buildings. 

5. — (i)  (a.)  The  cinematograph  apparatus  shall  be  placed  in  an  en- 
closure of  substantial  construction  made  of  or  lined  internally  with  fire- 
resisting  material  and  of  sufficient  dimensions  to  allow  the  operator 
to  work  freely. 

(b.)  The  entrance  to  the  enclosure  shall  be  suitably  placed  and  shall 
be  fitted  with  a  self-closing  close-fitting  door  constructed  of  fire-resisting 
material. 

(c.)  The  openings  through  which  the  necessary  pipes  and  rabies  pass 
into  the  enclosure  shall  be  efficiently  bushed. 

(d.)  The  openings  in  the  front  face  of  the  enclosure  shall  not  be 
larger  than  is  necessary  for  effective  projection,  and  shall  not  exceed 
two  for  each  lantern.  Each  such  opening  shall  be  fitted  with  a  screen 
of  fire-resisting  material,  which  can  be  released  both  inside  and  outside 
the  enclosure  so  that  it  automatically  closes  with  a  close-fitting  joint. 

(e.)  The  door  of  the  enclosure  and  all  openings,  bushes  and  joints 
shall  be  so  constructed  and  maintained  as  to  prevent,  so  far  as  possible, 
the  escape  of  any  smoke  into  the  auditorium.  If  means  of  ventilation 
are  provided,  they  shall  not  be  allowed  to  communicate  direct  with  the 
auditorium. 

(/.)  If  the  enclosure  is  inside  the  auditorium,  either  a  suitable  barrier 
shall  be  placed  round  the  enclosure  at  a  distance  of  not  less  than  two 
feet  from  it,  or  other  effectual  means  shall  be  taken  to  prevent  the 
public  from  coming  into  contact  with  the  enclosure. 

(g.)  No  unauthorised  person  shall  go  into  the  enclosure  or  be  allowed 
to  be  within  the  barrier. 

(A.)  No  smoking  shall  at  any  time  be  permitted  within  the  barrier  or 
enclosure. 

(i.)  No  inflammable  article  shall  unnecessarily  be  taken  into  or 
allowed  to  remain  in  the  enclosure. 

Regulations  applying  only  to  specified  classes  of  buildings. 

(2)  In  the  case  of  buildings  used  habitually  for  cinematograph  or 
other  similar  exhibitions,  the  enclosure  shall  be  placed  outside  the 
auditorium ;  and  in  the  case  of  permanent  buildings  used  habitually 
as  aforesaid  the  enclosure  shall  also  be  permanent. 

Provided,  with  regard  to  the  foregoing  requirements,  that,  if  the 
licensing  authority  is  of  opinion  that  compliance  with  either  or  both  of 
them  is  impracticable  or  in  the  circumstances  unnecessary  for  securing 


208         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

safety  and  shall  have  stated  such  opinion  by  express  words  in  the  licence, 
the  requirement  or  requirements  so  specified  shall  not  apply. 

LANTERNS,  PROJECTORS  AND  FILMS. 

6.  Lanterns    shall    be    placed   on    firm    supports    constructed    of    fire- 
resisting   material,    and  shall   be  provided   with   a   metal   shutter   which 
can  be  readily  inserted  between  the  source  of  light  and  the  film-gate. 

The  film-gate  shall  be  of  massive  construction  and  shall  be  provided 
with  ample  heat-radiating  surface.  The  passage  for  the  film  shall  be 
sufficiently  narrow  to  prevent  flame  travelling  upwards  or  downwards 
from  the  light-opening. 

7.  Cinematograph    projectors    shall    be    fitted    with    two    metal   film- 
boxes  of  substantial  construction,  and  not  more  than  fourteen  inches  in 
diameter,    inside   measurement,   and   to   and   from   these   the   films   shall 
be  made   to  travel.     The  film-boxes  shall   be  made  to  close  in  such  a 
manner,  and  shall  be  fitted  with  a  film-slot  so  constructed,  as  to  prevent 
the  passage  of  flame  to  the  interior  of  the  box. 

8.  Spools   shall  be  chain  or   gear  driven   and   films  shall  be   wound 
upon   spools   so   that   the   wound   film    shall   not   at  any   time   reach   or 
project  beyond  the  edges  of  the  flanges  of  the  spool. 

9.  During  the  exhibition  all  films  when  not  in  use  shall  be  kept  in 
closed  metal  boxes. 

LIGHTING. 

10.  Where  the  general  lighting  of  the  auditorium  and  exits  can  be 
controlled   from   within   the  enclosure,   there  shall   also  be  separate  and 
independent  means  of  control  outside  and  away  from  the  enclosure. 

11.  No  illuminant  other  than  electric  light  or  limelight  shall  be  used 
within  the  lantern. 

Electric  Light. 

12.— (a.)  Within  the  enclosure  the  insulating  material  of  all  electric 
cables,  including  "  leads  "  to  lamps,  shall  be  covered  with  fire-resisting 
material. 

(b.)  There  shall  be  no  unnecessary  slack  electric  cable  within  the 
enclosure.  The  "  leads  "  to  the  cinematograph  lamp  shall,  unless  con- 
veyed within  a  metal  pipe  or  other  suitable  casing,  be  kept  well  apart 
both  within  and  without  the  enclosure  and  shall  run  so  that  the  course 
of  each  may  be  readily  traced. 

(c.)  Cables  for  cinematograph  lamps  shall  be  taken  as  separate 
circuits  from  the  source  of  supply  and  from  the  supply  side  of  the 
main  fuses  in  the  general  lighting  circuit,  and  there  shall  be  efficient 
switches  and  fuses  inserted  at  the  point  where  the  supply  is  taken,  and 
in  addition,  an  efficient  double-pole  switch  shall  be  fitted  in  the  cine- 
matograph lamp  circuit  inside  the  enclosure.  When  the  cinematograph 
lamp  is  working,  the  pressure  of  the  current  across  the  terminals  of  the 
double-pole  switch  inside  the  enclosure  shall  not  exceed  no  volts. 

(d.)  Resistances  shall  be  made  entirely  of  fire-resisting  material,  and 
shall  be  so  constructed  and  maintained  that  no  coil  or  other  part  shall  at 
any  time  become  unduly  heated.*  All  resistances,  with  the  exception  of 

*  e.g.,  they  should  not  become  so  heated  that  a  piece  of  newspaper  plactd  in 
contact  with  any  part  of  the  resistance' would  readily  ignite. 


ACTS   AND    REGULATIONS  209 

a  resistance  for  regulating  purposes,  shall  be  placed  outside  the  enclosure 
and,  if  reasonably  practicable,  outside  the  auditorium.  If  inside  the 
auditorium,  they  shall  be  adequately  protected  by  a  wire  guard  or  other 
efficient  means  of  preventing  accidental  contact. 

The  operator  shall  satisfy  himself  before  the  commencement  of  each 
performance  that  all  cables,  leads,  connections,  and  resistances  are  in 
proper  working  order.  The  resistances,  if  not  under  constant  observa- 
tion, shall  be  inspected  at  least  once  during  each  performance.  If  any 
fault  is  detected,  current  shall  be  immediately  switched  off,  and  shall 
remain  switched  off  until  the  fault  has  been  remedied. 

Limelight. 

13. — (a.)  If  limelight  be  used  in  the  lantern  the  gas  cylinders  shall 
be  tested  and  filled  in  conformity  with  the  requirements  set  out  in  the 
Appendix  hereto.  The  tubing  shall  be  of  sufficient  strength  to  resist 
pressure  from  without  and  shall  be  properly  connected  up. 

(6.)  No  gas  shall  be  stored  or  used  save  in  containers  constructed  in 
accordance  with  the  requirements  contained  in  the  Appendix. 

LICENCES. 

14.  Every  licence  granted   under  the  Act  shall  contain   specific  con- 
ditions for  the  carrying  out  of  regulations  2  and  5  (i)  (a),  (6),  (c),  (d), 
(e)>   (/)  in  tne  building  for  which  the  licence  is  granted,   and  may,  in 
accordance  with   regulation  5   (2),  contain  an  expression  of  opinion  on 
the  matters  referred  to  in  the  proviso  thereto. 

15.  Subject  to  the  provisions  of  No.    16  of  these  regulations,  every 
licence  granted  under  the  Act  shall  contain  a  clause  providing  for  its 
lapse,  or,   alternatively,  for  its  revocation  by  the  licensing  authority,  if 
any   alteration    is   made   in   the   building   or  the  enclosure   without   the 
sanction  of  the  said  authority. 

1 6.  Where  a  licence  has  been  granted  under  the  Act  in  respect  of  a 
movable  building,  a  plan  and  description  of  the  building,  certified  with 
the  approval  of  the  licensing  authority,  shall  be  attached  to  the  licence. 
Such   a  licence  may  provide  that  any  of  the  conditions  or  restrictions 
contained  therein  may  be  modified  either  by  the  licensing  authority  or 
by  the  licensing  authority  of  the  district  where  an  exhibition  is  about  te 
be  given.     The  licence  and  plan  and  description  or  any  of  them  shall  be 
produced  on  demand  to  any  police  constable  or  to  any  person  authorised 
by    the    licensing    authority   or   by   the   authority   in   whose  district    the 
building  is  being  or  is  about  to  be  used  for  the  purpose  of  an  exhibition. 

17.  The    regulations    dated    December    2oth,    1909,    made    under   the 
Cinematograph   Act,    1909,   are   hereby   repealed,  provided,   nevertheless, 
that  any  licence  granted  prior  to  such  repeal  shall  remain  valid  for  the 
period   for   which  it   was   granted   without  the  imposition  of  any  more 
stringent   condition    than    may   have   been    imposed    at   the   time   of  the 
grant. 

APPENDIX  TO  STATUTORY  RULES  AND  ORDERS. 

LIMELIGHT. 

The  gas  cylinders  shall  be  tested  and  filled  in  conformity  with  the 
requirements  set  out  below,   which  follow   the   recommendations  of  the 
O 


2io         THE    CINEMATOGRAPH    BOOK 

Departmental  Committee  of  the  Home  Office  on  the  Manufacture  of 
Compressed  Gas  Cylinders  [C.  7952  of  1896].  (Also  approved  by  the 
London  County  Council,  fan.  25,  1898)  : — 

Cylinders  of  Compressed  Gas  (Oxygen,  Hydrogen,  or  Coal  Gas). 

(a)  Lap-welded  wrought  iron. — Greatest  working  pressure,  120 
atmospheres,  or  1,800  Ibs.  per  square  inch. 

Stress  due  to  working  pressure  not  to  exceed  6$4  tons  per  square 
inch. 

Proof  pressure  in  hydraulic  test,  after  annealing,  224  atmospheres, 
or  3,360  Ibs.  per  square  inch. 

Permanent  stretch  in  hydraulic  test  not  to  exceed  10  per  cent,  of 
the  elastic  stretch. 

One  cylinder  in  50  to  be  subjected  to  a  statical  bending  test,  and 
to  stand  crushing  nearly  flat  between  two  rounded  knife-edges  without 
cracking. 

(6)  Lap-welded  or  seamless  steel. — Greatest  working  pressure,  120 
atmospheres,  or  1,800  Ibs.  per  square  inch. 

Stress  due  to  working  pressure  not  to  exceed  7>£  tons  per  square 
inch  in  lap-welded,  or  8  tons  per  square  inch  in  seamless  cylinders. 

Carbon  in  steel  not  to  exceed  0.25  per  cent,  or  iron  to  be  less  than 
99  per  cent. 

Tenacity  of  steel  not  to  be  less  than  26  or  more  than  33  tons  per 
square  inch.  Ultimate  elongation  not  less  than  1.2  inches  in  8  inches. 
Test-bar  to  be  cut  from  finished  annealed  cylinder. 

Proof  pressure  in  hydraulic  test,  after  annealing,  224  atmospheres, 
or  3,360  Ibs.  per  square  inch. 

Permanent  stretch  shown  by  water  jacket  not  to  exceed  10  per  cent, 
of  elastic  stretch. 

One  cylinder  in  50  to  be  subjected  to  a  statical  bending  test,  and 
to  stand  crushing  nearly  flat  between  rounded  knife-edges  without 
cracking. 

Regulations  applicable  to   all  Cylinders. 

Cylinders  to  be  marked  with  a  rotation  number,  a  manufacturer's 
or  owner's  mark,  an  annealing  mark  with  date,  a  test  mark  with 
date.  The  marks  to  be  permanent  and  easily  visible. 

Testing  to  be  repeated  at  least  every  two  years,  and  annealing  at 
least  every  four  years. 

A  record  to  be  kept  of  all  tests. 

Cylinders  which  fail  in  testing  to  be  destroyed  or  rendered  useless. 
Hydrogen  and  coal  gas  cylinders  to  have  left-handed  threads  for 
attaching  connections  and  to  be  painted  red. 

The  compressing  apparatus  to  have  two  pressure  gauges,  and  an 
automatic  arrangement  for  preventing  overcharging.     The  compress- 
ing apparatus  for  oxygen  to  be  wholly  distinct  and  unconnected  with 
the  compressing  apparatus  for  hydrogen  and  coal  gas. 
Cylinders  not  to  be  refilled  till  they  have  been  emptied. 
If  cylinders  are   sent   out   unpacked   the   valve   fittings   should   be 
protected  by  a  steel  cap. 

A  minimum  weight  to  be  fixed  for  each  size  of  cylinder  in  accord- 
ance with  its  required  thickness.  Cylinders  of  less  weight  to  be 
rejected. 


ACTS   AND    REGULATIONS  211 

L.C.C.  REGULATIONS  RESPECTING  THE  USE  OF  CINEMATOGRAPH  APPARATUS, 
ETC.,  IN  THEATRES,  AND  OTHER  PREMISES  LICENSED  BY  THE  COUNCIL. 
(Approved  by  the  Council,  April  6th,  1909.) 

(1)  No  cinematograph,  or  other  similar  apparatus  involving  the  use 
of  a  combustible   film,    shall   be  exhibited   on  premises   licensed   by  the 
Council    until    the   Council   has    been    satisfied   that   all    reasonable   pre- 
cautions have  been  taken  against  accidents  and  danger  to  the  public. 

(2)  Where  cinematograph  displays  do  not  form  a  regular  feature  of 
the  entertainment,   notice  of  any  intended  exhibition  shall  be  given  to 
the  Clerk  of  the  Council  by  the  licensee  of  the  premises  in  which  such 
exhibition  is  to  be  given,  and  such  notice  shall  be  given  at  least  three 
days    before    the    exhibition    takes    place.       Opportunity    shall    also    be 
afforded  to  the  Council's  inspector  of  inspecting  the  apparatus  at  least 
four  hours  before  the  public  exhibition  takes  place,   in  order  to  allow 
time   for  any   necessary  alterations  to  be   carried  out   and  approved  by 
the  Council's  inspector. 

(3)  In    no   circumstances   shall   a   cinematograph  chamber  be  placed 
so  as  to  interfere  with  the  free  use  of  an  exit-way,  and  any  temporary 
alteration  in  the  regular  line  of  a  gangway  must  be  amply  compensated 
for  by  the  re-arrangement  or  removal  of  seats. 

(4)  Where    cinematograph    displays    form    a    regular    feature    of    the 
entertainment,   the  apparatus  shall  be  placed  in  a  permanent  enclosure 
of    sufficient    dimensions    to   allow   the    operator   to    work   freely.     Such 
enclosure  shall  be  constructed  of  solid  incombustible  materials  not  less 
than  3   inches   thick   and  be  provided   with   a  proper  ventilating  trunk 
carried  from  the  highest  point  of  the  interior  of   the  enclosure  to  the 
outside  air.     The  entrance  to  the  enclosure  shall  be  fitted  with  a  self- 
closing,    fire-resisting   and   smoke-proof  door  placed  at  the  rear,   or  on 
the  operating  side  of  the  apparatus,  and  opening  outwards. 

Where  cinematograph  displays  are  occasionally  included  in  the  pro- 
gramme, the  lantern  shall,  if  a  permanent  enclosure  be  not  available, 
be  contained  in  a  smoke-proof  box  constructed  of  sheet  iron  on  sub- 
stantial framework  and  fastened  together  securely.  The  box  shall  be 
of  sufficient  dimensions  to  allow  the  operator  to  work  freely  and  the 
floor  shall,  if  boarded,  be  covered  with  asbestos  or  other  fire-resisting 
material.  Such  enclosure  shall,  wherever  practicable,  be  ventilated 
direct  to  the  outside  air,  and  the  entrance  door  thereto  shall  be  self- 
closing  and  smoke-proof. 

Openings  not  larger  than  is  necessary  for  effective  projection,  and 
not  exceeding  in  number  two  for  each  lantern,  shall  be  permitted  in  the 
front  face  of  the  enclosure.  The  openings  shall  be  fitted  with  a  fire- 
resisting  screen  or  screens,  which  on  being  released  from  either  the 
inside  or  the  outside  of  the  enclosure  shall  close  automatically  with  a 
smoke-proof  joint. 

The  necessary  pipes,  electric  cables,  etc.,  shall  enter  the  enclosure 
through  properly  bushed  openings. 

(5)  The    lantern    shall    be    placed    on    firm    supports   of   fire-resisting 
construction.     The   lamp   or   jet    shall    stand   on   an    iron    tray,    with   a 
vertical  edge  at  least   i  inch   in  depth.     The  lantern   shall  be  provided 
with  a  metal  shutter  which  can  be  readily  inserted  between  the  source 
of  light  and  the  film  gate. 


212         THE   CINEMATOGRAPH   BOOK 

The  film  gate  shall  be  of  massive  construction,  and  provided  with 
ample  heat  radiating  surface,  and  the  passage  for  the  film  shall  be 
sufficiently  narrow  to  prevent  flame  travelling  upwards  or  downwards 
from  the  light  opening. 

(6)  Where   possible,    the   electric  arc   light  shall   be   adopted   as   the 
illuminant,  the  Council's  regulations  for  securing  safety  in  an  electrical 
installation  being  observed.     Circuits  in   which  there  is  a  pressure  ex- 
ceeding 250  volts  between  the  poles  or  from  either  pole  to  earth,  shall 
not  be  allowed  in  connection  with  the  apparatus.     Where  the  apparatus 
is  used  in  a  portable  box  a  permanently  installed  circuit  shall  be  carried 
to    a    convenient    point    having    regard    to    the    usual    position    of    the 
apparatus.     Resistances  shall  be  fixed  in  approved  positions  and,  where 
practicable,    outside    the    enclosure.     A    small    resistance    for  regulating 
purposes    will,    if   desired,    be   allowed    within    the   enclosure,    but   such 
resistance  shall  be  fixed  above  the  level  of,  and  behind  the  lantern. 

All  live  terminals  and  fittings  shall,  as  far  as  practicable,  be  pro- 
tected so  as  to  minimise  the  risk  of  short  circuit  or  shock.  Suitable 
fuses  shall  be  provided  at  each  pole  for  the  main  circuit  and  for  each 
of  the  sub-circuits,  e.g.  the  sub-circuits  for  pilot  lights. 

If  limelight  be  used  in  the  lantern  the  general  regulations  for  its 
safety,  which  are  issued  by  the  Council,  shall  be  complied  with,  special 
attention  being  given  to  the  tubing,  which  shall  be  of  sufficient  strength 
to  resist  pressure  from  without,  and  shall  be  properly  connected  up. 
Ether  and  other  inflammable  liquids  shall  not  be  employed  under  any 
circumstances  for  producing  light. 

(7)  All  cinematograph  projectors  shall  be  fitted  with  two  metal  film 
boxes    of    substantial   construction,    and    not    more    than    12    inches    in 
diameter,  inside  measurement,  to  and  from  which  the  film  shall  travel. 
Such  boxes  shall  be  made  to  close  in  a  manner  which  will  prevent  the 
ingress  of  fire,  and  shall  be  fitted  with  a  film  slot  capable  of  preventing 


the  passage  of  flame  to  the  interior  of  the  film  box.     Gearing  should  be 
used  in  preference  to  flexible  belts  for  driving  the  "  take-up  "  spool. 

All  films  when  not  in  the  machine,  and  while  still  in  the  operating 
enclosure,  shall  be  contained  in  such  closed  metal  boxes. 

(8)  (a)  Smoking  within  the  enclosure  shall  be  forbidden  at  all  times. 

(b)  Storage  of  any  description  shall  not  be  permitted  within  the 

enclosure. 

(c)  Adequate  small   fire   appliances,   including  a   bucket  of  sand, 

shall   be  kept   available  outside   the  enclosure  and  be   in 
the  charge  of  a  special  attendant. 

(d)  The  general  lighting  of  the  hall  and  exits  shall  not  be  con- 

trolled solely  from  within  the  operating  enclosure. 

(e)  A  suitable  barrier  shall  be  placed  round  the  temporary  box  to 

prevent  the  audience  coming  into  contact  therewith. 

(9)  The  licensee  shall  be  held  responsible  for  seeing  that  the  Council's 
regulations  are  complied  with  in  every  respect,  and  for  the  employment 
of    competent,    experienced    and    trustworthy    operators,    and   shall    be 
prepared   at  any    time  to   supply   to   the   Council   satisfactory   credentials 
in  this  respect. 

(10)  The  Council  reserves  to  itself  the  right  of  requiring  the  adop- 
tion of  any  further  precautions,  in  addition  to  those  specified  above,  as 
circumstances  may  require. 


INDEX 


ACCUMULATORS,  poles  of,  126 
Acetylene,  88,  91 

burners,  91,  95 

,  compressed  and  dissolved,  95 

generators,  91-94,  96 

,  oxy-,   116 

,  purifying,  94 

Aeroscope  camera,  20 
Alternating  current,  117,  118 

,  carbons  for,  144 

,  converting,   150,  151 

:  use  of  choking  coil,  133 

Amateur's  camera,  17-19 
Ammeter,  124 

Ampere,  117,  131 
Aphengescope,  200 
Arc,  striking  the,  128,  140 
,  the  term,  138 

lamp,  88 

:  amperes  required,  90,  130 

:  calculations,  130 

carbons,    139-144    (for    detj 

see  Carbons) 

,  connecting  up,  118-121 

:  crater,  140-143 

,  hand-feed,  118,   138,   139 

parts,  62 

:  striking  the  arc,  128,  140 

:  voltage  required,  129 

B.T.U.,  117 

Beard's  biojector  jet,  n* 

"  Ideal  "  arc  lamp,  143 

regulator,  102 

Biograph,  n 
Biojector  jet,  no 
Bioscope,  ii,  la 

Box,  operating,  171,  172 
Bruce  aerial  screen,  156 

CABLES,  133-136 

Cam  and  claw  movement,  68 
—    movement,  diamond,  69 
Camera,  aeroscope,  20 

,  amateur's,  17-19 

,  daylight-loading,   18 

described,  13-17 

film  measurer,  17 

punch,  17 

speed  indicator,  17 

for  trick  work,  17 


Camera   lenses,  29 

,  loading,  23 

,  operation  of,  33 

pin  or  claw  movement,  16 

,  professional's,  20 

,  reflex,  19 

shutter,   16 

speeds,   29 

stands  or  tripods,  20,  21 

used  as  printer,  47 

,  using,  25 

Cameragraph  movement,  69 
Carbons  for  alternating  current,   144 
,  arrangement  of,  144 

,  care  of,  140,  141 

:  crater,  140-143 

,  fine  and  coarse,  139 

,  high-voltage,  143 

,  low-voltage,  143 

:  striking  the  arc,  128,  140 

Carburettor,  114-116 
Casler's  biograph,  n 
Cements,  film,  177-179 

,  ,  non-flam,   179 

Choking  coil,  use  of,  133 
Chrono-photographe,  n 
Cinematograph  Act,  1909,  203-206 

:  rules  and  orders,  206 

Cinematograph,  the  word,  12 
Cinematography,  23-57 

Claw  and  cam  movement,  68 

—    movement,  16,  68 
Cleaners,  film,  175 
Cleaning  films,  174 

after  developing,  43 

projectors,  167-169 

Coil,  choking,  133 
Colouring  films,  52 

Colours,  natural,  pictures  in,  183-185 
Condensers,   lantern,  77-81 
Conductors,  electrical,  133-136 
Conjugate  foci,  79 
Continuous  current,  117 

,  carbons  for,  143 

Converter,  auto,  151 

,  rotary,  151 

Crater  in  carbon,  140-143 
Cut-off  shutter,  74,   173 
Cylinder  keys,  101 

valves,  100 

Cylinders,  gas,  100,  10* 


2I3 


214 


INDEX 


DALLMEYER'S   lenses,  29 

Davenport  arc  lamp,  118 

Davy's  discovery  of  electric  arc,  138 

Daylight  projection,  156 

Demeney's  chrono-pbotographe,  11 

dog  movement,  64 

Developer,  39 

,  glycin,  55 

,  hydroquinone,  49 

,  metol-hydroquinone,  40 

Developing  negative  film,  36-45 

positive  film,  49 

Development  frame,  36,  37 

troughs  and  tanks,  38 

Diamond-cam  movement,  Power's,  69 
Distance    from    screen    and    choice    of 

objective,  83-86 
Dog  movement,  64,  65 
Drying  films,  41 
Dyeing  films,  52 
Dynamo-motor,  150 
Dynamos,  144-150 
,  portable  petrol-driven,  149 


EDISON'S  kinetoscope,  10 

Electric  arc  lamps  (see  Arc  Lamp) 

-  conductors,  133-136 

-  connections,  118 

-  current,  117 

--  ,  alternating,  117,  118 

-  -   calculations,  122-124,  126-133 

-  -  ,  continuous,  117 

-  -  ,  resistance  to,  121-133 

-  incandescent  lamp,  consumption  of, 

lag,  130 

-  motor-generators,  150,  151 

-  motors,  144-150 
Ether  for  saturators,  115 
Evans's  invention,  9 
Exposure  meters,  using,  31 
Exposures,  27-32 

-  ,  under  and  over,  42-45 


FILM,  a 


boxes  or  spool  cases,  74 
cements,  177-179 
cleaners,  175 
cleaning,  174-179      . 

,  after  developing,  42 

consumption  per  minute,  6 

developing,  36-45 

drying,  41 

dyeing,  52 

gate,  6,  59,  72,  169 

loading  camera  with,  23 

manufacturing,  21.  aa 

mask,  72 

measurer,  17 

menders,  179 

negative,  developing,  36-45 

non-flam,   cement   for,  179 

,  positive,  printing,  46-57 
punch,  17 


Film  repairing,  176 
,  size  of,  6 

sp.eed  indicator,  17 

,  spotting,  175,  176 

:  how  supplied,  21 

,  threading,  in  projector,  169 

,  tinting,  52,  53 

,  toning,  50-52 

trap,  care  of,  169 

,  under-exposed,  42 

winders,  180-182 

,  winding,  in  projector,   160 

Fire  regulations,   171-173,  206-212 

Fixing  bath,  40 
Flicker,  reducing,  164-167 
Focal  length  of  lens,  80 
Frames  used  in  developing,  36,  37 
Friction-grip  movement,  69 
Friese-Greene's  invention,  9 
Fuse,  127,  128,  135-137 

Fusing  current  capacities  of  conductors, 
'35 


GATE,  59 

-  ,  care  of,  169 

-  film  mask,  72 

-  ,  size  of,  6 
Gauges,  pressure,  104-106 

-  ,  reading,  105,  106 
Geneva  movement,  66 
Ghost  scenes,  186-188 


HANDLE  turning,  163 
Hand-camera  cinematography,  20 
Historical  notes,  9-12 
Home  exhibitions,  194-199 
Hydrogen  fittings,  106 

-  ,  low-pressure,  106 

-  ,  supply  of,  106 


S,     87-153     (fo 
rate  headings) 


(for     details,     set 


ILLUMINANTS, 
separ 

,  centring,  113,  159 

,  choice  of,  89,  90 

compared,  86-89 

Illuminating  power,  standard  of,  88 

of  picture,  90 

Incandescent  gas   as   illumiuant,   87 
Intensifiers,  44 
Intermittent  movements,  16,  64-72 

JET,  blow-through,  108 

,  ejector,  109 

,  injector,   109 

management,  112 

,  mixed,  109 


KAMA   acetylene   generator   and   burners, 
96 


INDEX 


215 


Kamm's  arc  lamp,  139 

machine,  iz 

oxygen  generation,  107 

Kiaemacolor,  183-185 
Kinematograph,  the  word,  it 
"  Kinoplastikon  "  illusion,   157 
Kineto  cam  and  claw  movement,  68 
Kinetoscope,  10 


L INTERN  parts,  63 
,  principle  of,  3 


slides,  5 

Lens  action,  74 

,  camera,  29 

,  care  of,  86 

,  condenser,  77-81 

:  conjugate  foci,  79 

:  focus  or  focal  length,  80 

to  give  picture  of  certain  sire,  83-86 

,  "  rapidity  "  of,  28 

stops,  37 

Lenses,  various  simple,  74 
Limes,  97 

,  care  of,  98 

,  Mabor  moulded,  99 

,  management  of,  in 

,  "  pastille,"  97,  99.  ><» 

Limelight,  88,  96-116 

:  burst  tubes,  etc.,  113,  "4 

:  compressed  gases,  97,  106 

:  cylinder  valves,  100 

:  cylinders,  100,  103 

:  distinguishing  between  O.  and  H. 

fittings,  106 

,  fitting  up  for,  in 

:  gauges,  104-106 

jets,  .08-,.. 

:  hme  tongs,  98 

:  limes,  97-99 

,  management  of,  113-114 

:  oxygen  generation,  107.  108 

,  oxy-acetylene,  116 

,  oxy-hydrogen,  96-116 

:  pastilles,  97,  99.  '<» 

:  regulators,  103-104 

:  saturator  or  carburettor,  114 

L.C.C.  regulations,  311,  sia 
Lubricating  projector,  167-169 
Lucretius,  book  by,  i 


MABOR  limes,  99 
Magic  lantern  and  slides,  3-7 
Maltese-cross   movement,  66 
Masking,  163 
Measurer,  film,  17 
Menders,  film,  179 
Messter's  optical  screen,  157 
Motor-generators,  150,  151 
Muybridge's  invention,  9 


NATURAL-COLOUR  pictures,  183-185 
Negative  film,  developing,  36-45 


Negative  pole,  determining,  1*5 
Non-flam  film  cement,  179 


OBJECTIVE,  81-86 
,  assembling,  8a 

required  to  give  picture  of  certain 

size,  83-86 
Ohm,  .33 

Ohm's  law  of  resistance,  tai 
Oil  as  illuminant,  87 
Oiling  projectors,  167-169 
Operating  box,  171,  172 
Operator's  kit,  158,  159 
Optical  lantern  and  slides,  3-? 
Orders  under  Cinematograph  Act,  306-3(0 
Oxygen  fittings,  106 

generation,  107,  108 

Oxy-acetylene  limelight,  116 
Oxylith,  oxygenite,  etc.,  108 


PASTILLES,  97,  99,  100 
Petrol-driven  dynamo,  149 
Picture-postcard  projectors,  199-303 
Pin  and  cam  movement,  68 

or  claw  movement,  16,  68 

frame,  37 

Positive  film,   printing  and   developing, 

46-57  (**<  also  Film) 
Positive  pole,  determining,  125 
Postcard  projectors,  199-202 
Power's  diamond-cam  movement,  69 
Pressure  gauges,  104-106 

regulators,  103-104 

Principle,  cinematographic,  1-3 
Printers,  46,  47 

Printing  positive  film,  46-57 
Professional's  camera,  30 
Projecting  lens,  81-86 
Projector:  centring  the  light,  113,  159 
,  cleaning,  167-169 

described,  58-64 

film-trap,  care  of,  169 

:  nicker,  164-167 

•*— :  handle  turning,  163 

:  masking,  163 

,  oiling,  167-169 

, ,  operating,  158-169 

,  optical  system  of,  74-86 

shutters,  165-167 

:  take-up  mechanism,  73,  163 

:  threading  film,  160 

and  its  various  pacts,  58-64 

:  winding  filnij  160 

Prosiynski's  aeroscope,  to 
Punch,  film,  17 


REDUCERS,  negative,  43 

Reflex  camera,  ip 

Regulations   under  Cinematograph  Act, 

306-310 

,  fire,  171-173 

,  L.C.C.,  an,  at* 


216 


INDEX 


Regulators,  automatic,  io»,   103 

,  non-automatic,  104 

Resistance  to  current,   121-133 
Resistances  or  rheostats,  use  of,  126 
Rotary-converter,   151 
Rules  and  orders  under  Cinematograr 
Act,  206-210 


SATURATOR,  114-116 
Screens,  aerial,  156,  157 

,  Bruce,  156 

,  Daylight  projection,  156 

,  flexible,  dressing  for,  154 

,  invisible,  157 

,  Messter's  optical,  157 

,  opaque,  154 

,  silver,  155,  156 

,  sizes  of,  155 

,  transparent,   156 

,  wall,   155 

Shutters,  camera,  .6,  29 

,  projector,  70-72,  165-167 

Silver  screens,  155,  156 
Simmonar's  bioscope,  n 
Size  of  picture  and  choice  of  objective, 

83-86 

Smith,  G.  Albert,  183 
Speed  indicator,  17 

of  camera  shutter,  ag 

projector,   6 

Spool  cases,  74 
Staged  subjects,  34 
Stands,  camera,  20,  at 


Story  pictures,  35 
Switches,  152,  153 

TAKE-UP  mechanism,  73,  163 
Tanks,  development,  38 
Tinting  films,  52,  53 
Title  films,  53-57 
Toning  films,  50-52 
"  Topicals,"  33 
Transformers,  151,  152 
Trick  films,  186-193 

work,  camei  a  for,  17 

Tripods,  camera,  20,  21 
Troughs,  development,  38 


UNIT  of  current,  117 

Urban  and  "  Kinemacolor,"  183 

Urban's  bioscope,  n 

VISION,  persistence  of,  i 
Volt,  117 
Voltmeter,  124 

WALTURDAW  arc  lamp,  141 
two-machine  lay-out  or  wiring  dia- 
gram, 130 
Watts,  117 
Wheel  of  life,  i 
Winders,  film,   180-182 
Wires,  conducting,  133-136 

ZOETROFE,    I 


PRINTED  BY  CASSELL  &  COMPANY,  LIMITED,  LA  BELLE  SAUVAGE,  LONDON,  E.C. 
15-916 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

305  De  Neve  Drive  -  Parking  Lot  17  •  Box  951388 

LOS  ANGELES,  CALIFORNIA  90095-1388 
Return  this  material  to  the  library  from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


JAN  1  0  2005 


3  1158  00384  9550 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


AA    000427857    8